Home

The Reign of the Anti-Christ (Part One)

More than 2,500 years ago the Hebrew prophet Daniel predicted that a child would be born in the “latter days” of the earth, before the return of the Christ. This child would grow up to be a mighty King who would rule many nations and cause his enemies to tremble.

“And in the latter time of their kingdom, when the transgressors are come to the full, a king of fierce countenance, and understanding dark sentences, shall stand up.”

“And his power shall be mighty, but not by his own power: and he shall destroy wonderfully, and shall prosper, and practise, and shall destroy the mighty and the holy people.”

“And through his policy also he shall cause craft to prosper in his hand; and he shall magnify himself in his heart, and by peace shall destroy many: he shall also stand up against the Prince of princes; but he shall be broken without hand.” (Daniel 8: 23-25)

In his vision of the events that would occur shortly before the return of the true Christ, John wrote in chapter thirteen of the Book of Revelation:

“And I stood upon the sand of the sea, and saw a beast rise up out of the sea, having seven heads and ten horns, and upon his horns ten crowns, and upon his heads the name of blasphemy.” (Verse 1)

“And the dragon gave him his power, and his seat, and great authority.” (Verse 2)

“And they worshipped the dragon which gave power unto the beast: and they worshipped the beast, saying, who is like unto the beast? Who is able to make war with him?” (Verse 4)

“And it was given unto him to make war with the saints, and to overcome them: and power was given him over all kindreds, and tongues, and nations.” (Verse 7)

As was pointed out in Part Three of The Three Days of Darkness, shortly before he died, St. Francis of Assisi called together his followers and warned them of the coming tribulation, saying:

“The time is fast approaching in which there will be great trials and afflictions; perplexities and dissensions, both spiritual and temporal, will abound; the charity of many will grow cold, and the malice of the wicked will increase.

“At the time of this tribulation a man, not canonically elected, will be raised to the Pontificate, who, by his cunning, will endeavor to draw many into error and death. Then scandals will be multiplied, our Order will be divided, and many others will be entirely destroyed, because they will consent to error instead of opposing it.

“Sanctity of life will be held in derision even by those who outwardly profess it, for in those days JESUS CHRIST WILL SEND THEM NOT A TRUE PASTOR, BUT A DESTROYER”.

So, the man that the Old Testament prophet Daniel called “a king of fierce countenance”, and who was referred to by St John simply as “the beast”, is revealed by St Francis to be the “DESTROYER” of mankind.

Based on what these sources have indicated, it is clear that this coming manifestation of Satan Incarnate will be the agent of greater destruction than any of the other ruthless conquerors in the prior history of the earth.

Yet when he appears on the world scene, he will not be regarded as a tyrant or as a menace to society. Instead, he will be welcomed as a saviour and as a man of peace. In fact, he will rival the Prince of Peace himself.

The Bible makes it clear that the man referred to as “the beast” in the Book of Revelation will have the power to perform miracles. He will have the power to heal the sick and feed the hungry. He will even have the power to raise the dead.

He will be a man of the people and loved by the people. His magnetic personality will attract followers from all walks of life. He will be a leader who will have the ability to inspire confidence in others and convert them to his own ideas.

His greatest talent will be his ability to communicate. He will be a superb orator and his words will mesmerize his audiences. He will know exactly what to say in every situation. He will use technology to spread his ideas, and will be a master of every medium of publicity.

Because millions of people believe that only a divine being can perform miracles, they will be convinced that this man actually is the risen Christ who has returned to the earth as he promised. They will not realise until it is too late that “by peace he shall destroy many”.

We can find an echo of the words of the prophet Daniel in a dream which occurred to a young man in 1980. Pastor Ken Peters of Corona, California, is regarded by many as one of the leading interpreters of end-time prophecy in the world today.

While he was still in his teens, Ken had a vivid dream. At the time, he was not a practising Christian, nor did he have any interest in Bible prophecy. Yet, as a result of this dream, he committed his life to Christ and to spreading the news of his dream.

As he explains in this brief video below, in the aftermath of the three days of darkness causing world-wide destruction, there will arise a man who will come to dominate the world. Ken calls him “the most handsome man I have ever seen”.

The full version of his dream can be seen here

The Oracle of Tolemac has much to say about the man who will rule the world for a period of seven years, and “who will destroy wonderfully”. Here are a few excerpts from The Last Days of Tolemacwhich are set out in question and answer format.

Q: How do we know that the tribulation will last seven years? 

A: In his Book of Revelation, John divides this time of tribulation into two parts. The first part starts from the time that the “great mountain” is cast into the sea, up to the time when the Anti-Christ goes to Jerusalem to crown himself a living God, which is referred to in the Bible as the “abomination of desolation”.

The second part covers the period from the “abomination” up to the time when Jesus returns to the earth on the Day of Judgment. John gives the length of these two periods in chapter eleven of his Book of Revelation.

“But the court which is without the temple leave out, and measure it not; for it is given unto the Gentiles: and the holy city shall they tread under foot forty and two months.”

“And I will give power unto my two witnesses, and they shall prophesy a thousand two hundred and threescore days, clothed in sackcloth.” (Revelation 11: 2-3)

From the time that the Anti-Christ begins his mission on the earth after the destruction caused by the comet, up to the time when he travels to Jerusalem, there will be 1,260 days. This amounts to three years and five and a half months.

The period from the “abomination” of the Anti-Christ up to the return of Jesus is recorded as forty-two months, or three and a half years. This is the same time period mentioned by John in chapter thirteen of the Book of Revelation.

“And there was given unto him a mouth speaking great things and blasphemies; and power was given unto him to continue forty and two months.” (Revelation 13: 5)

This seven-year period of tribulation will begin when the comet approaches the earth. It will be followed almost immediately by a series of tidal waves that will devastate coastal cities everywhere. Then will begin the “fiery hail” of meteorites that will set fire to the earth.

The scale of death and destruction caused by this catastrophe will be without parallel in the history of the earth. A third of all the creatures in the sea will die. A third of all the ships in the sea will be destroyed. Hundreds of millions of people in every nation will die on that terrible day that will soon come to pass.

Q: When will this destruction happen? 

A: It will come at a time when the country of Israel is in peril. This will be the sign to all the peoples of the world that the “last days” are at hand. The Middle East is the key to the prophecies of the last days and the destruction that is to follow. The secret to understanding the prophecies of the future lie in the history of the past.

Some 3,500 years ago, when Moses was herding sheep, he was attracted to the sight of a burning bush on the side of Mount Horeb. When he approached the bush a voice spoke to him out of the flames, saying:

“I am the God of thy father, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob. And Moses hid his face; for he was afraid to look upon God.”

“And the Lord said, I have surely seen the affliction of my people which are in Egypt, and have heard their cry by reason of their taskmasters; for I know their sorrows;”

“And I am come down to deliver them out of the hand of the Egyptians, and to bring them up out of that land unto a good land and a large, unto a land flowing with milk and honey.” (Exodus 3: 6-8)

We have already seen how Moses took the Hebrew slaves out of Egypt and after many years of wandering led them to the Promised Land of milk and honey, which is where they live today. But it was the devastation caused by a comet and the plagues that followed that persuaded Pharaoh to allow Moses to leave Egypt. As it was in the past, so will it be in the future.

For just as a comet came to the aid of the people of Israel in their time of affliction in the past, so another comet will come to save them from great danger in the days that lie ahead. And just as happened in the days of Moses, this comet will appear at exactly the right moment in history.

From the point of view of the Jews, the appearance of this comet will seem like a miracle, because it will not only save them from disaster, but it will also cause their enemies to be destroyed.

Q: Why should God save the Jews and kill their enemies? 

A: God does not save one group of people and destroy another. But the Jews have a special link with the events that are about to unfold on the earth. For it was out of Israel that Jesus was born to bring his message of hope and light to the world, and it will be to Israel that he will return at the end of the age as the Redeemer of mankind.

The early Hebrew prophets like Ezekiel, Daniel, Joel, Malachi, Zechariah and others, not only predicted events that would occur in their own times, but they also predicted the events that are about to happen in our own times.

It was the prophet Ezekiel who set out in detail what would happen in Israel during the “last days”, and it was Ezekiel who predicted exactly when the comet would return. The divine plan that has been slowly unfolding on the earth for thousands of years is about to reach its appointed climax.

Q: When will the Great Tribulation begin? 

A: Many of you will now understand the prophecies recorded in the Bible, and the events that will unfold during the seven-year period leading up to the return of the Christ. As has been prophesied, these “last days” will begin and end in Israel.

You will know that the time of the tribulation is at hand when you see the nation of Israel surrounded by the armies of its enemies. Ezekiel refers to these armies as those belonging to “Gog”, “Persia”, “Ethiopia” and “Libya”, as well as “all his bands”.

“And say, thus saith the Lord God; behold, I am against thee, O Gog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal: Persia, Ethiopia, and Libya with them; all of them with shield and helmet:”

“Gomer, and all his bands; the house of Togarmah of the north quarters, and all his bands: and many people with thee.”

“Thou shalt ascend and come like a storm, thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land, thou, and all thy bands, and many people with thee.” (Ezekiel 38: 3-9)

The nation of “Gog” in the land of “Magog”, refers to the countries of Russia and the allies that will come from the “north parts”. The armies that will march on Israel will be a huge Islamic Confederation that will be drawn from all the Arab countries that surround Israel.

This vast mechanized army will assemble on the borders to the north, south and east of Israel. But before it can move into Israel itself, the entire armed force will be overcome by the natural disasters caused by the comet. Ezekiel writes that only “a sixth part” of the invading armies will survive.

“Therefore, thou son of man, prophesy against Gog, and say, thus saith the Lord God; behold, I am against thee, O Gog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal: And I will turn thee back, and leave but the sixth part of thee, and will cause thee to come up from the north parts, and will bring thee upon the mountains of Israel:”

“And I will smite thy bow out of thy left hand, and will cause thine arrows to fall out of thy right hand. Thou shalt fall upon the mountains of Israel, thou, and all thy bands, and the people that is with thee: I will give thee unto the ravenous birds of every sort, and to the beasts of the field to be devoured.”

“Thou shalt fall upon the open field: for I have spoken it, saith the Lord God. And I will send a fire on Magog, and among them that dwell carelessly in the isles: and they shall know that I am the Lord.”

“So will I make my holy name known in the midst of my people Israel; and I will not let them pollute my holy name any more: and the heathen shall now that I am the Lord, the Holy One in Israel. Behold, it is come, and it is done, saith the Lord God; this is the day whereof I have spoken.” (Ezekiel 39: 1-8)

After the comet has passed, the countryside will be littered with the wreckage of armaments and the bodies of the dead. So many people will die on the open plains that it will take the Israelis seven months to bury them all. During that time the stench of rotting flesh will fill the air. Wild beasts and birds of prey will feed on the carcasses of the dead.

“And it shall come to pass in that day, that I will give unto Gog a place there of graves in Israel, the valley of the passengers on the east of the sea: and it shall stop the noses of the passengers: and there shall they bury Gog and all his multitude: and they shall call it the valley of Hamongog.” 

“And seven months shall the house of Israel be burying of them, that they may cleanse the land.” (Ezekiel 39: 11-12)

“And, thou son of man, thus saith the Lord God; speak unto every feathered fowl, and to every beast of the field, Assemble yourselves, and come; gather yourselves on every side to my sacrifice that I do sacrifice for you, even a great sacrifice upon the mountains of Israel, that ye may eat flesh, and drink blood.” (Ezekiel 39: 17)

Ezekiel writes that when the people of Israel see that their enemies have been destroyed, and that they have been spared from destruction by means of a divine miracle, they will be converted into fervent believers. They will understand that their nation truly is a nation of destiny, and that they have a special Covenant with God.

“And I will set my glory among the heathen, and all the heathen shall see my judgment that I have executed, and my hand that I have laid upon them. So the house of Israel shall know that I am the Lord their God from that day and forward.” (Ezekiel 39: 21-22)

Q: How will this change the nation of Israel? 

A: The state of Israel will be completely transformed. Whereas up until this time the nation will be divided by fierce political rivalries, the Jews will now come together with a renewed sense of unity and purpose. They will rebuild their nation according to the teachings of Moses.

They will be assisted in this by another miracle. Because their enemies will have been utterly routed by the disasters caused by the comet, the Jews will be free at last to build a new Temple of Solomon on its traditional site on Mount Moriah in Jerusalem.

Q: What will happen to the Dome of the Rock and the Al Aqsa Mosque? 

A: The sacred shrines that now stand on the Temple Mount in the old city of Jerusalem will collapse. The earthquakes and the meteorites will leave both of these holy places in ruins, allowing the Jews to build a third Temple, to replace the one that was destroyed by the Romans.

When this Temple is rebuilt according to the original plans, the Jews will once again restore their practice of sacrificial worship in the Tabernacle of the Temple. The Sanctuary will once again be a place of ritual purity, and it will be the focal point of the Jewish religion.

The Jews will not be prevented from worshipping in this Temple, even though this will be the time when the Anti-Christ will be gathering followers throughout Western Europe. At this time the Anti-Christ will be seducing many with his talk of peace and love. He will not yet show his diabolical side.

This will not come about until he is assassinated, and is then miraculously brought back to life. It is then that he will seek to be recognized as a living God and worshipped by all the peoples of the world. This will be the time when he will go to Jerusalem to be crowned.

Continued in Part Two 

Allan, The Reign of the Anti-Christ, January 3, 2020, 11:59 am

The Cosmic Web

In 1987 I wrote a book called “The Cosmic Web”. It began with the following words:

The central theme of this book is that each of us spins a web of thought which becomes for us our personal reality. This web of thought creates the world we see around us, the creatures that inhabit it, the mountains and the seas, the forces of nature, as well as the vast cosmos of intergalactic space.

“Everything that we experience in this universe is a product of our minds. This cosmic web of thought becomes for us a paradise or a prison. And because we ourselves have spun this web, each one of us is free to change it if we wish. We truly are the gods and creators of our cosmic playground, and the art of living becomes the art of spinning what we want”.

The book consisted of twenty chapters which are summarised below.

Chapter One – The Tangled Web

The chapter begins with a statement of the central theme of the book, which is that each one of us spins a cosmic web of thought, which becomes for us our personal reality.

Because the universe is a subjective phenomenon, and not an objective reality, as we have for so long believed, we are always free to recreate our personal universe in a way which conforms to our desires. Each one of us is free to spin a web of personal belief which then reveals itself as our individual reality.

This theme is not new. It is shown to be an idea that has its roots in the earliest writings of humanity. It has been echoed by spiritual Sages from generation to generation. It is also an idea that has found corroboration in the discoveries of nuclear physics.

The book is an investigation of personal reality, and draws on a richly varied cast, including ancient philosophers and modern scientists. It is illuminated by evidence drawn from an eclectic range of sources. In the investigation of reality, it examines particular anomalies which at present defy conventional scientific explanation. In so doing, it is guided by the maxim of John Herschel, who observed that:

“The occurrences which, according to received theories, ought not to happen, are the facts which serve as clues to new discoveries.”

The chapter concludes with selected anecdotes, each of which details a specific occurrence which, according to accepted scientific thinking, ought not to have happened, yet which clearly has happened. These cases serve to illustrate the tangled web of confusion which surrounds our current perception of reality.

Each of these cases is further analysed in succeeding chapters, in a way which reveals an insight into a new view of the universe.

Chapter Two – An Arc of Light

In this chapter, the medieval concept of the universe is outlined, together with the major historical developments whereby this medieval system of thought gave way, step by step, to the edifice of classical science that existed at the dawn of the nuclear age.

Reality, according to the medieval system of thought, is described within its context of Judaeo-Christian theory, as embellished by Aristotelian philosophy.

This geocentric view of the universe, with man as the centre of creation and the reason for its being, was undermined, first by Copernicus and later by Galileo. Despite the determined efforts of the Church to withstand these onslaughts, a new approach towards an understanding of reality became established in the form of empirical science, whereby speculative theory became subject to observational confirmation.

This new system of analysis reached its zenith in the life and work of Isaac Newton, who was able to link specific features of the natural world together in precise mathematical relationships, which could then be confirmed by physical experiment.

Although Newton deferred to the idea of an omnipotent creator, who was responsible for the harmonious conduct of the universe, this divine role in the workings of nature was opposed by Rene Descartes. His ideas subsequently led to the emergence of a mechanical view of nature, in which the universe was considered to be bound by distinct and inviolable laws of behaviour.

These laws reduced the universe to a phenomenon that was both consistent and predictable. This comfortable world of classical science was shattered by the explosion of the atomic bomb. While this revolutionary development has pitched the world into an age of potential cataclysmic destruction, it also heralds an era of understanding which promises, ultimately, to enable humanity to transcend the apparent limitations of matter, energy, space and time.

Chapter Three – The Embarrassing Menagerie

The discoveries of the inner constituents of the atom provided scientists with revolutionary insights into the nature of reality.

It was only in the twentieth century that scientists acquired the means to delve into the structure of the atom, and to discover its constituents. Initial experiments were conducted by Ernest Rutherford, who used radioactive energy in the form of alpha particles to bombard the atom.

However, these radioactive particles had insufficient strength to penetrate the nucleus. Scientists then began to develop special devices which enabled them to accelerate particles artificially to the point where they had sufficient energy to smash the atomic nucleus.

These collision experiments led to the discovery of numerous hitherto unsuspected particles. Instead of the few elementary particles which scientists had expected to discover inside the atom, they were astonished to find more and more new particles. These particles were not stable in themselves, but broke down spontaneously into yet other particles.

The atom, which had previously been considered to be a dense piece of ultimate matter, was now found to host a menagerie of subsidiary particles, none of which were either fixed or elementary.

The subatomic world came to be recognised as a constant interchange of energy; a cosmic dance of creation and annihilation. Atoms were found to possess no ultimate ingredients. Furthermore, the predictability of the old interpretation of reality depended on the ability to make fixed measurements of the movements of individual particles. Werner Heisenberg demonstrated that this was impossible, because the very act of measurement altered the motions of the particles concerned.

The classical idea of a predictable world had to be abandoned. This unpredictability made the world a more insecure place, but it led scientists to glimpse the possibility that the universe might not actually be the product of fixed laws. It might, in fact, be subject to the manipulation of our minds.

Chapter Four – Creators of the Universe

Classical scientists considered space and time as separate aspects of nature that existed independently of each other. It was the paradox of the consistency of the recorded speed of light which led Albert Einstein to challenge this assumption.

Einstein proved that the speed of light could only be constant if space and time themselves changed, and did so in relation to the observer. The classical concept of space and time thus had to be replaced by a single unified concept of space/time. Any change in the one would inevitable lead to an alteration of the other.

Einstein also showed that matter was equivalent to energy. The energy which existed in matter was not inert, however, for it seemed to display intelligence, as shown in the double-slit experiment of light. John Clauser and Stuart Freedman demonstrated further that one particle was capable of influencing another, even though the two particles were vast distances apart.

This demolished the classical principle of local causes, which required that physical effects must necessarily be the result of directly related causes. Particles seemed, in fact, to know precisely what other particles were doing, and were able to alter their behaviour accordingly.

Because the entire universe is comprised of the same substratum of energy, it is not possible at the subatomic level to separate one object from another. Furthermore, whatever is seen is not independent of the observer, for the observer always interacts with what is observed.

The “observer” of classical science has had to be replaced by the term “participator”. Quantum mechanics has thus shown that there is no such thing as a universe that is separate from the observer. Whatever is seen is inextricably bound up with the mind of the observer.

The universe thus resolves itself into a subjective phenomenon appearing in consciousness. This leads to the revelation that it is we ourselves who hold the key to creativity, and that we are not pawns in a giant, uncaring universe. By changing the contents of our minds, we are free to change the nature of our universe.

Chapter Five – In Search of Reality

In its quest for an understanding of the true nature of the universe, science has been led, gradually but inexorably, to the study of metaphysics.

In order to learn the true nature of reality, it is necessary to investigate the nature of ourselves, the “participators” in this panorama of creation. This investigation has long been the focus of oriental philosophy, which has its roots in the teachings of the ancient Rishis of India.

The discoveries of these early Rishis were at first transmitted orally to chosen disciples. Later, they came to be written down, and have since passed into the literary tradition, under the title of the Vedas. These writings contain the distillation of the teachings of the ancient Rishis.

They taught that there existed one single Reality, which they called “Brahman”, that underlay all transient forms, and which formed the substratum of the universe.

This Reality had a twin aspect. It was the ultimate principle of creation, yet was itself impervious to change. It also existed at the heart of all conscious life in the form of the “I am” sensation. The Rishis laid down four major paths which led to the personal discovery of this Reality. They were the paths of Bhakti, Karma, Jnana and Raja-Yoga.

The teachings of the Indian Rishis were paralleled by the Chinese sage Lao-Tse, who called this primal Reality Tao. The same ideas permeate the teachings of the Buddha and of the Christ, just as they continue to be taught today by the modern Rishis of India.

Each of the paths delineated by the ancient Rishis has yielded exemplars in the twentieth century, in the persons of Sri Ramakrishna, Mahatma Gandhi, Sri Aurobindo, Sri Ramana Maharshi and Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj.

In order to pursue further the true nature of the phenomenal world, it is easier to refer to the words of these modern mystics, who have themselves transcended the limitations of the mind, and are thus able to provide direct insights into the real nature of the world.

Chapter Six – Into the Void

The Reality which underlies the phenomenal universe is hidden by an obscuring veil, which is the creative womb of all life. All manifested forms emerge from this dark cavern which mystics call the Void.

The power which generates the appearance of form is referred to by the Rishis as Maya. Maya manifests in form through energy which the ancients called Prana. This Prana is not an inert form of energy, but is intrinsically intelligent. All created form thus manifests inherent intelligence. This energy is not only intelligent, but conscious.

This consciousness, which is reflected in the individual creature as the “I am” sensation, is the dim glow of primordial Awareness which characterises Supreme Reality. Consciousness emerges as a natural consequence whenever energy coalesces into form.

It is the by-product of form, and cannot exist independently of form. When the form “dies”, the consciousness associated with that form dissolves, and the primal intelligent energy which made up that form reverts to the undifferentiated state of the Void. The same principle animates all created form.

It is the presence in consciousness of the sense “I am”, which gives rise to personality. Images generated by the projecting power of Maya are displayed upon the screen of consciousness. These images are retained by the faculty of memory.

By linking successive images together in memory upon the thread of the “I am”, the illusory personality emerges. This personality has no basis in Reality, but is a consequence of the projection of images in consciousness. Each personality is thus a sequence of images, held together in memory. When consciousness subsides into the primal energy of the Void, the imagined personality vanishes with it.

Just as the personality is an illusory creation arising out of the projections of Maya, so the world is equally illusory. The phenomenal world is simply a series of images projected in consciousness. The personality and the world share similar natures, and are mutually independent.

The appearance of personality is always accompanied by an appearance of the world, and vice-versa. The apparent age of the universe is equally illusory, for it is continually being created, moment by moment, in consciousness.

Chapter Seven – The Eye of the Mind

We have become so conditioned by the evidence of our senses, that we confidently claim that what we sense is a true reflection of an outer world that exists independently of ourselves.

Yet we are surrounded by evidence which demonstrates that what we sense is illusory and is, in fact, a projection of our minds. The most common evidence of this projective process is the phenomenon of hallucination.

Various examples are given of these and other visionary states that are conjured up by psychedelic substances. The experiences of Aldous Huxley are used to describe the nature of these experiences, as well as the sense of reality which they impart.

While hallucinogenic experiences are most frequently prompted by chemical agents, they can equally well be triggered by such states as exertion, stress or emotional shock. Instances of such cases are provided.

Ultimately, however, no outward stimulus at all is needed for the mind to create hallucinogenic effects. They can be experienced merely by stopping the customary flow of images to the brain. Deprived of outer stimulation, the mind cunningly substitutes images, sounds, smells, etc. of its own selection, as experiments in sensory deprivation conducted by John Lilly clearly show.

Further examples of subjective projections are those of religious visions. The experiences recounted by Carl Jung testify to their scope and veridical nature. Finally, there is the universal experience of dreams, which demonstrate the ability of the mind to project images and events which rival, in every respect, those of the “real” world.

All of these examples show vision to be a projective faculty of mind, rather than a simple process of witnessing a real, outer world.

A detailed examination of the accepted process of vision reveals that science is unable to contribute any understanding of the way in which electrical signals in the brain are converted into images in consciousness. The brain, in fact, is actually a creation of the mind, and not the other way around, as sages and mystics have long testified.

Chapter Eight – The Realm of Thought

Every visionary state, including that of the waking world, is characterised by a series of fleeting images registered upon our conscious minds. All these worlds are dependent on consciousness, and vanish when consciousness disappears.

We have imagined our waking images to be products of our physical brains. Yet, as the Sages have confirmed, our brains, as well as our bodies, are themselves images contained in the mind. The mind itself is nothing more than a sequence of thoughts. Our entire universe is simply a collection of thoughts.

Without thought, there can be no universe and no presiding personality. Our personal reality is a creation of thought. Each system of reality is unique to each thinker, and varies from one personality to another. There is no outer universe that is common to all people.

Each one of us creates our own universe, which takes its character from the contents of our minds. As we change the contents of our minds, so the nature of the universe that we experience changes too. Because we are also creatures of thought, if we wish to change our personalities, we have only to change the nature of our thinking. This is the testimony of the Sages.

Not only is the content of our universe shaped by our thoughts, but the experiences which befall us are moulded by our desires. We are free to determine the nature of our experiences in life by choosing the nature of our desires.

The crucial element in the creative process of desire is faith, which is the determination to act on our desires in the confident belief that they will come to pass. The stronger the desire, and the more clearly it is focussed in the mind, the more quickly it is able to manifest in physical form.

The universe is infinitely plastic. It can be moulded into any shape we wish. It responds to any desire that is imprinted upon the mind that projects it. There are no rules, nor are there any laws which limit the potential expression of the universe. We are ever free to spin the cosmic web of our dreams.

Chapter Nine – Shades of the Prison-House

The unborn child lives at first like an enlightened Sage, being a simple witness to events which are reflected on the screen of consciousness. As the child grows, it begins to associate its sense of being, the “I am” within, with the images it witnesses. The images then begin to be held in memory, creating a sequential path of personality.

To the infant, the images that it sees are initially mere reflections in consciousness. As the personality seeks to interact with these images, however, it learns to project these images, and in so doing to create for itself a three-dimensional world filled with objects in space that are subject to events in time.

In the creation of its world, the young child is guided by the thought-forms of its parents, and later by the thinking that is characteristic of its culture. Each child thus learns to create for itself a world that is commonly shared by others in that society. This acquisition of culture is a process of moulding the thinking of the child, so that it successfully learns to create a world of consensus.

Although the child is free to create a world of its own choice, it is condemned to isolation unless it learns to create a world that is consistent with that of its own society. It is in this way that the child comes to share a common universe of experience. It learns to spin a cosmic web of thought that matches the common pattern.

The world which the child comes to inhabit is always a limitation of its potential freedom. The world that it creates serves ultimately to confine the personality within the constraints of its own thinking. In the process of growth the child comes to be imprisoned within the boundaries of belief. Its world is circumscribed by specific rules of behaviour that determine just what can and cannot be done.

These rules are not inherent in the universe. They are simply a reflection of codified beliefs. Yet the boundaries of belief, which effectively limit that personality, only continue to confine it for as long as it chooses to remain bound. It is always free to step beyond the prison walls.

Chapter Ten – Beyond the Grave

The influence of thought reaches beyond the gulf of what is known as death. Just as our beliefs in life influence the experiences of our waking world, so they continue to determine the character of our experiences after death. The play of images in consciousness continues, albeit on a different level.

The influence of belief on experience after death is evidenced by the teachings of the Sages, as well as in such literary works as the Egyptian and Tibetan Books of the Dead.

The evocative worlds of heaven and hell are not eternal verities, but are simply the continued pageant of images projected in consciousness. They have no reality in and of themselves. The sense of identity continues in a different form, and this sequence of experience subsequently gives way to a new cycle of incarnation.

Examples taken from scientific studies of near-death experience, bear out the contention that after-life experience continues within specific confines of belief. The near-death experiences recorded by Western subjects, for example, are entirely different from those recounted by Oriental people.

All after-life experiences, however, are intrinsically illusory, and have no ultimate reality. The soul that believes it has previously died, finds itself born again in new worlds of expression. This sequence of birth and death continues in an unbroken cycle for as long as the soul clings to the idea of personality, and is motivated by the desire for experience.

It is only by voluntarily surrendering its identity, that the individual soul merges into the Universal Reality, in the ultimate state of Enlightenment, as revealed by the Sages.

The chapter ends with a recapitulation of the quest for the meaning of Reality. It retraces the path followed by Western science, and shows how the findings of quantum mechanics have dovetailed with the esoteric teachings of Oriental philosophy. These twin paths of investigation have become united in a common matrix.

This new view of the universe is not mere vacuous philosophy. It is an insight that is pregnant with power.

Chapter Eleven – The Dimensions of Belief

The chapter begins with a review of the Biblical account of how Jesus raised the daughter of the Roman centurion from the dead.

It goes on to illustrate that this incident was not unique to Jesus, as similar resurrections have been performed, both before the time of Jesus, as well as in the modern era. Furthermore, this power is not limited to those of supposed divine origin, but resides in ordinary people as well.

Additional examples are given of other “miraculous” events, in which physical matter has been manipulated by the human mind. Again, this ability has been demonstrated equally by average people as well as by religious saints.

The secret of this ability is shown to lie, not in some form of divine gift given only to righteous devotees of God, but in the logical and precise application of the power of the human mind. The creative potential of the mind is explained, together with those factors which are requisite to successful creation. These factors are also illustrated by means of anecdotal evidence.

The extraordinary events and powers which have come to be termed “miraculous” are generally rejected today, because they conflict with the basic tenets of science. These accepted beliefs of science have effectively reduced the apparent behaviour of the universe to a code of principles or laws.

Quotations from the Sages are used to point out the fallacy of these beliefs. They explain that it is the limiting effect of scientific thought that moulds the universe into functioning as scientists have come to expect.

Being a subjective phenomenon, and not an objective reality, the universe comes to manifest exactly those beliefs which are dominant in the projecting mind.

When limiting beliefs make up the foundation of this projection, limiting results automatically follow. The Sages consistently point to the fact that the universe is the manifestation of a principle that is fundamentally free, and one which can never be reduced to a fixed set of laws.

In order to understand the fallacy of the accepted laws of science, it is necessary to examine more closely the precise way in which these laws have come to be derived.

Chapter Twelve – The Modern Magicians

Western science has its roots in ancient Greece. The Greeks learned to substitute symbols for specific features of the physical world, and then linked these symbols together in the form of mathematical expressions. But whereas the Greeks were satisfied with deductive theory based on analysis alone, modern science has sought to verify its theories by means of empirical experiment.

The basis of all science is observation. Observables are the facts of science. But before observables can become facts, they must first be measured. Something which cannot be measured cannot be admitted as a scientific fact. These facts are valueless, however, unless they can be linked together in a meaningful way. Science has traditionally investigated facts via tentative hypotheses.

Every hypothesis is initially mind-made and subjective. Each hypothesis is at first evaluated by means of carefully controlled experiments. If there is sufficient validating evidence, a hypothesis can now be upgraded to a scientific theory. This theory is then tested further by means of prediction.

If the empirical evidence continues to substantiate the theory, and there is no conflicting evidence, the theory is then elevated to the status of law. All scientific laws have been derived in this fashion.

Quantum mechanics has demonstrated that the central belief of classical science – the idea that it is possible to observe nature “objectively” – is an illusion. Because each observer actively influences the result of each experiment in a unique way, patterned on his or her belief, science can never hope to reduce nature to a series of laws that are binding on all observers.

What science has done, in fact, has been to manipulate the universe, as Thomas Kuhn has pointed out, into a scientific way of thinking. It has slowly beaten nature into behaving according to the requirements of scientific belief. The universe has thus come to manifest those beliefs which are fundamental to scientific thought. This manifestation has then been taken as evidential proof that these scientific laws are true indicators of outer reality.

Science, then, does not expose nature as it “really is”. Rather, it moulds nature according to its own expectations. In so doing, science has come to reveal itself as more akin to magic, and the scientists of today should more properly be viewed as modern magicians.

Chapter Thirteen – The Shifting Paradigm

The mirroring effect, whereby the universe is slowly moulded into a pattern of experience which reflects current thinking, is demonstrated today in the field of paranormal behaviour, where examples of such unexplained behaviour have been christened by the Greek word Psi.

Psi phenomena have, by definition, fallen outside of the scope of traditional science. Yet evidence continues to mount of cases where the mind has been able to influence matter in quite astonishing ways. Numerous examples are quoted of such anomalous phenomena, together with their links to various states of mind.

In the investigation of the paranormal, it is shown why some investigators are successful while others are not, and also why this apparent conflict in nature exists. Other examples are given explaining the significance of the level of humidity in the efficacy of paranormal experiments, as well as the character and level of emotion involved.

As more and more cases of anomalous behaviour occur, it is clear that the existing paradigm of scientific theory has now become ripe for revolutionary change. The need exists for a new insight into nature, which is able to encompass these paranormal dimensions, yet without discounting the validity of what was known before.

The very existence of Psi phenomena serves to prove the limitations of Cartesian dualism, which sought to separate all experience into opposing realms of matter and of mind. The anomalous behaviour which is ever more widely being reported, indicates that a direct link exists between mind and matter. As such, it calls for a new scientific paradigm in which these two opposing realms can be united.

There is evidence to suggest that this new paradigm has already been formulated, in the work of a brilliant, yet hitherto unknown German scientist. The scope of this new paradigm has the potential to open up new vistas of scientific discovery.

It may also reveal the universe to be a far more dazzling place than classical scientists could ever have supposed. The technological marvels which this new paradigm might initiate, could well see mankind’s wildest dreams fulfilled.

Chapter Fourteen – Origins in Upheaval

During medieval times, when the Church of Rome dominated people’s minds, the various species of organic life were considered to be separate and unique creations of an omnipotent God.

It was Charles Darwin who first provided a systematic challenge to this dogma, by suggesting that different species were actually interlinked.

Through a process known as Evolution, which extended over geological spans of time, Darwin proposed that simple forms of life had changed into the more complex, in a linear sequence which culminated in the appearance of man.

The method whereby physical characteristics were transferred from one generation to another, was later found to depend on genes, which determined the precise physical form of every creature. This was the view of creation which had come to dominate the era of classical science.

The discoveries of the twentieth century, however, have done nothing to verify Darwin’s basic theory of evolution. The great problems, which Darwin himself pointed out in his Origin of Species, remain unanswered still.

To a growing body of biologists, not only are there no valid grounds for continuing to support the classical theory of evolution, but they have increasingly come to wonder how such a theory ever came to be accepted as a scientific law.

The legion of flaws now present in the theory of Neo-Darwinism, has led directly to a renewed popularity in Creationism, and an attempt to overthrow science with a return to medieval thinking.

By means of examples and quotations, it is suggested that the new scientific paradigm which now dawns, holds the promise, not only of bridging the Cartesian chasm between matter and mind, but also of resolving the existing crisis between science and the church over the origin of species.

The chapter concludes by pointing to numerous cases which reveal that, because the universe is a subjective phenomenon, and not an objective reality, that has slowly evolved over billions of years, it is always possible to change physical form by the overriding powers of the mind.

Since the entire concept of form is itself mental, there are no ultimate limits to form, nor can physical disabilities limit the potential creativity of the presiding mind.

Chapter Fifteen  The Sceptre of Hermes

The chapter begins with a series of anecdotes representative of various forms of healing. It compares aboriginal or shamanistic medicine with that of psychic surgery and faith healing. It points out that each one of these forms of healing has its foundation in a particular framework of belief, which is both necessary and self-serving.

Far from being the products of superstition or gullibility, the efficacy of these systems of healing is shown to be the natural consequence of a new view of healing. This new insight into the healing process, is also a derivative of a new scientific paradigm, which both justifies these methods and validates their techniques. Other illustrations of paranormal behaviour also confirm this conclusion.

By examining the healing arts of ancient China and India, it is possible to see how each traditional form of healing operates within a specific context of belief. These forms of healing continue to be effective only as long as these constellations of belief continue to be held. These examples also serve to show that there is no frame of reference of disease that can be either absolute, or “correct”.

The Western system of healing, based on the pathogenic agency of disease, resolves itself into just another system of belief, among many. While its range of applications may exceed those of primitive societies, the Western approach to disease carries no inherent superiority. Consequently, it can never hope to monopolise the art of healing.

New forms of healing continue to be developed. Each of these relies upon its own framework of belief. Symptoms are diagnosed according to that particular pattern of belief, and treatments are devised accordingly.

Thus the sensation of a particular symptom may be diagnosed as a certain type of disease within one frame of reference, and an altogether different form of malady in another. Neither diagnosis is ultimately “true”. Each is valid within its own context of belief, and a person suffering from that symptom may get relief by either method.

This leads to the conclusion that the true source of all disease operates initially at the level of the mind. Those who recognise this insight, gain the power to heal themselves directly, without resorting to intermediaries in the form of medical practitioners.

Chapter Sixteen – This Manner of Man

Because classical scientists considered the universe to be an objective reality existing in space independently of the observer, they thought that nature operated by means of blind forces over which they had no control.

According to the teachings of the Sages, however, the forces of nature are all subject to the mind. As such, any individual is potentially capable of controlling them. This was illustrated by the “miracle” of Jesus overcoming the wind and waves, and walking on water.

Similar miracles have been performed by numerous other Sages. They have also been demonstrated by ordinary people who, through unusual circumstances, have learned to harness these powers.

Not only do we all possess the power to control the weather, but the weather is at all times a barometer of those thoughts and feelings which create the world. Because of this, the condition of humanity at any particular time may be judged by an evaluation of existing global weather patterns.

Past civilisations which have succumbed to moral decay, have unwittingly brought upon themselves natural disasters on a regional or global scale.

A similar natural catastrophe now seems to be forthcoming, based on the revelations of the Bible and the predictions of such savants as Nostradamus.

Were such a cataclysm to happen in the near future, it would not be the result of chance forces of nature, or the wrath of some divine Creator. It would be the predictable and logical result of those forces which we ourselves have initiated.

The chapter concludes with a review of past anecdotes, pointing out common features in each. It summarises the method whereby we can control the circumstances of our lives, and overcome the limitations of our individual situations. These conclusions are substantiated by references to the actual words of Sages, as well as excerpts from leading spiritual works.

Chapter Seventeen – Creatures of the Mind

This chapter deals with anomalous creatures which defy conventional understanding. Starting with a personal sighting set in the high Himalayas, it includes other representative examples drawn from around the world. It notes the predominance of reports of peculiar lake creatures, which are seen and sometimes photographed, yet are never found or proven to have physical existence.

These strange aquatic creatures have their counterparts on the land, in the form of hairy bipeds, which leave footprints before disappearing, equally mysteriously, into thin air. Accounts are also included of extraordinary flying creatures which defy biological analysis. These mysterious phenomena are shown to have been matched by equally elusive phantoms of the past. Such creatures include fairies, werewolves and vampires.

Drawing upon the ideas developed in the latest theories of science, which parallel the ancient teachings of the Sages, these manifestations are shown to be creations of the mind. They are temporary visitors in our reality from subtler realms of consciousness.

The process whereby these creatures come to manifest is explained, as well as the reason why they soon vanish from sight, back into the planes of mind from which they emerged. These creatures of the mind also point to a deeper truth, which is that all physical matter has its origin in subtler levels of consciousness. Before any form can appear in our physical world, it must first be preceded by its subtle equivalent in a non-physical realm.

It is the recognition of this mental source of physical form that has allowed certain esoteric cultures, in places such as Tibet, to create thought-forms at will. These thought-forms, or Tulpas, have the ability to materialise into our world of flesh and blood. While they manifest, they function just like normal creatures. Reference is made to the French mystic, Alexandra David-Neel, who was able to conjure up a physical being, simply through the powers of her mind.

These materialised thought-forms, or doppelgangers, have been witnessed by people in every culture throughout history. They continue to be witnessed to this day. However, the character and form which these creatures take betrays a particular significance. They serve to reflect the subconscious fears and delusions of humanity.

Chapter Eighteen – The Lure of Reform

We live today in a world of change. Yet we all have to deal with frustrating events that run counter to our desires. If only we could truly mould the world according to our desires, we feel that we would be supremely happy. The problem of our world seems to lie in the fact that we seem powerless to change our worlds as we would like.

This problem, according to the Sages, stems from the fact that we have misunderstood the true nature of our world.

We believe that we are surrounded by an objective world that exists apart from us, and which is subject to forces over which we have no control. Far from being impotent, however, the Sages point out that we have power beyond our imaginings, and that we are free to use this power as we wish.

Though we are easily beguiled by the lure of reform, our attempts at change only seem to increase our frustrations. When confronted by outward difficulties, or the impediments of others, we seek to change our circumstances by imposing our will on others.

But by doing this, we merely add to our difficulties. The secret, according to the Sages, is not to resist our difficulties, or try to change the problems that we see around us.

When we try to compel others to change their ways, we actually increase the force with which they are resisted. Our actions simply add to our sorrows. The paradox of life is that we can only reform our world by reforming ourselves.

Once we recognise this truth, and attend to the challenge of self-reform, social reform follows automatically. A peaceful and harmonious world will only arise when there is peace and harmony in our hearts. Peace can never be imposed from without, no matter how powerful or noble the intent.

The chapter ends with a recent example of how the social reform of an entire community of destitute peasants, living in filth and without hope, was changed by two humble people who chose to reform their hearts. This example illustrates the truth of the age-old refrain of Sages and divinely inspired leaders throughout history.

Chapter Nineteen – The Cosmic Web

This chapter is a recapitulation of the central theme of this book, which is that the world, which appears so real to our senses, is actually an illusion. It is illusory, not because it does not exist, but because what is perceived to exist is not representative of an outer reality.

It draws on the findings of quantum mechanics and the direct experience of mystics, to support the contention that our universe is a projection in consciousness. This projection is created, and recreated, moment by moment. And just as the world cannot exist without an observer, so too the individual observer must be seen to be illusory, and a product of consciousness as well.

Because the universe is not an objective reality, but a subjective projection in consciousness, it follows that the world is influenced by the contents of consciousness, which are thoughts. As thoughts change, so the universe comes to change as well, according to a pattern of belief.

Because experience manifests according to belief, and because belief varies from culture to culture and from age to age, there can be no rules which govern the manifestation of what is taken to be the real world.

Instead of functioning in a predetermined and predictable way, according to the laws that science has formulated, the universe is infinitely flexible, and always responds to any change in the underlying pattern of belief.

The basic plasticity of the world is illustrated by examples, such as “radionics” and dowsing, as developed by such twentieth century innovators as Albert Abrams and Thomas Lethbridge.

The chapter concludes by pointing out that each one of us is free to spin a cosmic web of thought, which then becomes for us our world of personal reality. Yet we remain ever captive within this web, for as long as we choose to spin.

It is only when we attempt, voluntarily, to unravel this web of thought that we have spun, that true freedom can be found. This discovery becomes a revelation of our unlimited potential, and of our ineffable nature.

Chapter Twenty – The Unravelled Web

The final chapter unravels that web of thought with which we have made our personal universe, and reveals that state of supreme freedom which awaits each one of us. This goal is the target of all the religions of this world, and is the ultimate meaning of our lives.

Our universal web of thought is characterised by the ancient symbol of the maze. In order to penetrate to the heart of this labyrinthine web, it is necessary to pursue the thread out of which this entire universe has been constructed, back to its central source. The goal of this endeavour frees us forever from the limitations of the maze.

We are not obliged to spin. Yet for as long as we continue to be prompted by desire, we are bound to spin a universe, which is the theatre in which these desires can be fulfilled. And so, for apparent lifetime after lifetime, we remain caught within the confines of the web.

No matter how refined our web, and no matter how elegant its pattern, we continue to be the captives of our creation. We continue to be bound by the dimensions of matter, energy, space and time.

The secret of the cosmic web is that we are able to transcend these limitations. We can be eternally free. The price of this freedom is the relinquishment of our personal desires. We become free only when we cease to spin. This is the teaching of the Sages.

The nature of this triumph, the transcendence of all limitation, is a joy beyond all telling. This accomplishment is described in the words of the Indian Sage Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, who reveals it in simple language. Through conversations with various questioners, he allows us to glimpse the nature of this state.

In the attainment of this goal, there is an end to struggle, and an end to sorrow. We are all destined to be free. After long ages of imagined lives, each one of us will finally reach the centre of the maze.

This goal is not remote. It is not something which beckons across the span of time. It is ever within us. It reveals itself as the presence of the “I am”.

The moment of our awakening advances on us NOW.

Finally, for those readers who would like to learn more, a complete digital version of this book is available on Amazon below.

 

Allan, The Cosmic Web, January 1, 2020, 1:01 pm

The Three Days of Darkness (Part Seven)

In his Book of Revelation, St John describes a series of disasters that will befall the earth shortly before the return of the Messiah or risen Christ. He divides these disasters into three different categories, each of which is set out in obscure and symbolical language.

The first category consists of the seven seals. Then come the angels with the seven trumpets. The final category consists of the angels with the seven vials (bowls). However, before these disasters begin, there are some who will be spared this tribulation. In chapter seven, John writes:

“And after these things I saw four angels standing on the four corners of the earth, holding the four winds of the earth, that the wind should not blow on the earth, nor on the sea, nor on any tree.

“And I saw another angel ascending from the east, having the seal of the living God: and cried with a loud voice to the four angels, to whom it was given to hurt the earth and the sea, saying, hurt not the earth, neither the sea, nor the trees, till we have sealed the servants of our God in their foreheads.

“And I heard the number of them that were sealed: and there were sealed an hundred and forty and four thousand of all the tribes of Israel”. (Revelation 7: 1-4)

As if to emphasize its importance, John goes on to repeat this number two more times in chapter 14:

“And I looked, and, lo, a Lamb stood on the mount Sion, and with him an hundred forty and four thousand, having his Father’s name written in their foreheads. And I heard a voice from heaven, as the voice of many waters, and as the voice of a great thunder:

“And I heard the voice of harpers harping with their harps: And they sung as it were a new song before the throne, and before the four beasts, and the elders: and no man could learn that song but the hundred and forty and four thousand, which were redeemed from the earth.

“These are they which were not defiled with women; for they are virgins. These are they which follow the Lamb whithersoever he goeth. These were redeemed from among men, being the first fruits unto God and to the Lamb.” (Revelation 14: 1-4)

The Rapture

In the two thousand years that have elapsed since these words were written, Christians have come to believe that those who are spared the cataclysms described by St John, will be released from their physical bodies by means of a transcendent experience that has come to be called the “rapture”.

Although the word “rapture” is never mentioned in any of the books of the Bible, it is the word that has come to be used in Christian eschatology when referring to the events that will precede the return of the Christ in the “latter days” spoken of by the prophets.

Shortly before his crucifixion, as Jesus and his disciples were leaving the great temple built by Herod, Jesus prophesied that the entire temple complex would one day be destroyed.

Verily I say unto you, there shall not be left here one stone upon another, that shall not be thrown down.” (Matthew 24:2) A short while later, while they were gathered on the Mount of Olives, his disciples asked Jesus to tell them about the events that would occur at the “end of the world”.

Jesus responded by outlining a series of events that would happen upon the earth in those days, as well as in the heavens. He then went on to make an unusual prediction.

“Then shall two be in the field; the one shall be taken, and the other left. Two women shall be grinding at the mill; the one shall be taken, and the other left.” (Matthew 24:40-41)

St Luke not only refers to this prediction in his own gospel, but he goes on to include something that is of vital importance as the three days of darkness draws near, and that is that this mysterious occurrence will take place at night.

“I tell you, in that night there shall be two men in one bed; the one shall be taken, and the other shall be left. Two women shall be grinding together; the one shall be taken, and the other left.

“Two men shall be in the field; the one shall be taken, and the other left. And they answered and said unto him, where, Lord? And he said unto them, wheresoever the body is, thither will the eagles be gathered together. (Luke 17: 34-37)

It is this enigmatic prediction by Jesus that has led to widespread controversy within the Church. This confusion has been compounded by the words of St Paul when speaking about the resurrection of the dead. In his first epistle to the Corinthians he writes:

“Behold, I show you a mystery; we shall not all sleep, but we shall all be changed. In a moment, in the twinkling of an eye, at the last trump: for the trumpet shall sound, and the dead shall be raised incorruptible, and we shall be changed”. (I Corinthians 15:51-52)

Where will they be taken?

St Paul also referred to this mystery in his first epistle to the Thessalonians when he wrote: “Then we which are alive and remain shall be caught up together with them in the clouds, to meet the Lord in the air.” (I Thessalonians 4:17)

The actual word used by Paul was the ancient Greek term harpagesometha, meaning “we shall be caught up” or “taken away”. When this passage was subsequently translated into Latin, the word used was rapiemur, also meaning “to catch up” or “take away”.

When the New English version of the Bible was published in 1961, the words used by the translators were “suddenly caught up” or “snatched up”. Because the Greek verb used by Paul implied that what would occur would be “quick or forceful”, they added the word “suddenly” to make this meaning clear.

But if the words used by the translators seemed clear to them when their New Version was published, the event they were describing has subsequently proved to be anything but clear to others. That is because different people have interpreted their words in different ways.

But taken on the face of it, the meaning of this mysterious event seems to be perfectly clear. Those who are taken from their beds, or their fields, will be caught up in the clouds in order to “meet the Lord in the air”. After all, that is where “the eagles gather together”. (Matthew 24: 28)

Jesus assured his disciples that his Father’s house contained “many mansions”, and that he was going to prepare a place for those who followed him so that when the time came, they could be with him.

“Let not your heart be troubled: ye believe in God, believe also in me. In my Father’s house are many mansions: if it were not so, I would have told you. I go to prepare a place for you. And if I go and prepare a place for you, I will come again, and receive you unto myself; that where I am, there ye may be also.” (John 14: 1-3)

When will the Rapture occur?

One of the questions that has absorbed Biblical scholars over the years is when the prophesied rapture will take place, and who, and how many will be included. Those who have studied this question have differing views about what will happen, but in general they fall into one of three different categories:

  • Pre-Tribulationists. They believe that all righteous Christians (dead and alive) will be taken up bodily into Heaven before the Tribulation begins
  • Mid-Tribulationists. They believe that the rapture will take place midway through the Tribulation, or at some point in between
  • Post-Tribulationists. They believe that Christians will be taken up to Heaven at the end of the Tribulation, where they will join Jesus when he descends to establish his kingdom on earth

But as we have already pointed out, in chapter seven of his Book of Revelation, St John describes how the four angels who have the power to hurt the land and the sea are commanded not to do so until the servants of God (the chosen ones) have been saved.

“And I saw another angel ascending from the east, having the seal of the living God: and cried with a loud voice to the four angels, to whom it was given to hurt the earth and the sea, saying, hurt not the earth, neither the sea, nor the trees, till we have sealed the servants of our God in their foreheads”. (Revelation 7: 2-3)

This verse makes it clear that the rapture will precede the onset of the three days of darkness. In fact, if the dreams and visions included in Part Four are to be believed, the rapture will signal the beginning of the seven years of Tribulation. And this is consistent with the past history of the Jews.

When God sees that humanity is corrupt and the earth is filled with violence, as described in the Book of Genesis, he decides to destroy “both man, and beast, and every creeping thing”. But before he does so, he orders Noah to build an ark so he and his family can be saved before the flood begins.

Likewise, when God threatens to rain “fire and brimstone” upon the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah (Genesis 19), he first warns Lot and his family so that they can escape before the cities are destroyed. In continuing with this tradition, the faithful will once again be saved before the Tribulation begins.

Pastor Carl Gallups

In confirmation of this point, we need only look at the many dreams and visions of the rapture that have been posted on YouTube. One of the most compelling of these occurred to Pastor Carl Gallups. His video is divided into two parts, as shown below.

Part One

Part Two

Dream Summary

  • Carl had a dream – yet it was more than dream – when he woke up he could still vividly recall all of the sounds and smells
  • In his dream he was standing in a field – it was night-time – he was looking up at the stars and the constellations in the sky – behind him he could hear the normal sounds of life from multitudes of people
  • Then the stars began to take on colours – he saw something that looked like a comet streaking across the sky – then some of the constellations began to move and shift positions
  • He was filled with awe and wonder – the sounds of life behind him began to express signs of panic – then the stars appeared to fall from heaven – he could hear sounds of terror coming from the people behind him
  • He became aware of being in the arms of a benevolent presence and then being lifted up – he looked to his left and saw that his wife was with him – they seemed to burst into another dimension
  • He then saw a scene of incredible beauty – people laughing and a sense of overwhelming peace – he asked if this was paradise – a voice replied saying – welcome home – this is where you will live – then he woke up

Although Carl Gallups was at first reluctant to tell anyone about his dream, several years later he felt the urge to share it with his wife. She sat spellbound while he related the contents of his dream, and then said: “You need to ask your grandson Parker about his rapture dream”.

It so happened that his grandson was due to visit him that very afternoon. When Parker was asked to describe the contents of his dream, which had occurred when he was only three or four years old, he proceeded to tell Carl the exact dream that he had experienced, right down to the smallest detail.

Then about five or six years later, Carl and his son Brandon happened to attend a prophecy conference in Minneapolis. After Carl had finished his speech, he and his son went out into the lobby where they had a table set out with copies of his publications.

Veronica

It was there that Carl saw a woman trying to make her way through the crowd towards him. When she finally reached him, she said that she had heard an inner voice say that Carl would be able to interpret a dream that she had about six months before.

To his utter amazement, the lady, whose name was Veronica, proceeded to describe the same rapture dream that he and his grandson had experienced many years before. There was however one striking difference, and that was in the way that her dream ended.

Instead of rising up into the sky with the angels, as had happened to Carl and his grandson, Veronica said that she had screamed and covered up her face in fear, before waking up. As soon as she started speaking, Carl said that he knew why she had been directed to speak to him.

What is surprising here is that this identical dream occurred to three different people over a span of many years, and yet it served two contrasting purposes. In the case of Carl and his grandson the purpose was to inspire others through their testimony.

In the case of Veronica, its purpose was to warn her that she needed to change her ways. The other remarkable feature about this encounter was that although Veronica was now married and living in Minneapolis, she had grown up in South America in the district of Comas in Lima, Peru.

It was then that Carl explained to her that he had not only heard about this location, but that he had visited it himself on many occasions, because the Baptist Church to which he belonged had been operating a mission school in the district of Comas for many years.

It is worth pointing out that the content of this dream is entirely consistent with Bible prophecy, and that the details described by Pastor Gallups about the rapture bear out the words of Jesus, as well as St Paul, when he wrote:

Then we which are alive and remain shall be caught up together with them in the clouds, to meet the Lord in the air.” (I Thessalonians 4:17)

My friend Elise

I am convinced that the dream scenario described by Carl is exactly how the rapture will take place. And the reason I say that is not just because I find his testimony convincing, but because it matches a similar dream that was told to me by my psychic friend Elise, whom I mentioned in Part Six.

On September 30, 2011, Elise called me to say that she had just woken up from a strange dream that seemed to be related to “end times”. In her dream she saw fiery stones (brimstone) falling from the sky. As they struck the earth, they formed pools of burning liquid.

People were rushing everywhere in panic, even ignoring the cries of their own children. In the process of trying to escape, those who stepped into the molten pools died. Elise said that strange plumes of deadly smoke rose up from the ground.

She said that she could also see many tiny points of light that represented souls, and that certain of these souls would be led to safety, even if they happened to be with other people at the time. She was one of those who ran between the smoke and the fires.

Summary

Based on the various prophecies, visions and dreams quoted previously in this series, it is not only possible to explain the meaning of the seven angels with the seven trumpets described in the Book of Revelation, but also to provide a timeline of events that are predicted to unfold upon the earth.

Using the vision of the destruction of Vancouver described by Elise as a guide, as well as the prophecies of the Hopi Indians, it is probable that sometime before October 2026, two comets will appear in the skies above the earth. One of these comets will be coloured blue, and the other red.

According to Hopi prophecy, the Kachina coloured blue is referred to as “the watcher”, while the red Kachina is referred to as “the destroyer”. While it is possible that both of these comets could appear in the sky at the same time, it is more likely that the blue comet will precede the red one.

Since it is referred to as “the watcher”, the blue comet is likely to have a different orbit from the red one. For that reason it will remain visible in the night sky for an extended period, and serve as a warning to humanity of the destruction that is to come.

When the red comet appears, it will soon become apparent that it is on a collision course with the earth. It is then that the various disasters associated with the seven angels and their trumpets will begin, starting with dust particles emanating from the tail of the comet.

Because the nucleus will be composed of significant amounts of iron, it will shower the surface of the earth with enormous quantities of red dust. These red dust particles will contaminate the lakes, rivers and seas, causing them to look like blood.

This contaminated water will not only become thick and muddy, it will prove toxic to anyone who tries to drink it. As the comet draws closer to the earth, the fine dust particles in its tail will give way to larger particles. When these gravel-sized particles reach the outer atmosphere of the earth, they will become white hot with friction and become fiery meteorites that will look like “hail and fire mingled with blood”.

This fiery hail will devastate the entire surface of the planet. It will not only set fire to the grassy plains but also burn up entire forests as well. The damage caused by this shower of incandescent meteorites could easily cause “a third part of them to be burnt up”.

When the nucleus of the comet approaches the earth, a large asteroid will plunge into the sea, causing vast amounts of superheated water, molten rock and other debris to rise high into the upper atmosphere. This will then fall back down to earth in the form of blazing missiles. To those on the ground, it will appear as if “the stars are falling from the sky”.

In part six of “The Day of the Lord”, I described how Efrain Rodriguez had a series of prophetic dreams involving the earth and an asteroid. According to Efrain, this asteroid will hit the Caribbean near the island of Puerto Rico in the middle of the night, just after 2am local time.

As he explained on his website, the impact of this collision will cause a shock wave that will travel around the world at a speed of 300mph (480 kph). It will also cause a world-wide earthquake, as well as a series of gigantic Tsunamis that will spread out in all directions from the point of impact.

And this is where science meets religion. For as St. John has clearly laid out in his Book of Revelation, this will be the time when Bible prophecy will be revealed in the skies above the earth.

This will be the time when the stars will fall from heaven

This will be the time when the Rapture will occur

This will be the time when the three days of darkness will begin

This will be also be the moment when the whole of humanity, including every man, woman and child now living on the planet, will be divided into two groups.

One group will be the few who will be saved when the “stars fall from heaven”. The other will be those left behind to face the “three days of darkness”. And if they can survive that, they will have to endure the seven-year reign of terror conducted by the Anti-Christ.

And each new day that dawns brings us closer to that cold, dark night that will decide our fate.

Allan, The Three Days of Darkness, December 20, 2019, 11:33 am

The Three Days of Darkness (Part Six)

In chapter six of his Book of Revelation, the apostle John described a time of devastation and destruction that would befall the earth shortly before the return of the Christ. He attributed these disasters to the agency of seven angels with seven trumpets.

According to St John, when the second angel sounded his trumpet, a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea. Then, when the third angel sounded his trumpet, a great star fell from heaven, burning as it were a lamp. As he went on to record, the name of the star is called Wormwood.

Ever since that time, Biblical scholars have penned countless lines speculating about what this “star” might happen to be, and what the “great mountain” was that was burning with fire and cast into the sea.

We know from the Bible that John was the son of a fisherman. He had no formal education, and despite his discipleship with Jesus and his subsequent travels throughout Asia Minor, he was ill-equipped to decipher the sorts of things that he later described in his visions on the island of Patmos.

So it is no surprise that John offered no explanation for the star that fell from heaven, other than to refer to it by the name of Wormwood. The reason he did so was because of its bitter nature, and the fact that it poisoned the waters and rivers where it fell.

Although John had no scientific education on which to base his description of this falling star, he did offer two clues which may help us to interpret his words. The first clue was his reference to the great mountain burning with fire that was cast into the sea.

Astronomers of today would have little difficulty in recognising John’s description as referring to an asteroid, which is an object that becomes incandescent when it enters the earth’s atmosphere, as a result of friction, and appears as a streak of light.

And if an asteroid were to enter the atmosphere and plunge into the ocean, the impact would not only vapourise the asteroid itself, it would penetrate the ocean floor causing vast amounts of superheated water, molten rock and other debris to rise thousands of feet into the sky.

This superheated material would then fall back down to earth in the form of blazing missiles that would set fire to buildings, forests and crops around the entire planet. To those people viewing all this from the ground, it would seem as if “the stars were falling from the sky”.

Furthermore, it is clear from the sequence of events described by St John, that “the great mountain burning with fire” associated with the second angel, is different from the “great star from heaven” associated with the third angel. In other words, these are two different events.

The fact that John refers the great star from heaven as “burning like a lamp”, suggests that it is something that glows in the sky before falling to the earth. And that is certainly indicative of a comet. And although none of the Biblical prophets use the term “comet”, other people have.

The Great Star from Heaven

In Part Two of this series, we quoted verse sixty-two from Nostradamus’ second book of prophecies, which reads as follows:

Mabus will soon die, then will come a terrible destruction of people and animals: Sudden vengeance will be seen, A hundred hands, thirst, famine, when the comet will pass”.

And St. Hildegard of Bingen, who lived some four hundred years before Nostradamus, included the following passages in her work titled “Scivias”.

“Before the Comet comes, many nations, the good excepted, will be scoured with want and famine. The great nation in the ocean that is inhabited by people of different tribes and descent will be devastated by an earthquake, storm and tidal waves. It will be divided, and in great part submerged.”

“The Comet by its tremendous pressure, will force out much of the ocean and flood many countries, causing much want and many plagues. [After the] great Comet, the great nation will be devastated by earthquakes, storms, and great waves of water, causing much want and plagues”.

The fact that “the great star that fell from heaven” will most likely turn out to be a comet, does not in itself enlighten us as to the cause of the “terrible destruction of people and animals” described by Nostradamus. After all, comets have been around for thousands of years.

Literary historians have pointed out that during the reign of Julius Caesar, the skies were illuminated by dozens of comets. On any given night it would have been possible to see two or three at a time. So, to the disciples of Jesus, they would have been a familiar sight.

Over the centuries however, they have diminished in number to the point where every new comet that appears in the sky today is hailed as a significant event. Besides, they come and go sporadically, so scientists are unable to predict when a new comet will appear.

Given that science is unable to say when “the great star from heaven” will illuminate our skies, it raises the question as to whether there are any other sources we can turn to for greater understanding? The answer to this is yes, for the Hopi Indians of Arizona have a prophetic tradition of their own.

The Hopi Prophecies

Like the Maya, the Hopi believe that there have been previous world ages, each of which ended in a global catastrophe. But whereas the Maya believe that we are now living in the 5th world age, the Hopi consider the 5th age to be the one that is about to unfold on the planet.

The name “Hopi” is short for Hopituh Shi-nu-mu, meaning “Peaceful Ones”. This concept of “peace” is deeply rooted in their culture, morality and ethics.  To be Hopi is to strive towards reverence and respect for all living creatures, and to live in peace with all life according to the teachings of Maasaw, their Creator of the Earth.

According to Hopi tradition, Kachinas are the messengers of Maasaw. They are the spirit teachers of nature. The Hopi predict that the new world that is about to dawn upon the Earth will be heralded by the arrival of two of these Kachinas, one coloured blue and the other red.

This prophecy has been repeated by the late Robert Ghost Wolf, an accomplished artist and author who possessed many gifts that earned him recognition with many indigenous tribes in North and South America, both as a Spiritual Healer and Ceremonial Leader. He died on December 21, 2005.

In his book Last Cry, Native American Prophecies, Tales of the End Times, Robert Ghost Wolf writes:

In the final day we will look up in the heavens
and we will witness the return of the two brothers
who helped to create this world in the birthing time.

This end time prophecy refers to a celestial event when the “two brothers” will be seen “in the heavens”. It also mentions that these two brothers will be the same as those that assisted in the “birthing” of the current world age, which was also a time of great turmoil across the face of the earth.

When the Blue Star Kachina makes its appearance

in the heavens the 5th world will emerge.

This will be the day of purification.

The return of the Blue Kachina will be the forewarning

that tells us there will soon be a new day,

a new way of life and a new world coming.

Not far behind will come the Purifier,

the Red Kachina who will bring the day of purification.

When the Purifier comes, we will see him first as a small red star

which will come very close and sit in our heavens watching us.

Watching to see how well we have remembered

the sacred teachings.

Then one morning we will awaken to a Red Dawn.

The sky will be the colour of blood and many things will begin

to happen that right now we are not sure of their exact nature,

for much of reality will not be as it is now.

The full Hopi prophecy of the two Kachinas can be seen below. 

From the above video, it is clear that this Hopi prophecy revolves around the appearance in the skies above earth of two large comets. One will come as a warning to humanity to change their ways, while the second will come as the “Purifier”, to cleanse the earth and make it new.

The Red Dawn

The reference to the morning when we will awaken to a Red Dawn, where the sky will be the colour of blood, bears an uncanny resemblance to the words of Immanuel Velikovsky when he described how a large comet crossed the orbit of the earth at the time of the Biblical Exodus:

The comet was on its way from its perihelion and touched earth first with its gaseous tail…One of the first signs of this encounter was the reddening of the earth’s surface by a fine dust of rusty pigment. In sea, lake and river this pigment gave a bloody coloring to the water.” (Worlds in Collision)

It is also interesting to note that many people who say they have had dreams and visions about the three days of darkness, also report seeing a blood-red sky. However, none of them are able to say when this will occur. So the tantalising question remains. When will the “Purifier” come?

There are those who believe it is impossible to know in advance when the three days of darkness will begin. They base this view on the words of Jesus, when he said: “Of that day and hour knoweth no man, no, not the angels of heaven, but my Father only”. (Matthew 24:36)

But while we may not know the day or the hour, we can certainly recognise the season, for Jesus also said:

“Behold the fig tree, and all the trees; when they now shoot forth, ye see and know of your own selves that summer is now at hand. So likewise ye, when ye see these things come to pass, know ye that the Kingdom of God is nigh at hand”. (Luke 21: 29-31)

While researching this Blog post, I was reminded of an event that happened to me over thirty-five years ago. Thinking back on it now, it raises the question as to whether I might have unwittingly stumbled upon the date on which the Great Tribulation will begin.

My Hallowe’en Surprise

In 1983, shortly after arriving in Vancouver, I was invited to a Hallowe’en party. At this party I was approached by a vivacious young lady whom I had never seen before, who said that she had an unusual story to tell me.

The story that she told related to an incident that had occurred to her on the night of Monday, October 23, 1978. At that time, she was living on the thirteenth floor of an apartment building in a gated community overlooking the Capilano River in West Vancouver.

The incident began shortly after 11:30 pm. The lady, whom I shall refer to as Elise in order to protect her identity, was in the habit of watching the “Johnny Carson Show”. On this particular night, she found that there was nothing that particularly interested her, so she switched off the TV and walked across to the window.

As she gazed out of the dining room window facing toward the East, the sky suddenly appeared to light up, and the stars seemed to shine with unusual brightness. Astonished at this unexpected sight, she phoned a friend and asked her to look out at the night sky.

Her friend was not interested, however, as she had just retired to bed. She told Elise to forget about the sky and go to bed herself. But returning to the dining room window, Elise was struck by the fact that she could see the texture of the plaster on the outside of the building with incredible clarity.

Then, as she looked out towards the horizon, she saw a series of small clouds begin to drift across the sky, coming from the West. As she continued watching, these clouds began to take shape into recognisable objects. And as she recognised them, so they dissolved and moved off to the East.

The first cloud formed the object of a dove, closely followed by a serpent. Then came an upturned hand, followed by a racing car. Elise said she noticed that the driver’s hair was flowing in the wind. Finally, there came the image of a lamb followed by two little lambs.

As Elise was trying to make sense of it all, she became aware of a voice within herself. The voice spoke in clear English, saying: “You are protected by the hand of God, and driven by the lamb”.

The voice then told Elise to look at the sky and memorise the positions of the stars. When she found it difficult to remember the positions of them all, the voice told her to write them down. So she got a pen and paper and marked down the positions of the visible stars in the northern sky.

Vancouver in Turmoil

The voice then told her to look towards the downtown area of Vancouver. As she did so, a warm, red, misty glow settled over the city. The voice then directed her to look closely at a series of “markers” which now appeared. Elise was told that these “markers” outlined “safety zones”.

Without warning, Elise found herself floating high above the entire Lower Mainland area of Vancouver. As she looked out towards the sea, she became aware of two enormous masses of rock beneath the ocean that were pushing against one another with unbelievable pressure.

Suddenly these two masses of rock split, and she saw a crack in the ocean floor that seemed to curve towards the city of Vancouver. It was then that she saw the entire region being convulsed by a gigantic earthquake. Violent winds sprang up that tore the roofs off buildings.

Elise could see the Lions Gate Bridge shaking and then collapsing completely. In the downtown area, she could see tall buildings begin to crumble under the forces unleashed by the earthquake. She could also hear the cries of people caught up in the mayhem.

It was then that the voice inside her said: “You have twenty minutes to escape to safety”. And as she looked towards the West, she could see a series of gigantic Tsunami waves pounding the cliffs of the University of British Columbia at Point Grey.

These waves then swept around the cliffs, engulfing the low-lying suburbs that flanked the city. In particular, Elise noticed automobiles being swept along the rooftops of houses in Kitsilano, extending down to False Creek and surrounding areas.

She could also see rocks tumbling down the North Shore mountains, as landslides demolished those house that had been built higher up on the mountain slopes.

And everywhere, the damage caused by the waves was compounded by the battering ram effect of all the automobiles, boats and other debris that were being swept along by this horrifying tide of destruction.

Follow up

Elise later told me that she had never previously discussed the events of that night with anyone until she met me at the Hallowe’en party. Yet as soon as she saw me, she said that for some inexplicable reason she felt that she could talk to me about this, and that I would understand.

From my own point of view, no sooner had Elise finished telling me her story, when I realised the significance of the pattern of stars that she had been told to write down, and why they might possibly be a vital clue in predicting when these events might occur.

While there have been numerous people throughout history who have had visionary experiences of future disasters, the problem has always been that these visions never come with a date, so that those who might be affected by these events could be warned in advance.

This case, however, was different, because Elise got to write down the star pattern. I also knew that I might possibly be the only person in Vancouver who could solve the riddle of the stars, because I had recently joined the staff of the Vancouver Museums and Planetarium Association.

The Planetarium

Several weeks later, with the kind help of Jim, the Assistant Director, I was able to arrange for Elise to visit the Planetarium to see if she could recognise the stars that she had seen from her apartment window on the night of her experience. Elise, Jim and I were the only people present.

What made this test so realistic for her was that the skyline projected by the Vancouver Planetarium is an exact replica of what can actually be seen around the city, and includes all of the North Shore mountains. So Elise could easily orientate herself towards the North.

At first, she had difficulty picking out the different constellations, as so many stars were visible on the dome of the Planetarium. But after Jim reduced the luminosity, she was easily able to pick out the major constellations as they appeared in the Northern sky.

I then asked Jim if he would rotate the projector and display the stars as they would appear on a night by night basis. I also asked Elise to tell us to stop the projector as soon as she felt there was an exact match with what she remembered seeing on the night of her experience.

There was hardly a sound for the next ten minutes or so as the stars on the dome continued to rotate. Then Elise suddenly shouted “Stop!”. When I asked her if she was sure, she said she was positive.

The key indicator for her were the positions of the Big Dipper and the constellation of Orion, together with a bright star that was located slightly above a “C-shaped” moon, as she called it.

We were then able to establish that the “C-shaped” moon she was referring to was a waning crescent moon, and that the bright star that caught her attention was actually the planet Jupiter. I then asked Jim if he could tell when this particular alignment had occurred.

I had expected that the star pattern that Elise had been asked to write down referred to some date in the future, in case this was a forewarning when the earthquake and Tsunamis would occur. Instead, it turned out to the exact day on which Elise had her strange experience, in October 1978.

I then asked Jim if he could tell when this same star pattern would come around again. His response was that since it takes the planet Jupiter about twelve years to travel around the sun, this particular alignment would not happen again until October 1990.

Needless to say, as that date approached, I was extremely apprehensive, as Seismologists have been warning for years that the entire Pacific Northwest is in danger of calamitous destruction when the next mega-thrust earthquake occurs. And this could happen at any time.

As it turned out I need not have worried, as nothing threatening happened in October 1990. Nor did anything alarming occur when the next anniversary came around twelve years later in in October 2002, or again on October 17, 2014. But what gives me growing concern is that the next anniversary date falls on

 October 15, 2026.

Could it be that the devastation that was witnessed by Elise in her vision is destined to occur on that date? Given the present chaotic state of the world and its downward spiral into crime, corruption, drugs and depravity, this would certainly seem to be a likely possibility.

It is also perhaps worth mentioning, that since her initial vision in 1978, Elise has had a vision of a large comet in the sky above Vancouver on three subsequent occasions. So the key question remains. What will happen in October 2026?

Could this be the date that the Purifier, the red Kachina of the Hopi people, makes his long-awaited appearance in the heavens, removes his mask, and dances in the village square?

Concluded in Part Seven

Allan, The Three Days of Darkness, December 6, 2019, 1:04 pm

The Three Days of Darkness (Part Five)

We began this series of Blog posts with an account of a dramatic vision which occurred to the disciple John when he was in exile on the island of Patmos. In this vision, he saw a series of events that would occur on the earth shortly before the return of the Christ.

In his description of this vision in chapter eight of his Book of Revelation, he attributed these events to the actions of seven angels, each of whom was given a trumpet. As each angel sounded his trumpet, a particular disaster would befall the earth. These disasters were as follows:

  • First angel – Hail and fire mingled with blood was cast upon the earth
  • Second angel – A great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea
  • Third angel – A great star fell from heaven, burning like a lamp
  • Fourth angel – Darkness descended upon the sun, the moon and the stars

We then went on to detail the warnings that were given by St Francis of Assisi and Padre Pio about the end times in general, and the three days of darkness in particular, as well as dreams and visions that have happened to ordinary men and women since that time.

It should come as no surprise that all of these dreams, visions and other warnings have been described in religious terms, because they not only fulfil the prophecies of Old Testament prophets, but also the predictions of Jesus and his disciples.

Based on the legacy of Old Testament prophets who wrote in the context of angels and demons and of the wrath of the Lord directed against sinners, modern Christianity continues to view the world as a cosmic battle between God on one side and Satan on the other.

But we no longer live in Biblical times, and humanity no longer views the events of this world solely through the lens of religion. Ever since the Reformation, when Galileo challenged the Church by pointing out that the earth moved around the sun, the dogma of the Church has been replaced by the evidence of science.

If we are to truly understand the prophecies of the ancients and the revelation of St John, we need to examine them through the discoveries of modern science. And science does not deal with angels and demons, but with cold hard facts and scientific law.

it should be clear to most readers by now that what St. John saw in his vision was a close encounter between the earth and a comet. And the reason why he devoted so many chapters to this event in his Book of Revelation, was because it was associated with so many different effects upon the earth.

First of all there were the atmospheric effects associated with the red dust falling upon the earth and making it look like blood. But this dust did not just colour the seas, lakes and rivers. It contaminated them as well, giving them a bitter taste and poisoning anyone who drank from them.

Then there were the incandescent particles in the tail of the comet that fell to the earth like fiery hail, together with electrical discharges between the nucleus of the comet and the earth that would appear as spectacular lightning bolts hurled down from the sky.

Then as the core of the comet drew closer to the earth, it began to shroud the entire planet in inky black dust that obscured portions of the sun, the moon and the stars and made it difficult to breathe, before blotting out all light upon the earth for a period of three days and nights.

Although it is theoretically possible for the head of a comet to collide with the earth, it is much more likely that the nucleus would disintegrate into smaller fragments as a result of electrical charge differentials between the two bodies.

This would account for the asteroid or “great mountain burning with fire” that St. John said would be cast into the sea, which would of course lead to catastrophic consequences all around the earth. The impact might even alter its axis as well as its orbit around the sun.

The Dirty Snowball

As plausible as such an explanation may seem, it does not resonate with astronomers at this time, for the simple reason that modern scientists do not take the threat of a close encounter between the earth and a comet seriously. In fact, they still don’t understand what a comet really is.

Fred Whipple (1906 – 2004)

Most astronomers and astrophysicists continue to believe in the speculative ideas of Fred Whipple, the American astronomer who originally came up with the hypothesis that comets were little more than “dirty snowballs”, consisting primarily of ice and dirt.

Whipple theorised that comets weren’t rocky objects like asteroids or meteors, but instead consisted mainly of ice together with some dust and frozen gases such as carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, methane and ammonia.

Whipple’s hypothesis, which he advanced in the 1950’s, came to be known as the “dirty snowball” model. It soon gained widespread acceptance among the scientific community, and it remains to this day the model that is taught in all the leading colleges and universities of the world.

What distinguishes comets from other space objects like asteroids is that as they draw closer to the Sun, they begin to glow and develop various luminous tails which point away from the sun and stretch for hundreds of millions of miles.

According to the “dirty snowball” model, when a comet approaches the Sun, a “Coma” or glowing envelope forms around the nucleus or head of the comet, as the solid matter of the core is converted directly into a gas through a process known as “sublimation”.

As conventional theory explains, these pockets of ionized gas inside the nucleus of the comet, formed by the radiant heat of the sun and the Solar Wind, then explode to form the jets of material commonly seen emerging from the heads of comets.

Then as the comet approaches its perihelion, or closest approach to the Sun, the ice that makes up the bulk of the nucleus of the comet steadily boils away, causing it to shrink in size with every successive orbit until nothing remains.

However, when scientists began sending probes into space with sophisticated instruments that enabled them to examine the nature of comets more closely, they were startled to find that their results were very different from what the “dirty snowball” model predicted.

In 1999, NASA launched its Stardust Mission to Comet Wild 2 in order to evaluate its dust and formative material, and to return samples of these to the earth. When these samples were later recovered and examined in the laboratory, they revealed a complete absence of water.

And when NASA extended its Deep Space mission (DS1) to include an encounter with Comet Borrelly in 2001, it was also found to be hot and dry, with not a hint of water.

When NASA launched its Deep Impact probe in 2005 to study the surface of Comet Tempel 1, images sent back by the probe portrayed an object that looked surprisingly like an asteroid. It even had numerous impact craters. The only thing it lacked was any evidence of surface ice.

Space probes have now been sent to five different comets. They are the comets Halley, Borrelly, Wild 2, Tempel 1 and Hartley 2. Yet none of these comets have shown any evidence of surface ice, as the “dirty snowball” theory requires.

The final nail in the coffin of the “snowball model” was provided by the Rosetta space probe. Although it had been launched by the European Space Agency in March 2004, it took ten years for the probe to reach its target, which was the comet referred to as 67P.

After orbiting the nucleus for several months, the module called Philae separated itself successfully from the Rosetta spacecraft and landed on the surface of the comet on November 12, 2014. The information relayed back from the spacecraft confirmed what earlier studies had indicated.

Close-up of Comet 67P

There was absolutely no trace of ice or water on the surface of the comet. In fact, it consisted of craggy cliffs and desert sand highlighted by numerous impact craters, as the accompanying picture reveals.

Astronomers and astrophysicists who have been trained to interpret all comet behaviour within the confines of the “dirty snowball” model proposed by Fred Whipple, have been at a complete loss to explain the anomalies outlined above.

In fact many of them have confessed, like Donald Brownlee, principal investigator of NASA’s Stardust Mission: “It’s a mystery to me how comets work at all”. Their confusion is easy to understand.

They have been trying to explain the phenomena of comets in the context of a Cosmological theory that is palpably wrong. However, in recent years a new breed of scientists has come forward to explain the mysteries of comets within a revolutionary new theory which they call the “Electric Universe”.

The Electric Comet

What these scientists have done has been to build on the Cosmology of the past by including an ingredient which had been overlooked by such scientific giants as Isaac Newton and Albert Einstein. That ingredient was electromagnetism.

And it is only when the electromagnetic force is restored to its rightful place as a fundamental building block of the universe, that the mysteries of comets can not only be explained, but predicted in advance.

The theory of the “Electric Universe” is predicated on the thesis that the entire universe is basically electrical in nature. So in terms of this theory, we are electric beings living on an electric earth, which orbits around an electric Sun as it travels through electric space.

And comets are not “dirty snowballs” consisting mainly of dirt and ice. They are actually electrically charged objects travelling through an electrically charged field of space. As plasma physicist Wallace Thornhill, one of the leading proponents of this electrical theory, puts it:

Comets spend most of their time far from the Sun where the charge density is low. Since comets move slowly, their electric charges reach equilibrium with the weak, radial solar electric field. When a comet falls into the inner Solar System closer to the Sun, however, its nucleus accelerates into regions of increasing charge density and voltage.

“Charge polarization in the nucleus respond to the increasing electrical stress, forming a vast coma (plasma sheath) around the comet. Discharge jets flare up and move across the surface, similar to the plumes on Jupiter’s moon, Io.

“If the internal electrical stress becomes too great, the nucleus may explode like an overcharged capacitor, breaking into fragments or vanishing forever. Similar effects are most likely responsible for meteoric explosions in Earth’s atmosphere, such as the one that occurred over Tunguska in Siberia.”  (View Source)

In addition to challenging historians, geologists and physicists with his revolutionary theories of cosmic collisions within the recorded history of mankind, Velikovsky was the first to point out that space was not a vacuum and that the earth was surrounded by an electromagnetic sheath.

This sheath, which has now come to be called the magnetosphere, has a geomagnetic tail which extends beyond the orbit of the moon. The Van Allen radiation belts, which were discovered in 1958, are located within this magnetosphere surrounding the earth.

The well-known phenomena of the auroras, which can be seen in both the northern hemisphere (aurora borealis) and the southern hemisphere (aurora australis), are displays of light that result from disturbances in the magnetosphere caused by the solar wind.

These charged particles emitted by the sun cause changes in the upper atmosphere of the earth which manifest themselves as displays of varying intensity and colour. They can even appear blood-red, as can be seen in the accompanying photograph.

Example of a Red Aurora

What Velikovsky suspected, and what space probes have now confirmed, is that electrically charged comets generate electrical discharges when they come in close proximity to other electrically charged objects like planets. In other words, they generate thunder and lightning.

But if a large comet should approach the earth, the electrical discharges that would be generated between these two bodies would be unlike any localised electrical storm normally experienced on the earth. Lightning and thunder would literally engulf the entire planet.

Humanity would be stunned by the cacophony of noise that would be generated by this phantasmagorical display of light and sound. It would seem like a cosmic battle of the Gods, just as it was portrayed in the myths and legends of ancient societies all over the globe.

And it is this clash of light and sound that those who have experienced the onset of the three days of darkness in dreams or visions, have emphasized the most.

Continued in Part Six

Allan, The Three Days of Darkness, November 22, 2019, 11:04 am

The Three Days of Darkness (Part Four)

One of the most striking features of the prophecies recorded in the Old Testament, is the repeated reference to the devastation that is predicted to occur at the end of the present age. The prophets referred to these times as the “Latter Days” or “End of Days” leading up to the return of the Messiah.

In referring to this time of destruction, these prophets wrote about one event in particular. They called this event “The Day of the Lord”, or even “The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord”. And this has became a recurring theme of Christian prophecy throughout the centuries.

This is what Joel had to say in chapter two of his book of prophecy:

“Blow ye the trumpet in Zion, and sound an alarm in my holy mountain: let all the inhabitants of the land tremble: for the day of the Lord cometh, for it is nigh at hand;

“A day of darkness and of gloominess, a day of clouds and of thick darkness, as the morning spread upon the mountains: a great people and a strong; there hath not been ever the like, neither shall be any more after it, even to the years of many generations

“The earth shall quake before them; the heavens shall tremble: the sun and the moon shall be dark, and the stars shall withdraw their shining: And I will shew wonders in the heavens and in the earth, blood, and fire, and pillars of smoke.

The sun shall be turned into darkness, and the moon into blood, before the great and terrible day of the Lord come”.

In the verses quoted above, Joel describes events that closely parallel the torments that are described by St. John in chapter eight of his book of Revelation.

“The first angel sounded, and there followed hail and fire mingled with blood, and they were cast upon the earth: and the third part of trees was burnt up, and all green grass was burnt up.

And the second angel sounded, and as it were a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea: and the third part of the sea became blood;

And the third part of the creatures which were in the sea, and had life, died; and the third part of the ships were destroyed.

And the third angel sounded, and there fell a great star from heaven, burning as it were a lamp, and it fell upon the third part of the rivers, and upon the fountains of waters;

And the name of the star is called Wormwood: and the third part of the waters became wormwood; and many men died of the waters, because they were made bitter.

And the fourth angel sounded, and the third part of the sun was smitten, and the third part of the moon, and the third part of the stars; so as the third part of them was darkened, and the day shone not for a third part of it, and the night likewise”.

As we have seen in the previous instalment, there have been two saints who have added to the prophecies recorded in the Old and New Testaments. One of these was Saint Francis of Assisi, while the other was the 20th century Italian saint known as Padre Pio.

For easy reference, the predictions made by these two saints may be summarised as follows:

Summary of the Warning of St Francis

  • The time is approaching when there will be great trials and afflictions
  • Dissensions, both spiritual and temporal, will abound
  • The charity of many will grow cold
  • The malice of the wicked will increase
  • The devils will have unusual power
  • Few Christians will remain who have loyal hearts and perfect charity
  • A false Pontiff will arise who is not canonically elected
  • He will not be a true pastor, but a DESTROYER
  • By his cunning, many will be drawn into error and death
  • Scandals will multiply and the Church will be divided
  • Those who do not consent to error will suffer injuries and persecution
  • Those who choose to obey God rather than man will perish
  • By their death they will purchase for themselves eternal life
  • Those who are found faithful at the end will receive the crown of life

Summary of Padre Pio’s Warning

The sins of men have multiplied beyond measure: Irreverence in Church, sinful pride committed in sham religious activities, lack of true brotherly love, indecency in dress, especially at summer seasons…The world is filled with iniquity.

The hour of my coming is near. A most dreadful punishment will bear witness to the times. It will begin during a very cold night. The wind will roar. After a time, thunderbolts will be heard.

Soon a more terrible catastrophe shall come upon the entire world, such as never before has been witnessed. This catastrophe shall come upon the earth like a flash of lightning at which moment the light of the morning sun shall be replaced by black darkness!

The wicked shall behold My Divine Heart. There shall be great confusion because of this utter darkness in which the entire earth shall be enveloped, and many, many shall die from fear and despair.

Hurricanes of fire will pour forth from the clouds and spread over the entire earth! Storms, bad weather, thunderbolts and earthquakes will cover the earth for two days. An uninterrupted rain of fire will take place!

Lock all the doors and windows. Let no one go across the yard, even to feed the animals – he who steps outside will perish! Keep your windows well covered. Do not look out. Light a blessed candle, which will suffice for many days. Pray the rosary. Read spiritual books.

Provide yourself with sufficient food. The powers of nature shall be moved, and a rain of fire shall make people tremble with fear. Have courage! I am in the midst of you

Take care of the animals during these days. I am the Creator and Preserver of all animals as well as man. I will preserve the property of the elect, including the animals, for they shall be in need of sustenance afterwards as well.

Do not look during the earthquake, because the anger of God is holy! Jesus does not want us to behold the anger of God, because God’s anger must be contemplated with fear and trembling.

Those who disregard this advice will be killed instantly. The wind will carry with it poisonous gases which will be diffused over the entire earth.

Satan will triumph! But after three nights, the earthquake and fire will cease. On the following day the sun will shine again. angels will descend from Heaven and will spread the spirit of peace over the earth.

Those who shall fight for My cause shall receive grace from My Divine Heart; and the cry: “WHO IS LIKE UNTO GOD!” shall serve as a means of protection to many. However, many shall burn in the open fields like withered grass! The godless shall be annihilated, so that afterwards the just shall be able to stand afresh.

Be courageous soldiers of Christ! At the return of light, let everyone give thanks to the Holy Trinity for Their protection! The devastation shall be very great! But I, Your God, will have purified the earth. I am with you. Have confidence!

The Prophet Joel

Even though the Hebrew prophet Joel lived almost three thousand years ago, he was not content to merely record the events that would happen during the “last days”. He went even further. He predicted that when the time of the end drew near, others would prophesy as well’

“And it shall come to pass afterward, that I will pour out my spirit upon all flesh; and your sons and your daughters shall prophesy, your old men shall dream dreams, your young men shall see visions: And also upon the servants and upon the handmaids in those days will I pour out my spirit”. (Joel 2:28-29)

One of the remarkable features in this modern age of social media, is the ability of anyone with access to the Internet to upload personal videos on any subject that they wish and share their experiences with others. And this applies to prophecy as well.

If you do a search for “the three days of darkness” on Google, it will generate a response of over five hundred and seventy million results, while a similar search on sources like YouTube will produce page after page of people describing their own dreams and visions.

These testimonials come from ordinary men and women – people young and old, male and female, from locations all around the world – yet they all have a remarkable consistency with the words of the prophets of old, as well as with the warnings given by St. Francis and Padre Pio.

To illustrate what I mean, I am including links below with ten testimonials that I have chosen at random. And just as the prophet Joel predicted, some of these are dreams, and some of them are visions.

Five Dreams

See Video # 1: Uploaded to YouTube on July 24, 2018

Summary – Warned not to look or go outside – need to store water – the weather is crazy – constant rain – deep booming sounds coming out of the earth – do not feel fear or anxiety – spread the message to others

See Video # 2: Uploaded to YouTube on April 21, 2017

Summary – Cosmic event – huge cloud of darkness covering the stars – terrible images, especially for the unprepared – do not ignore the signs – intense aurora covering the whole sky – mighty earthquake

See Video # 3: Uploaded to YouTube on July 31, 2014

Summary – Heard a voice asking, “where is your God now?” – then everything just went dark – felt a heavy presence above me – began to pray – woke up – felt like it was a warning – do not doubt God’s presence  

See Video # 4: Uploaded to YouTube on October 7, 2018

Summary – Dreamed he was driving – looked up at the sun – lights shot out from the sun – swirling low dark clouds filled the sky – huge beings hovering close to the earth with lightning coming out of their arms – he wasn’t afraid

See Video # 5: Uploaded to YouTube on January 12, 2019

Summary – The three days of darkness will begin in the night when an asteroid hits the earth – stay put wherever you are – do not open your doors – do not look outside – people’s hearts will fail them for fear – the true children of God will be protected

Five Visions

See Video # 1: Uploaded to YouTube on January 19, 2019

Summary – Saw Jesus sitting on a bench overlooking a large city – warned about a “lights-out” event – soon the darkness will be all around – Jesus will send a sign – he will protect those who follow him

See Video # 2: Uploaded to YouTube on January 23, 2019

Summary – Saw a giant meteor hit the earth sending waves spreading out in all directions – demons will be unleashed for a short time on the earth – many will die in fear – evil will prevail for a little while – but the Light of the Lord Jesus will overcome them all.

Shut and lock your doors – do not open them no matter what voice you hear – I see dead people walking the earth like zombies – they are demonic – the weak and feeble will not make it – during this time of darkness there must be fasting and praying -do not have fear but trust in Jesus

See Video # 3: Uploaded to YouTube on October 10, 2013

Summary – Sitting in a classroom – everything went completely black – I knew I would die if I stepped outside – wherever you are, if you call upon the Lord you will be protected

See Video # 4: Uploaded to YouTube on December 9, 2014

Summary – Saw an asteroid hit the earth – huge tsunami and earthquake – then the three days of darkness will begin -this is the time to seek God – repent and pursue the holiness and righteousness

See Video # 5: Uploaded to YouTube on April 13, 2019

Summary – Disturbances in the sky will be the cause of the darkness – pray to be in the right place at the right time – pray for your family members – do not despair or give up hope – I will lead and guide you – you are loved

No one who watches these videos can fail to recognize the sincerity of those who uploaded them, or their conviction that what they have seen and heard is a message from the Divine, in whatever shape or form they consider the Deity to be.

There are those who will be quick to dismiss these testimonies because they lack consistency, or because they happen to conflict with this or that part of the Bible. But in doing so, they miss the most significant point, and that is – why are these things happening? – and why are they happening NOW?

This raises another question. How did Joel, a little-known Hebrew prophet, become the only Old Testament prophet to predict that so many ordinary men and women would have these dreams and visions at this time – and that almost three thousand years ago?

There is also a common thread running through most of these videos, and that is that during the three days of darkness, demonic entities will roam the earth seeking out those whom they can destroy. For that reason, the faithful are urged to lock their doors and not venture outside.

But it is worth pointing out here that neither St. Francis nor Padre Pio referred to demonic entities in their descriptions of events during the three days of darkness. The reason why Padre Pio warned people to stay inside was because the whole world would be immersed in poisonous gas at that time. As he wrote:

“Those who disregard this advice will be killed instantly. The wind will carry with it poisonous gases which will be diffused over the entire earth.

However, this does not mean that these warnings of demonic attacks should be discounted or ignored, for the Bible does refer to a time when supernatural creatures will be unleashed upon the earth. In chapter nine of his book of Revelation, St. John writes:

“And the fifth angel sounded, and I saw a star fall from heaven unto the earth: and to him was given the key of the bottomless pit.  And he opened the bottomless pit; and there arose a smoke out of the pit, as the smoke of a great furnace; and the sun and the air were darkened by reason of the smoke of the bottomless pit.

And there came out of the smoke locusts upon the earth: and unto them was given power, as the scorpions of the earth have power. And it was commanded them that they should not hurt the grass of the earth, neither any green thing, neither any tree; but only those men which have not the seal of God in their foreheads.

And to them it was given that they should not kill them, but that they should be tormented five months: and their torment was as the torment of a scorpion, when he striketh a man”.

But no matter what might actually happen at the time of the three days of darkness, the Christian faithful are urged not to be afraid, because they will be protected in their hour of need. To quote again from the words of Padre Pio:

“Those who hope in Me, and believe in my words, have nothing to fear because I will not forsake them, nor those who spread My message. No harm will come to those who are in the state of grace and who seek My mother’s protection. Have courage! I am in the midst of you”.

And in the words of the prophet Joel:

And it shall come to pass, that whosoever shall call on the name of the Lord shall be delivered: for in mount Zion and in Jerusalem shall be deliverance, as the Lord hath said, and in the remnant whom the Lord shall call”. (Joel 2:32)

And finally, as Jesus himself counselled his disciples shortly before his death:

“Watch ye therefore, and pray always, that ye may be accounted worthy to escape all these things that shall come to pass, and to stand before the Son of man”. (Luke 21:36)

Continued in Part Five 

Allan, The Three Days of Darkness, November 8, 2019, 3:20 pm

The Three Days of Darkness (Part Three)

The darkness that descended upon Egypt at the time of Moses had several unusual qualities. It not only blotted out the sun and the moon and the stars for a period of three days and three nights, but it was also thick enough to be felt. But there was something else even more sinister.

This darkness had the power to kill, and to do so – SELECTIVELY. According to the Bible, it would single out the firstborn of every man, woman or beast and put them to death. As we read in the eleventh chapter of the Book of Exodus:

And Moses said: Thus saith the LORD, About midnight will I go out into the midst of Egypt: And all the firstborn of Pharaoh that sitteth upon his throne, even unto the firstborn of the maidservant that is behind the mill; and all the firstborn of beasts.

“And there shall be a great cry throughout all the land of Egypt, such as there was none like it, nor shall be like it anymore. But against any of the children of Israel shall not a dog move his tongue, against man or beast: that ye may know how that the LORD doth put a difference between the Egyptians and Israel”.

In order to be spared from this final plague, the LORD instructed Moses to tell the Israelites to sacrifice a lamb or goat and smear its blood on the two side posts and on the upper door post of their houses. As the Bible goes on to explain:

“For the LORD will pass through to smite the Egyptians; and when he seeth the blood upon the lintel, and on the two side posts, the LORD will pass over the door, and will not suffer the destroyer to come in unto your houses to smite you”. (Exodus 12: 23)

This, of course, is the origin of the Jewish word Pesach, meaning Passover, when God “passed over” the houses of the Jews and spared them from the final plague when the “destroyer” killed all the firstborn of the Egyptians. And this brings up an important question.

If a comet was responsible for the plagues that afflicted Egypt at the time of Moses, then how did it choose who to kill and who to save? And if a comet is also responsible for the three days and nights of darkness described in the book of Revelation, could something similar happen at that time as well?

If we are to be guided by the leading champions of the Church, there is every reason to believe that at the time of the end, truly diabolical events will happen on the earth. Out of the more than ten thousand saints who have been recognised by the Catholic church, two in particular stand out.

They stand out for a remarkable reason. Both of them were stigmatic. What that means is that each of them manifested on their bodies the wounds suffered by Jesus on the cross. That is, they had physical wounds, scars and pain in their hands, wrists and feet.

The first of these was the Patron saint of Italy, St. Francis of Assisi (1182 to 1226 AD), who was canonized by Pope Gregory IX in 1228 AD. The other was another Italian, St. Pio of Pietrelcina, better known as Padre Pio (1887 to 1968 AD). He was canonized by Pope John Paul II in 2002 AD.

What makes these two saints so important in this context, is not only their extreme sanctity, but also because each of them left recorded prophecies of events that would occur on the earth at the time of the end, shortly before the return of the Saviour.

St. Francis

St Francis of Assisi (1182 – 1226)

Before he died, St. Francis of Assisi called together his followers and warned them of the coming troubles, saying:

“The time is fast approaching in which there will be great trials and afflictions; perplexities and dissensions, both spiritual and temporal, will abound; the charity of many will grow cold, and the malice of the wicked will increase.

“The devils will have unusual power, the immaculate purity of our Order, and of others, will be so much obscured that there will be very few Christians who will obey the true Sovereign Pontiff and the Roman Church with loyal hearts and perfect charity.

“At the time of this tribulation a man, not canonically elected, will be raised to the Pontificate, who, by his cunning, will endeavor to draw many into error and death. Then scandals will be multiplied, our Order will be divided, and many others will be entirely destroyed, because they will consent to error instead of opposing it.

“There will be such diversity of opinions and schisms among the people, the religious and the clergy, that, except those days were shortened, according to the words of the Gospel, even the elect would be led into error, were they not specially guided, amid such great confusion, by the immense mercy of God.

“Then our Rule and manner of life will be violently opposed by some, and terrible trials will come upon us. Those who are found faithful will receive the crown of life; but woe to those who, trusting solely in their Order, shall fall into tepidity, for they will not be able to support the temptations permitted for the proving of the elect.

“Those who preserve in their fervour and adhere to virtue with love and zeal for the truth, will suffer injuries and persecutions as rebels and schismatics; for their persecutors, urged on by the evil spirits, will say they are rendering a great service to God by destroying such pestilent men from the face of the earth.

“But the Lord will be the refuge of the afflicted and will save all who trust in Him. And in order to be like their Head, [Christ] these, the elect, will act with confidence, and by their death will purchase for themselves eternal life; choosing to obey God rather than man, they will fear nothing, and they will prefer to perish rather than consent to falsehood and perfidy.

“Some preachers will keep silence about the truth, and others will trample it under foot and deny it. Sanctity of life will be held in derision even by those who outwardly profess it, for in those days JESUS CHRIST WILL SEND THEM NOT A TRUE PASTOR, BUT A DESTROYER.” (View Source)

Padre Pio

Padre Pio (1887 – 1968)

In 1950, at the age of sixty-three, Padre Pio wrote a personal letter addressed to the Commission of Heroldsbach, a committee of Catholic experts appointed by the Vatican. In it he testified to the truth and reality of the revelations on the Three Days of Darkness given to him by the Lord.

These revelations not only described what conditions would be like on earth during these days of darkness, they also included specific instructions to the faithful on what to do to survive demonic manifestations that would have the power to kill those who were not protected. This is what he wrote:

“Keep your windows well covered. Do not look out. Light a blessed candle, which will suffice for many days. Pray the rosary. Read spiritual books. Make acts of Spiritual Communion, also acts of love, which are so pleasing to Us.

“Pray with outstretched arms, or prostrate on the ground, in order that many souls may be saved. Do not go outside the house. Provide yourself with sufficient food. The powers of nature shall be moved, and a rain of fire shall make people tremble with fear. Have courage! I am in the midst of you”.

“Take care of the animals during these days. I am the Creator and Preserver of all animals as well as man. I shall give you a few signs beforehand, at which time you should place more food before them. I will preserve the property of the elect, including the animals, for they shall be in need of sustenance afterwards as well.

“Let no one go across the yard, even to feed the animals–he who steps outside will perish! Cover your windows carefully. My elect shall not see My wrath. Have confidence in Me, and I will be your protection. Your confidence obliges Me to come to your aid.

“The hour of My coming is near! But I will show mercy. A most dreadful punishment will bear witness to the times. My angels, who are to be the executioners of this work, are ready with their pointed swords! They will take special care to annihilate all those who mocked Me and would not believe in My revelations.

“Hurricanes of fire will pour forth from the clouds and spread over the entire earth! Storms, bad weather, thunderbolts and earthquakes will cover the earth for two days. An uninterrupted rain of fire will take place!

“It will begin during a very cold night. All this is to prove that God is the Master of Creation. Those who hope in Me, and believe in my words, have nothing to fear because I will not forsake them, nor those who spread My message. No harm will come to those who are in the state of grace and who seek My mother’s protection.

“That you may be prepared for these visitations, I will give you the following signs and instructions:

“The night will be very cold. The wind will roar. After a time, thunderbolts will be heard. Lock all the doors and windows. Talk to no one outside the house. Kneel down before a crucifix, be sorry for your sins, and beg My Mother’s protection.

“Do not look during the earthquake, because the anger of God is holy! Jesus does not want us to behold the anger of God, because God’s anger must be contemplated with fear and trembling.

“Those who disregard this advice will be killed instantly. The wind will carry with it poisonous gases which will be diffused over the entire earth. Those who suffer and die innocently will be martyrs and they will be with Me in My Kingdom.

“Satan will triumph! But after three nights, the earthquake and fire will cease. On the following day the sun will shine again. angels will descend from Heaven and will spread the spirit of peace over the earth.

“A feeling of immeasurable gratitude will take possession of those who survive this terrible ordeal-the impending punishment-with which God has visited the earth since creation.

“I have chosen souls in other countries too, such as Belgium, Switzerland, Spain, who have received these revelations so that other countries also may be prepared. Pray much during this Holy Year of 1950. Pray the Rosary, but pray it well, so that your prayers may reach Heaven.

“Soon a more terrible catastrophe shall come upon the entire world, such as never before has been witnessed, a terrible chastisement never before experienced! The war of 1950 shall be the introduction to these things.

“How unconcerned men are regarding these things which shall so soon come upon them, contrary to all expectations. How indifferent they are in preparing themselves for these unheard-of events, through which they will have to pass so shortly!

“The weight of the Divine balance has reached the earth! The wrath of My Father shall be poured out over the entire world! I am again warning the world through your instrumentality, as I have so often done heretofore.

“The sins of men have multiplied beyond measure: Irreverence in Church, sinful pride committed in sham religious activities, lack of true brotherly love, indecency in dress, especially at summer seasons…The world is filled with iniquity.

“This catastrophe shall come upon the earth like a flash of lightning at which moment the light of the morning sun shall be replaced by black darkness! No one shall leave the house or look out of a window from that moment on. I Myself shall come amidst thunder and lightning.

“The wicked shall behold My Divine Heart. There shall be great confusion because of this utter darkness in which the entire earth shall be enveloped, and many, many shall die from fear and despair.

“Those who shall fight for My cause shall receive grace from My Divine Heart; and the cry: “WHO IS LIKE UNTO GOD!” shall serve as a means of protection to many. However, many shall burn in the open fields like withered grass! The godless shall be annihilated, so that afterwards the just shall be able to stand afresh.

“On the day, as soon as complete darkness has set in, no one shall leave the house or look from out of the window. The darkness shall last a day and a night, followed by another day and a night, and another day–but on the night following, the stars will shine again, and on the next morning the sun shall rise again, and it will be SPRINGTIME!!

“In the days of darkness, my elect shall not sleep, as did the disciples in the garden of olives. They, shall pray incessantly, and they shall not be disappointed in Me. I shall gather My elect. Hell will believe itself to be in possession of the entire earth, but I shall reclaim it!

“Do you, perhaps, think that I would permit My Father to have such terrible chastisements come upon the world, if the world would turn from iniquity to justice?

“But because of My great love, these afflictions shall be permitted to come upon man. Although many shall curse Me, yet thousands of souls shall be saved through them. No human understanding can fathom the depth of My love!

“Pray! Pray! I desire your prayers. My Dear Mother Mary, Saint Joseph, Saint Elizabeth, Saint Conrad, Saint Michael. Saint Peter, the Little Therese, Your Holy Angels, shall be your intercessors. Implore their aid!

“Be courageous soldiers of Christ! At the return of light, let everyone give thanks to the Holy Trinity for Their protection! The devastation shall be very great! But I, Your God, will have purified the earth. I am with you. Have confidence!” (View Source)

Continued in Part Four 

Allan, The Three Days of Darkness, October 12, 2019, 12:17 pm

The Three Days of Darkness (Part Two)

In the course of his research, Velikovsky uncovered written evidence to support a completely new interpretation of Biblical history, as it related to the events that occurred in Egypt at the time of the Exodus. He explained the various plagues that occurred at that time in the following way.

If at the time of Moses, the earth happened to cross the path of a large comet as it headed away from the sun, then the first sign that the people on earth would experience would be a stream of very fine dust particles entering the atmosphere.

And if the nucleus of the comet contained iron, then the dust particles in the tail of the comet would be coloured red. And as these red dust particles fell on the surface of the earth, they would turn the land, the seas, rivers and lakes a blood-red colour.

These particles would also pollute the water, making it unfit to drink. This contaminated water would then cause the fish to die, and their dead carcases would soon begin to decompose, causing the rivers to give off a foul odour.

In order to escape, the frogs would abandon the rivers and make their way into the houses of the Egyptians. As the earth continued to pass through the tail of the comet, the red dust now coating the land would cause an infestation of lice, followed by immense swarms of flies.

This dust would also be likely to cause a variety of skin infections, boils and blisters, that would afflict men and animals alike. The lice and flies would also lead to outbreaks of disease among the livestock of the Egyptians.

As the earth plunged deeper into the tail of the comet, the particles of reddish dust would give way to gravel particles. These superheated particles would then fall to earth in the form of fiery hailstones that would “run along the ground”.

These flaming meteorites would not only strike people and animals caught in the open, but they would set fire to the crops in the field as well. And any crops left standing would likely be destroyed by the vast swarms of locusts that would follow.

Finally, as the comet drew closer still, the entire earth would be enveloped in thick, choking dust that would blacken the skies and lead to days and nights of complete darkness. Truly, this would be a darkness that could be felt, just as was described in Egypt during the plagues of Moses.

Although Velikovsky was not interested in prophecy, or in the book of Revelation, anyone who has read any of his works cannot fail to notice the parallels between the events recorded at the time of the Exodus, and the events prophesied by St. John.

The Book of Revelation

As previously mentioned, in his Book of Revelation, St. John described seven angels associated with seven trumpets, each of which signified a particular scourge or disaster that would afflict the earth.

According to these verses, a “great star from heaven” would appear in the skies above the earth “burning like a lamp”, that would cause men’s hearts to quake with fear. This great star would be characterised by the following features:It would generate “hail and fire mingled with blood”

• It would burn up “the third part of the trees”
• It would burn up “all the green grass”
• “A great mountain burning with fire” would be cast into the sea
• “The third part of the sea would become blood”
• One third of all the creatures living in the sea would die
• One third of all the ships in the sea would be destroyed
• A “great star from heaven” would fall upon one third of the rivers
• One third of the waters would become “wormwood” (bitter)
• Many people would die from drinking these bitter waters
• “A third part of the sun and moon” would be smitten
• “A third part of the stars would be darkened”
• The sun would not shine for three days (a third part of it)
• The night sky would also be dark for three nights

This theme of cosmic catastrophe, causing blood, hailstones, brimstone and fire to rain down upon the earth at the time of the end of the world can be found throughout the Bible. For example, in the Book of Zephaniah:

“The great day of the Lord is near, it is near, and hasteth greatly, even the voice of the day of the Lord: the mighty man shall cry there bitterly.

“That day is a day of wrath, a day of trouble and distress, a day of wasteness and desolation, a day of darkness and gloominess, a day of clouds and thick darkness, a day of the trumpet and alarm against the fenced cities, and against the high towers.”  (Zephaniah 1: 14-16)

When the disciples asked Jesus about the signs that would precede his return to earth, he replied:

“And there shall be signs in the sun, and in the moon, and in the stars; and upon the earth distress of nations with perplexity; the sea and the waves roaring; Men’s hearts failing them for fear, and for looking after those things which are coming on the earth: for the powers of heaven shall be shaken.”  (Luke 21:25-26)

The obvious question that arises from these Biblical passages is what sort of event would cause the powers of heaven be shaken, leading to signs in the sun, the moon and the stars. Clearly, this would have to be an astronomical event of gigantic proportions.

“And I saw the seven angels which stood before God; and to them were given seven trumpets.”  (Revelation 8:2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The First Trumpet

“The first angel sounded, and there followed hail and fire mingled with blood, and they were cast upon the earth: and the third part of trees was burnt up, and all the green grass was burnt up.”  (Revelation 8:7)

Based on the research conducted by Velikovsky, and his interpretation of the events that occurred at the time of the Exodus, it is easy to imagine the following interpretation of the visions described by St. John.

Suppose, for example, a large comet was to emerge from deep space and enter our solar system. It would then be drawn toward the sun by the force of gravity. As it did so, it would develop a trail of dust particles that would travel behind the nucleus of the comet.

However, once it had reached its perihelion or closest approach to the sun, the tail of the comet would now travel in front of the comet, due to the pressure of the solar wind generated by the sun. As any astronomer will confirm, comet tails always point away from the sun.

And if by chance, as it passed around the sun and began its journey back into space, the path of this comet should happen to cross the orbit of the earth, then the earth would first be exposed to the dust particles in the tail of the comet.

And if this comet happened to have a nucleus composed of significant amounts of iron, then the dust particles in the tail of the comet would be coloured red. And as this comet drew closer, it would shower the surface of the earth with enormous quantities of red dust.

These red dust particles would make bodies of water such as lakes, rivers or seas turn red, causing them to look like blood. This contaminated water would not only become thick and muddy, it would prove toxic to anyone who tried to drink it.

As the comet drew closer to the earth, the fine dust particles in its tail would give way to larger particles. When these gravel-sized particles reached the outer atmosphere of the earth, they would become white hot with friction, and become fiery meteorites that would look like “hail and fire mingled with blood”.

This fiery hail would devastate the entire surface of the planet. It would not only set fire to the grassy plains; it would burn up entire forests as well. The damage caused by this shower of incandescent meteorites could easily cause “a third part of them to be burnt up”.

The Second Trumpet

Then, according to St. John, the second trumpet of the Book of Revelation will sound.

“And the second angel sounded, and as it were a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea: and the third part of the sea became blood; and the third part of the creatures which were in the sea, and had life, died; and the third part of the ships were destroyed.”  (Revelation: 8:8-9)

If a large asteroid plunged into the sea, it would penetrate the ocean floor causing huge amounts of superheated water, molten rock and other debris to rise high into the upper atmosphere. This superheated material would then fall back down to earth in the form of blazing missiles.

In addition to setting off a series of mega-quakes around the world, the impact of this asteroid would also cause a rupture of undersea fault lines that would generate colossal tsunamis that would travel around the world, causing immense destruction to coastal cities everywhere.

Volcanoes would suddenly roar back to life, spewing vast clouds of debris into the atmosphere, adding to the hellish conditions. Forest fires would also create enormous noxious fumes that would stain the sky and cause the moon to appear “blood-red” in colour.

The death toll caused by a disaster of this magnitude would be beyond count, as would the damage that would be inflicted on cities, ships and cargo. This devastation could easily kill “a third part of the creatures in the sea”, as well as destroy “a third part” of all the ships in the sea.

The Third Trumpet

Then the third angel will sound his trumpet.

“And the third angel sounded, and there fell a great star from heaven, burning as it were a lamp, and it fell upon the third part of the rivers, and upon the fountains of waters;

“And the name of the star is called Wormwood: and the third part of the waters became wormwood; and many men died of the waters, because they were made bitter.”  (Revelation 8: 10-11)

St. John describes this comet as a “star” that appears in the skies of earth “burning as it were a lamp”. And because the dust from this “star” would poison the water in rivers, lakes and streams, he likens it to a wormwood plant, long known for its bitter qualities. Then followed the fourth angel.

“And the fourth angel sounded, and the third part of the of the sun was smitten, and the third part of the moon, and the third part of the stars; so as the third part of them was darkened, and the day shone not for a third part of it, and the night likewise.”  (Revelation 8: 12)

As the nucleus or head of the comet makes its closest approach to the earth, the dust cloud that surrounds it will blot out the sun, the moon and the stars for a period of three days and three nights (a third part).

It is interesting to note here the parallel between the time of darkness predicted by St. John, and the darkness that befell Egypt at the time of Moses, which also lasted for three days and three nights. And in both cases, this was a darkness “that could be felt”.

“And the Lord said unto Moses, stretch out thine hand toward heaven, that there may be darkness over the land of Egypt, even darkness which may be felt. And Moses stretched forth his hand toward heaven: and there was a thick darkness in all the land of Egypt three days.”  (Exodus 10:20-22)

The Comet Revealed

Although Velikovsky attributed all the plagues that descended on Egypt to the interaction between the earth and a comet, many writers have since challenged the idea that a comet would be the cause of the disasters described by St. John in his book of Revelation.

For example, followers of the popular writer Erich von Däniken, as well as those of Russian-born author Zechariah Sitchin, believe that these disasters will be caused by the return of a hitherto undiscovered planet, variously referred to as Planet X, Nibiru or the 12th planet.

Others have speculated that they could be the result of a close encounter between the earth and a “brown dwarf”, a celestial object intermediate in size between a giant planet and a small star, believed to emit mainly infrared radiation.

But as I have already pointed out elsewhere, these critics have failed to note the explicit references to the word comet by such people as Nostradamus and the Christian mystic St. Hildegard of Bingen.

Because the appearance of the comet and the events that would follow formed such a critical part of earth’s future, Nostradamus composed nearly sixty quatrains about this event alone. In Century Two, Verse 62 of his prophecies, he wrote:

Mabus will soon die, then will come a terrible destruction of people and animals: Sudden vengeance will be seen, A hundred hands, thirst, famine, when the comet will pass.

When Nostradamus wrote about the comet, he referred to it in a variety of ways. Among the descriptions he used were “bearded star”, “great star”, “fire from the sky”, trail of sparks”, “burning torch”, “flaming torch”, “long meteor”, and “dart from heaven”.

He also made frequent references to “false dust”, “raining blood, milk and stones”, “water coloured by blood”, “great hail”, “red hail” and “hail larger than an egg”.

Many Christians may be surprised to learn that John was not the only Christian saint who had visions of things that would happen in the end times. More than a thousand years after his death, another person had similar visions, and was later recognized as a saint by the Catholic Church.

St Hildegard

St Hildegard of Bingen (1098 – 1179)

That person was the Christian mystic St. Hildegard of Bingen, a town on the river Rhine located not far from the modern city of Frankfurt in Germany. Hildegard was born at the end of 11th century, and from an early age began to experience visions of events that would occur in the future.  As she wrote:

“Up to my fifteenth year I saw much, and related some of the things seen to others, who would inquire with astonishment, whence such things might come. … Frequently, in my conversations, I would relate future things which I saw as if present, but, noting the amazement of my listeners, I became more reticent.”

Because of her early visions, Hildegard was drawn towards a life in the Church. She joined a Benedictine monastery where she rose to the position of Abbess. She proved to be a remarkable woman blessed with many talents, and was even consulted by bishops, popes and kings.

At a time when few women became accomplished writers, Hildegard produced major works of theology, as well as botanical and medicinal texts. Then in the year 1141 A.D., Hildegard had a vision of God in which she was instructed to “write down that which you see and hear”.

She subsequently published her first theological text under the title of “Scivias” (“Know the Ways of the Lord”). In this work, which dealt with things that would occur during the days leading up to the return of the Christ, she wrote about a comet and its impact on “the great nation”.

“Before the Comet comes, many nations, the good excepted, will be scoured with want and famine. The great nation in the ocean that is inhabited by people of different tribes and descent will be devastated by an earthquake, storm and tidal waves. It will be divided, and in great part submerged.”

As she went on to record:

“The Comet by its tremendous pressure, will force out much of the ocean and flood many countries, causing much want and many plagues. [After the] great Comet, the great nation will be devastated by earthquakes, storms, and great waves of water, causing much want and plagues.

“The ocean will also flood many other countries, so that all coastal cities will live in fear, with many destroyed. All sea coast cities will be fearful and many of them will be destroyed by tidal waves, and most living creatures will be killed and even those who escape will die from a horrible disease”. 

Continued in Part Three

Allan, The Three Days of Darkness, October 11, 2019, 10:24 am

The Three Days of Darkness (Part One)

According to Biblical scholars, during the reign of the Roman Emperor Domitian (81AD to 96AD), the apostle John was exiled on the Greek island of Patmos, located just off the west coast of modern Turkey.

As he himself wrote in the first chapter of his book of Revelation: “I John, who also am your brother, and companion in tribulation, and in the kingdom and patience of Jesus Christ, was in the isle that is called Patmos, for the word of God, and for the testimony of Jesus Christ”.

It was during this time of exile that John had a series of visions in which he was shown the events that would lead up to the return of Jesus. As he explained:

“The Revelation of Jesus Christ, which God gave unto him, to shew unto his servants things which must shortly come to pass; and he sent and signified it by his angel unto his servant John”.

In his book of Revelation, John details the things that he saw during his visions, and what he was told by the various angels associated with these events. For example, in chapter eight, he describes seven angels with seven trumpets, each of which signified a particular scourge or disaster.

“And the seven angels which had the seven trumpets prepared themselves to sound. The first angel sounded, and there followed hail and fire mingled with blood, and they were cast upon the earth; and the third part of the trees was burnt up, and all the green grass burnt up.

“And the second angel sounded, and as it were a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea: and the third part of the sea became blood; and the third part of the creatures which were in the sea, and had life, died; and the third part of the ships were destroyed.

“And the third angel sounded, and there fell a great star from heaven, burning as it were a lamp, and it fell upon the third part of the rivers, and upon the fountains of waters; and the name of the star is called Wormwood: and the third part of the waters became wormwood; and many men died of the waters, because they were made bitter.

“And the fourth angel sounded, and the third part of the sun was smitten, and the third part of the moon, and the third part of the stars; so as the third part of them was darkened, and the day shone not for a third part of it, and the night likewise.”  (Revelation 8: 6-12)

The question that has challenged eschatologists (those who study “end-time” events) ever since, is this. What exactly was John describing when he wrote the above words? And it is no surprise to find that most Bible scholars disagree as to the nature and timing of these events.

But there is an important clue to interpreting the words of St. John that has been missed by most scholars, and that is that these predictions of end-time events bear an eerie similarity to things that happened some three thousand years ago in Egypt.

In the Days of Moses

The second book of the Bible, known as the book of Exodus, tells the story of Moses, and how he was called upon by God to lead the children of Israel out of Egypt and guide them to a promised land flowing with “milk and honey”.

The Bible relates how Moses confronted Pharaoh and demanded that he let his people go. But Pharaoh was unmoved. As we read in the Bible, the Lord hardened his heart against Moses, and he refused to release the Israelites. In response, God brought upon a series of plagues against the people of Egypt.

The first plague caused the waters and rivers to be turned into blood, killing the fish and polluting the drinking water. This was followed by an outbreak of frogs, lice and flies. Then came the “murrain”, an infectious disease that killed the livestock.

The next plague was a strange dust that caused boils and blisters to break out on the skin of people and animals. Then came thunder and hail, and fire that ran along the ground, destroying the crops in the field.

This was followed by a vast swarm of locusts that destroyed the remainder of the crops that had survived the hail. Then there came a strange darkness that fell over the land of Egypt. This darkness not only blackened the sky. It was a darkness that could be felt as well.

Now most Bible scholars have been educated to interpret the story of the plagues at the time of the Exodus as a series of miracles, performed by Moses and authorised by God as part of his plan to deliver the children of Israel out of bondage in Egypt.

These scholars have probably never considered for a moment the possibility that the plagues that descended on Egypt might not have been divine miracles at all, but rather the predictable consequences of a close encounter between the earth and a large comet. That is until Velikovsky came along.

Immanuel Velikovsky

By any standards, Velikovsky was an unusual man.  He learned several European languages while he was still a child. He was educated in Moscow, where he distinguished himself in Russian and Mathematics and graduated with a gold medal.

After graduating he travelled to various countries in Europe, including Palestine. This was before Israel became a nation. When he returned to Russia before the outbreak of the first World War, he enrolled at the University of Moscow where he received a Medical degree at the age of 26.

He then left Russia for Berlin where, with the financial help of his father, he edited and published two volumes of scientific papers in Hebrew. It was while he was in Berlin that he enlisted the aid of Albert Einstein in preparing a volume dealing with Mathematics and Physics.

Shortly after his marriage in 1923, he and his wife moved back to Palestine, where he began a successful practice in psychoanalysis, which he had studied while he was in Vienna. He was also instrumental with Einstein in setting up the Hebrew University in Jerusalem.

With the prospect of another World War looming, Velikovsky travelled with his family to New York, where they remained until the end of the war. It was during this period in New York that Velikovsky began his research into the ideas that were to dominate the rest of his life.

While researching early Jewish history, Velikovsky began to wonder if the Egyptian plagues at the time of Moses might have been the result of an astronomical event that affected the entire planet. If so, he reasoned, there should be records of this event in the ancient works of other cultures.

He therefore set about looking to see if similar stories could be found elsewhere. And the more he looked, the more he found. He found them in ancient documents from pre-Columbian America, from China, India, Persia, Babylon, Iceland, Finland, Greece and Rome.

In fact, over the course of the next ten years, he accumulated enough material to fill three complete books, each of which went on to become a best-seller. They were Worlds in Collision (published in 1950), Ages in Chaos (1952) and Earth in Upheaval (1955).

Worlds in Collision summarised the literary accounts of these disasters as recorded by other cultures around the globe. Ages in Chaos dealt with the problems of ancient chronology as a result of these catastrophes, and Earth in Upheaval dealt with the geological evidence for these global catastrophes that can still be found on the earth today.

He was aided in this task by his brilliant analytical ability, his knowledge of science and his talent for languages, which enabled him to delve into records that were not only written in English, but also in Latin, Greek, Hebrew, German, French, Italian and Spanish.

Historical Evidence

One of the first sources that Velikovsky examined was the Papyrus Ipuwer, an ancient Egyptian hieratic papyrus dating back to the period 1250BC, that he found in the Dutch National Museum of Antiquities in the city of Leiden.

In it he found corroborating evidence of the Biblical events described in the book of Exodus. Ipuwer was an Egyptian eyewitness of these events, and his papyrus was a lament devoted to the catastrophe that overtook Egypt at that time. As Velikovsky noted in his book Worlds in Collision, Ipuwer wrote:

“The river is blood”, compared with the book of Exodus: “All the waters that were in the river were turned to blood” (7:20). The author of the papyrus also wrote: “Plague is throughout the land, blood is everywhere”, corresponding with “there was blood throughout all the land of Egypt”. (Exodus 7:21)

While the book of Exodus describes how “the river stank”, and that “all the Egyptians digged around the river for water to drink; for they could not drink of the water of the river” (Exodus 7:24), the papyrus relates: “Men shrink from tasting; human beings thirst after water”, and “That is our water! That is our happiness! What shall we do in respect thereof? All is ruin”.

The Ipuwer papyrus goes on to record such things as: “Cattle are left to stray, and there is none to gather them together”. “Trees are destroyed”. “No fruits, no herbs are found”. “Grain has perished on every side”. “That has perished which yesterday was seen. The land is left to its weariness like the cutting of flax”.

And when the book of Exodus records: “And the LORD sent thunder and hail, and the fire ran along upon the ground; and the LORD rained hail upon the land of Egypt”, the Ipuver papyrus says: “Gates, columns, and walls are consumed by fire. The sky is in confusion”.

Finally, after the tenth plague, when “Pharaoh rose up in the night, he, and all his servants, and all the Egyptians; and there was a great cry in Egypt; for there was not a house where there was not one dead”. (Exodus 12:30) the Ipuwer papyrus notes: “The towns are destroyed. Upper Egypt has become a waste”. “All is ruin”.

As Velikovsky suspected, stories of destruction raining down from the skies were not limited to Egypt alone. Similar tales of death and devastation as a result of cosmic catastrophe could be found in the records of other ancient cultures all around the planet.

For example, on the other side of the world, ancient records described how a great cataclysm caused the earth to quake and the waters in the rivers to turn into blood. The devastation caused by this event can be seen in the following excerpts from their sacred books.

“It was ruin and destruction …. the sea was piled up …. it was a great inundation …. people were drowned in a sticky substance raining from the sky …. the face of the earth grew dark and the gloomy rain endured days and nights …. and then there was a great din of fire above their heads.” (Popul-Vuh)

“There descended from the sky a rain of bitumen and of a sticky substance …. the earth was obscured, and it rained day and night. And men ran hither and thither and were as if seized by madness; they tried to climb to the roofs, and the houses crashed down; they tried to climb the trees, and the trees cast them far away; and when they tried to escape in caves and caverns, these were suddenly closed.” (Manuscript Quiche)

Similar accounts of destruction raining from the skies were preserved in the Manuscript Troano of the Maya, as well as the ancient Mexican text of the Annals of Cuautitlan. They describe in vivid detail how a cosmic catastrophe was accompanied by a hail of stones descending from the sky.

They called the agent of this destruction Hurakan, from which our modern word “hurricane” is derived. The Aztecs called the age that ended in a rain of fire from the sky Quiauh-tonatiuh, meaning “the sun of the fire-rain.”

The Kalevala of the Finns told of a time when hailstones of iron fell from the sky, and the sun and the moon were hidden during a period of darkness.

In Babylonia, the Epic of Gilgamesh described a time when the earth was scorched by great heat, and “darkness stretched to heaven; and all that was bright was turned into darkness. Nor could a brother distinguish his brother.”

What Velikovsky discovered as a result of his decade-long period of research, was that what was described by the ancients as “the wrath of God” was actually a historical cosmic event. And this catastrophe had not just happened once, but many times, as recorded by the Egyptians, the Chinese, the Maya and other ancient societies.

Velikovsky confined his research to events that had happened in the past. Although he quoted frequently from the Bible, he displayed no interest in prophecies relating to the future. Had he done so, he might have discovered that what had happened in the past, was predicted to happen again.

And as readers of this Blog will have realised, the events that are now unfolding on the earth suggest that we are living at a climactic period in human history, and that we are the ones who are fated to experience all the horrors of the ending of this age of darkness.

Continued in Part Two

Allan, The Three Days of Darkness, October 9, 2019, 11:13 am

Beyond the Grave – Part Three

People who report having had near-death experiences all tell of the dramatic sense of reality which characterise their experiences. When they subsequently return to their physical bodies, the waking world seems utterly drab by comparison. These experiences leave deep impressions on their minds, and often lead to dramatic changes from their former style of living.

While it might be supposed that the five stages referred to in the previous instalment are common to all people, there is evidence to suggest that the nature of the near-death-experience varies with the culture of the subject concerned.

In the first investigation of its kind in India, Satwant Pasricha and Ian Stevenson  published a preliminary report on several NDE’s which had come to their attention.  17 

All the subjects who reported these experiences were Hindu-speaking people, who lived in the states of Rajasthan and Uttar Pradesh in northern India. Although the number of cases referred to by Pasricha and Stevenson was not large, comprising eleven males and five females, the stories reported by these subjects showed surprising consistency.

Furthermore, although these cases were consistent among themselves, they showed marked variations from those cases reported in the West. Four cases in particular highlighted the nature of these differences.

Vasudev Pandey was born in 1921 and had a near-death-experience when he almost died of a paratyphoid disease when he was about ten years old. According to the strange tale which Vasudev described to the two investigators, he was abducted by two people and taken before a fierce looking being clothed entirely in black. Vasudev identified this being as Yamraj, the Hindu God of Death.

Having been brought before this fearsome deity, Vasudev was astonished to hear Yamraj curse and rage at the two attendants who had brought him there. “I had asked you to bring Vasudev the gardener,” Yamraj cried. “Our garden is drying up. You have brought Vasudev the student.”

With that, Vasudev remembered nothing more until he regained consciousness. Lying on his sickbed, he was surprised to find that among the crowd assembled at his bedside was another man named Vasudev, who happened to be a gardener by profession. Although this Vsudev appeared to be in excellent health, he died unexpectedly the following day.

Chhajju Bania had his near-death-experience in 1975, when he was about thirty-four years old. At that time he had been stricken with fever, and his condition had deteriorated steadily until all hope of his recovery seemed lost.

Like Vasudev, Chhajju suddenly found himself confronted by several messengers, who captured him and took him before Yamraj. On this occasion Yamraj was seated on a high chair, and wore yellow clothes. At his side sat a clerk with a pile of books in front of him.

Then pointing to Chhajju the clerk said, “We don’t need Chhajju Bania (Trader), we have asked for Chhajju Kunhar (Potter). Push him back and bring the other man.” Again, like Vasudev, this was the last thing Chhajju recalled before regaining consciousness.

Mangal Singh was about seventy-three years old when he had his near-death-experience in 1977. Unlike Vasudev or Chhajju, he had not been ill prior to this experience. In his case he happened to experience a sudden vision while he was lying on his bed.

In this vision Mangal was approached by two people who lifted him from his bed, and took him into the presence of a daunting looking man. This man looked closely at Mangal and then reprimanded the two messengers, saying, “Why have you brought the wrong person? Why have you not brought the man you had been sent for?”

With that the two messengers ran off leaving Mangal alone to face this imperious entity. Then looking sternly at Mangal he said, “You go back”. Mangal meanwhile had noticed that two large pots lay by the side of this man, both containing boiling water. This surprised him, because there was no sign of any fire, nor was there any other source of heat that would account for the boiling water.

It was then that he noticed that heat was coming from the hands of this strange being. “You had better hurry up and go back,” the man repeated and touched Mangal on the arm. When he subsequently regained consciousness, he felt a severe burning sensation on his left arm, which later developed the appearance of a boil. Although it healed within a few days, it left a scar which was still visible when he was interviewed by the two investigators six years later.

The fourth case described by Pasricha and Stevenson involved a man by the name of Durga Jatav, who was born in 1929. When Jatav was about twenty years of age he fell ill for several weeks, suffering from typhoid. When his body “became cold for several hours” his family thought that he had died.

Jatav did not die, but recovered to tell an extraordinary story. He said that he had been abducted by no less than ten people. When he tried to evade them they cut off both his legs at the knees. He was then taken before a gathering of some fifty people who were all unknown to him.

These strangers, who were seated on chairs at various tables, then consulted their papers and said to his captors, “Why have you brought him here? Take him back.” When Durga complained that he was unable to return because he had no feet, he was shown several pairs of legs. He happened to recognise one pair of legs as being his own, and these were somehow re-attached to his knee stumps. He was then sent back with instructions not to “stretch” his knees, so that they could mend properly.

When Jatav later recounted this story, his sister and another neighbour noticed that there were marks on his knees, although neither had been aware of any marks located there before. These marks seemed to be folds, or deep fissures in the skin that covered his knees.

When Jatav was interviewed some thirty years after this incident took place, the folds of skin were still visible. When the investigators conducted X-ray tests of his knees, there was no indication of any abnormality beneath the skin.

Taken on the face of it, these four accounts of near death-experiences in India serve only to confirm one’s worst fears about the nature of the after-life. If these people are to be believed, it would seem that the next world is ruled by a bureaucracy that is as prone to error as any in our waking world of experience.

Furthermore, when mistakes are made, just as happens in this life, no apologies are made or compensation given.

Pasricha and Stevenson noted that these four cases were typical of those NDE cases which they surveyed. They pointed out that Yamraj, the King of the Dead, was a well-known figure in Hindu mythology, and was considered to have various messengers called Yamdoots, and a keeper of records called Chitragupta.

Although the four people whose cases have been quoted here were all from northern India, and would therefore have been well aware of these guardians of the afterlife, the investigators were unable to say whether these NDE’s might be representative of all cases in India.

It is interesting to note however, that in a separate incident reported from southern India, the same basic features occurred, although the nature of the characters conformed to the beliefs of that region.

In this case a Brahmin boy went to sleep and dreamed that he was dying. He felt his Prana or vital energy draining away through his mouth and nostrils. When his body was dead, the boy’s soul was taken to Vaikunta, the traditional abode of the God Vishnu.

The boy was brought before Vishnu, who was surrounded by other Gods and their devotees. All were decorated with the traditional marks of Vishnu (vertical stripes) upon their foreheads. Then Vishnu spoke to the gathered assembly and said, “This man should be brought here at two o’clock tomorrow. Why has he been brought here now?” With that the boy awoke to find himself back in his bed.

The next morning he related his unusual dream to his family. Although he had hitherto been in robust health, the boy died suddenly on the following day at two o’clock in the afternoon.  18 

It is clear that the main ingredients of this case parallel those described by Pasricha and Stevenson, but the place of the northern Indian King of Death, Yamraj, was taken by the God Vishnu, who is widely revered in the South.

In their report on NDE’s, the two investigators commented on several other cases which had come to their attention, which also suggested a link between cultural beliefs and after death experiences.

One of their Indian subjects described having had an NDE while he was holidaying in Rome. In this instance, although the event took place in Western Europe, the actual content of the near-death-experience was typical of the Indian mistaken identity cases described previously.

They also came across a case where a Western subject, who had subsequently come to adopt Oriental beliefs, had experienced an NDE of the mistaken identity variety. In this particular case an American devotee of Sai Baba of South India, had an NDE when he became extremely ill while staying in a hotel in Madras.

According to his account, he found himself in a large hall in a “Court of Justice” where he was brought before the presiding judge. Sai Baba was present at this tribunal. As the case of the Westerner was discussed, records of the subject’s previous lives were called for, and “armloads of scrolls” were brought in and read before the judge.

Finally Sai Baba himself intervened, and pleaded with the judge to allow his disciple to continue living under his supervision. To this the judge agreed, and the American returned somewhat reluctantly to his physical body.

An interesting aspect of this incident was that, shortly before regaining consciousness, the subject recalled being able to look down on his physical body, which as we have seen, tends to be a common feature of Western near-death-experiences.

What is of considerable significance in the cases investigated by Pasricha and Stevenson, is that two subjects reported acquiring physical marks on their bodies which seemed to be directly related to circumstances which had occurred to them in their near death-experiences.

In the case of Mangal Singh, he was touched by a man with burning hands. When he awoke, he experienced a burning sensation on his left arm, which later left a permanent scar.

In the case of Durga Jatav, his recollection of having had his legs cut off and subsequently re-attached, was followed by the discovery of deep folds in the skin covering his knees, in the exact place where his severed limbs had been rejoined. These marks were still present many years later, and were personally witnessed by the two investigators.

Now the ability of the mind to produce physical effects in the human body which directly match those circumstances which exist in the subject’s mind, is a phenomenon that is well-known to the Western researcher. The most frequent evidence of this phenomenon is provided by that state of mind known as hypnosis.

Under hypnosis, if a person is given the suggestion that a burning object is being applied to the skin, a blister will form at the exact spot of the imagined burn. The object that was actually applied to the skin may simply have been a pencil, or some other innocuous object, but the hypnotised subject will react as if the object was a branding iron.

The resultant blister will be indistinguishable from any normal blister, and will produce just as much pain and inflammation as any real burn. In contrast to this, if a hypnotised subject is burnt by a cigarette, but is given the suggestion that the cigarette is merely a harmless object, there will be no blister and no accompanying pain or subsequent inflammation. The subject reacts just as if he or she had been touched by a pencil.

Although incidents such as these are commonplace under hypnosis, a person does not have to be hypnotised in order to influence the functioning of the physical body. The suggestion of burning can equally well be given in the waking state.

If a subject who is in a normal state of consciousness truly believes that he or she has been burnt, the attendant blister, pain and inflammation will automatically appear, even though no burn has actually taken place.

In a series of experiments reported in the medical journal Lancet, J. A. Hadfield reported how he had given a suggestion of burning to a patient who was in a normal state of consciousness. Immediately a corresponding blister appeared at the place where the burn had been suggested. Hadfield then bandaged the blister.

It so happened that due to the movement of the bandages, this blister became infected, leading to greater pain and aggravated inflammation. When Hadfield later suggested to this same person, again in a waking condition, that the blister had healed, the pain immediately vanished and the inflammation and hyperaemia quickly disappeared. Hadfield also found that he could resurrect both the pain and the inflammation simply by suggesting to the patient that it had recurred.  19 

All that is necessary for physical effects to be induced in the body, is for the subject to believe that what has been suggested has actually taken place. The physical effects then follow automatically.

Whereas in the conscious state this sense of conviction is sometimes difficult to generate, in a state of hypnosis the suggestion given is almost always assimilated immediately and acted upon. Hypnotherapy has therefore proved to be an effective method of inducing desired physical changes.

It has for example been used increasingly in women to achieve successful breast augmentation. In an experiment reported by Staib and Logan, selected women were not only able to increase the size of their breasts by means of hypnotic suggestion, but were able to retain these gains after many months.  20

The key factor in the ability of the mind to influence the physical body is belief. The person must however be totally convinced of the substance of a particular belief in order for it to be effective. When this is the case the necessary physical changes follow, whether or not there is any pathology or physical cause to warrant these changes.

When a person truly believes that a certain set of circumstances exists, then the physical body of that person acts as if these circumstances actually do exist. Physical changes or symptoms then appear which can be validated by medical doctors.

Undoubtedly the most extreme application of the power of suggestion over the functioning of the human body is the power of belief to induce death itself. Numerous cases exist on record where individuals have been subject to powerful suggestions, often in the form of voodoo curses, and have simply “willed” themselves to death.

In shamanistic societies these death-induced suggestions have been a time-worn method of combating crime. The subject succumbs even though no physical cause may be found to account for death. The only valid form of treatment for people who have allowed themselves to become victims of this extreme form of suggestion, lies in the form of a counter-suggestion.

For this to be effective, the counter belief has to be powerful enough to overcome the original belief. But because this original belief is usually the product of long years of conditioning, it seldom happens that a counter-belief is able to be induced successfully within the short space of time available to the ailing patient.

One case where this abrupt conversion was achieved successfully involved Doctor You Chan Yang, a physician in Honolulu prior to the outbreak of World War II, and who subsequently became South Korea’s first Ambassador to the United States.

In this case Dr. Yang was called out of bed at two o’clock one morning by a hysterical woman, who claimed that her husband was dying. As Yang did not know the woman or her husband, he recommended that she call their regular physician.

The woman explained that their regular doctor had given up on the case as her husband was the victim of a voodoo curse. She had called upon him as her last hope, as she had heard that Yang had successfully saved another voodoo victim in the past.

Yang finally agreed to examine the woman’s husband, and as she had indicated he found that the terrified man was close to death, even though he was unable to find any contributing physical cause.

Recognising the true nature of the problem, Yang gravely announced to the husband, “There is only one chance in a million that you can be saved but I will do my best. Take these two pills and in a little while you will pass water. If it is the usual colour you will die. But if it is blue, you will be well. ­The voodoo spell will be broken.”  21

The man recovered within a few hours. The pills which Doctor Yang had given him were diuretics containing a harmless blue dye. In healing the man, Yang not only proved himself to be a fine physician, but he also exhibited a deep understanding of the profound impact which the mind can exert over the functioning of the human body.

The efficacy of his treatment hinged on the dramatic change in colour of the patient’s urine. The fact that it changed to blue, in complete contrast to all previous experience, was the clinching evidence which led the man to overcome the deep conditioning of his prior belief, and to replace it with a belief in the superior “magic” of the Western doctor.

Had he not achieved this mental transformation, the patient would almost certainly have died.

References:

17  Satwant Pasricha and Ian Stevenson, “Near-Death Experiences in India – A Preliminary Report“, The Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, Vol. 174, No.3, 1986, pp. 165-170.

18  “Talks with Sri Ramana Maharshi”,  recorded by Swami Saraswathi, Sri Ramanasramam, Tiruvannamalai, 1968, p. 435.

19  J. A. Hadfield, “The Influence of Suggestion on Body Temperature”, Lancet, 68-69, 1920.

20  A. R. Staib and D. R. Logan, “Hypnotic Stimulation of Breast Growth”, American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, Vol.19, 1977, pp. 195-208.

21  Raymond Otto, “Voodoo vanquished”, Fate magazine, January, 1977, p. 66.

Allan, Beyond the Grave, September 25, 2019, 9:25 am

Beyond the Grave – Part Two

Our experiences in the afterlife continue to be influenced by our thoughts. Whatever beliefs we hold in our waking life about the nature of life after death, will come to manifest themselves, just as certainly as our beliefs dictate our experiences while we are alive.

The more strongly we believe in them, the more dramatically they are likely to manifest. Just as our mental images create our lives on earth, so they determine the nature of our experiences after death. As these mental images vary, so the after-life conditions come to vary as well.

Just as individuals experience vastly different scenarios in life, so they come to experience vastly different conditions after death. These conditions are created by belief.

MAHARAJ:  “Mind is the very foundation of your bondage and liberation. The Muslims have the concept that after death the soul is confined to the tomb until the dissolution of the world; therefore they provide for that soul. In the Christian religion also they say that man, once buried in the grave, will be awakened only on doomsday and judgement will be given.

QUESTION:  Does that really happen to those people?

MAHARAJ:  If they die with that concept it must happen, because the mind creates everything.”  9

Again, the images which appear in the after-life state appear devastatingly real to each newly transformed soul. Yet these images are nothing more than the projections of their minds, as we see from this colourful passage from the Advaita Bodha Deepika: 

“The jiva (soul) overpowered by the unreal coma before death has different illusions according to his past actions. After death, he believes ‘Here is heaven; it is very lovely; I am in it; I am now a wonderful celestial being; so many charming celestial damsels are at my service; I have nectar for drink’, or, ‘Here is the region of Death; here is the God of Death; these are the messengers of death; Oh! they are so cruel – they pitch me into hell!’ or, ‘Here is the region of the pitris; or of Brahma, or of Vishnu, or of Siva’ and so on.

“Thus according to their nature, the latencies of past karma present themselves before the Self, who remains always the unchanging Ether of Consciousness, as illusions of birth, death, passage to heaven, hell or other regions. They are only delusions of the mind and not real.”  10

The regions of Heaven and Hell will seem absolutely real to those who experience them, just as the world appears so convincingly real now in the waking state of consciousness. These regions will however be projections of those thoughts which characterised their minds. As Ramana Maharshi points out:

“You carry heaven and hell with you. Your lust, anger, etc. produce these regions. They are like dreams.”  11

Certain cultures, such as those of ancient Egypt and Tibet, have traditionally placed particular emphasis upon the need for souls to understand the nature of their after-death experiences. In these cultures, the art of living well was not just a matter of conducting their affairs wisely in this world, but of recognising the stages and nature of their experiences in the next.

Individuals were not only encouraged to live well, but also to die well, in the full light of understanding. In the Tibetan culture, death was regarded as the onset of a journey into the vivid world of Bardo, the intermediate world where spirits wander after death, while waiting to be born again.

Instructions for the conduct of affairs in this after-world came to be set down in a lengthy book, which the Tibetans called the Bardo Thodol, or Book of the Dead. The first part of this book deals with the experiences which occur at the moment of death, and describes the various visionary entities that may be encountered by the wandering soul.

The latter portion of this book is concerned with the process of rebirth, and prescribes how a soul may avoid an unfortunate reincarnation. In translating this esoteric work, the English scholar W. Y. Evans-Wentz stressed that whatever took place in the world of Bardo, was nothing more than the illusory projection of the witnessing mind. As he wrote in his introduction to this work:

“Definite psychological significance attaches to each of the deities appearing in the Bardo Thodol; but, in order to grasp it, the student must bear in mind that the apparitional visions seen by the deceased in the Intermediate State are not visions of reality, but nothing more than the hallucinatory embodiments of the thought-forms born of the mental content of the percipient.

“Accordingly the Peaceful Deities are the personified forms of the sublimest human sentiments, which proceed from the psychic heart-centre. The Wrathful Deities are the personifications of the reasonings and proceed from the psychic brain centre. As the Bardo Thodol text makes very clear by repeated assertions, none of all these deities or spiritual beings has any real individual existence any more than have human beings.”  12

To the soul who before death was utterly convinced of the reality and identity of his or her existence, the entities encountered in the world of Bardo will seem absolutely real.

Similarly, those who in their earthly lives had believed implicitly in the existence of Heaven and Hell, find these regions to be just as magnificent or terrifying as they had imagined them. Despite their illusionary nature, there will appear to be nothing wraith-like about them.

The soul will insist that these regions are the true reality, beyond all other experiences. The specific character of these divine or infernal regions will, however, depend on the particular beliefs which motivated that individual soul during its earthly life. As Evans-Wentz explains:

“Accordingly, for a Buddhist of some other School, as for a Hindu, or a Moslem, or a Christian, the Bardo experiences would be appropriately different; the Buddhists’ or the Hindu’s thought-forms, as in a dream state, would give rise to corresponding visions of the deities of the Buddhist or Hindu pantheon; a Moslem’s, to visions of the Moslem Paradise, a Christian’s, to visions of the Christian Heaven, or an American Indian’s to visions of the Happy Hunting Ground.”  13

The question arises as to what the after-death state of an atheist would be, who had held no earthly views at all about an after-life, and who had believed that life simply ended at the moment of death.

When Alexandra David-Neel, a French scholar who lived and travelled widely in Tibet at the beginning of the 20th century, asked this question of a Tibetan Lama, he replied:

“Perhaps such a man would see apparitions corresponding to the religious beliefs he held in his childhood, or to those familiar to him held by the people among whom he has lived. According to the degree of his intelligence and post mortem lucidity, he would perhaps, examine and analyse these visions and remember the reasons which, during his life-time made him deny the reality of that which now appears to him.

“He might thus conclude that he is beholding a mirage. A less intelligent man in whom belief in total annihilation was the result of indifference or dullness, rather than of reasoning, will perhaps see no vision at all. However, this will not prevent the energy generated by his past actions from following its course and manifesting itself through new phenomena. In other words, it will not prevent the rebirth of the materialist.”  14

In spite of the emphasis which the Bardo Thodol places on the after-death state and the need to ensure an auspicious rebirth, Tibetan Lamas remain perfectly aware that the very idea of an individual soul is itself illusory. For as their orthodox creed proclaims, “All aggregates are impermanent; no ‘ego’ exists in the person, nor in anything.”  15

While the nature of the after-death state remains a mystery to most people, there are cases on record of individuals who have apparently approached the portals of death and, after a brief glimpse beyond, have returned to the world of waking consciousness. The anecdotal accounts of their experiences are referred to as “near-death-experiences”, or NDE’s.

It is difficult to draw precise conclusions of the after-death state from NDE’s, partly because the subjects involved find it so difficult to put their experiences into words, but also because there is no guarantee that what occurs in a near death-experience is representative of what actually happens after death.

A sufficient body of experience exists on record however, to suggest that a common thread of circumstance does run through these experiences, and that they do in fact vary according to the culture, and therefore belief of the individuals concerned.

Among the cases of NDE’s that have occurred to western subjects, certain specific features have tended to recur. These features can be grouped into five broad stages which commonly form part of an NDE. These five categories tend to be repeated among people raised in a western culture, and to recur, regardless of the subject’s age or sex.

The first stage of a near-death-experience is reported to be a feeling of extraordinary peace, warmth and comfort. Although the incident responsible for the NDE may have been traumatic, there is seldom reference to any lasting sense of pain. Almost invariably, a momentary flash of pain gives way to a profound sense of peace.

As the experience continues, subjects find themselves separated from their physical body. They find that they are able to look down upon it, and to observe others working on their inert physical form. Often they seem to float in space, and like Jung, find themselves looking down upon the earth from a great height.

In the third stage, subjects frequently report what they call a “tunnel” experience. In this stage they find themselves moving down a dark, horizontal, cylindrical tunnel, often at great speed. In some cases this tunnel experience is accompanied by a rapid review of some or all of the events of the subject’s life.

In the fourth stage of a near-death-experience, western subjects report that they emerge from this tunnel and encounter a brilliant, although not dazzling, white or golden light. This light is not a mere source of illumination, like a lamp, but seems instead to possess an impersonal, though deep and compassionate sense of being. It seems to be alive.

In the fifth and final stage, the subject recalls experiencing a landscape of exquisite beauty, which represents a form of supernatural paradise. The subject witnesses scenes of surpassing beauty, with trees, flowers, mountains and seas lit with a kaleidoscope of living colour which defies description. In cases where this fifth stage is reported, the experience inevitably ends with the subject being drawn back to the physical body.  16

Continued in Part Three

References:

9  “Seeds of Consciousness”, The Wisdom of Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, edited by Jean Dunn, Grove Press, New York, 1982, p. 81.

10  “Advaita Bodha Deepika”, translated by Swami Saraswati, Sri Ramanasramam, Tiruvannamalai, 1967, pp. 18-19.

11  “Talks with Sri Ramana Maharshi”, recorded by Swami Saraswathi, Sri Ramanasramam, Tiruvannamalai, 1968, p. 46.

12  W. Y. Evans-Wentz, “The Tibetan Book of the Dead”, Oxford University Press, London, 1927, pp. 31-32.

13  Ibid, pp. 33-34.

14  Alexandra David-Neel, “Magic and Mystery in Tibet”, Penguin, New York, 1971, pp. 39-40.

15  Ibid, p. 23.

16  Brian Bates and Adrian Stanley, “The Epidemiology and Differential Diagnosis of Near-Death Experience”, American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, Vol.55(4), 1985, pp. 542-549.

Allan, Beyond the Grave, September 24, 2019, 1:41 pm

Beyond the Grave – Part One

Our life in the world is an adventure of the mind. Within the limitless realms of our creative capabilities, we project a universe of space and form, which then becomes the playground of our desires. Based on these desires we initiate actions. These actions bear results.

These results, which are the harvest of our actions, are the due rewards of those seeds of desire that we have sown. This principle of cause and effect is the traditional wheel of karma, which brings to each individual the exact return in experience that matches the initiating action.

All experience is revealed within the light of consciousness. Within this realm of consciousness we are free to roam in worlds of our imagination. These worlds may be entirely unstructured and without any form of limitation, as we experience in our worlds of dream, vision and hallucination, or they may appear to be tightly structured and constrained, as we experience in our world of waking consciousness.

Within these different realms of consciousness which we inhabit, we express ourselves in forms which are appropriate to each level of expression. Within the subtle worlds of dream and vision we manifest in forms which are free from oppressive limitations.

In the heavily structured context of our waking world, the body we possess is dense, defined and limited. During our waking mode of consciousness we are bound by the fixed responses of our senses, which operate in rigorously defined ways.

Within the subtle worlds of free expression, our senses are liberated from these worldly bounds. So in open worlds, such as those of psychedelic states, it is possible to “see” sounds and “hear” colours. Our senses operate within an open spectrum of experience.

Here, the bondage of our dense, physical world no longer applies. The forces of gravity, matter, energy and time have no power over us in these ethereal worlds. We are free to fly, to pass through walls, to float in space and to travel at unlimited speeds.

Our experiences in consciousness vacillate between these dense and subtle states of mind. Due to our conditioning, we come to consider ourselves as rooted permanently within this dense world we call “reality”, and to regard all other states of mind as ephemeral and less real.

But as we have already seen, this sense of reality which pervades the waking world is not limited to the world of dense expression. The moment we transcend the physical world and manifest in other states of mind, our sense of reality travels with us.

So our dreams seem real while we are immersed in them, our visions seem real for as long as they are in progress, and hallucinations, derived from whatever stimuli, seem all too real to those who experience them.

The addicted alcoholic, afflicted by the condition known as delirium tremens, or “D.T.’s”, encounters weird and horrifying creatures that are painfully and terrifyingly real. No matter how much we may dismiss the content of these alternate states as illusory, they remain vividly real to all those who experience them.

Although our world of waking consciousness, as well as the worlds of other states of mind, appear to be illuminated by a similar sense of “realness”, this reality is not the attribute of any particular state. The sense of reality with which every state of consciousness seems imbued, is not an intrinsic feature of that level of experience.

The significant essence that we call “reality” is, instead, a characteristic of ourselves. It is dependent upon the Reality that is resplendent within each one of us. It is the presence of this inherent “I” sense, which endows each moment with its intrinsic feeling of reality.

This direct experience of the “I am”, which penetrates every level of consciousness, is rooted in the Reality of  Supreme Awareness, which is itself beyond description. This living source of perfection resides at the heart of whatever form we inhabit, as the sensation of “I am”.

Whatever level of consciousness we experience, this “I am” resonates within us as the experiencing being, and endows each experience with that special character of vividness and meaning that we call “reality”. The “I am” exists independently of any state, but it lends its nature to every state that is experienced.

The “I am” is single, unique, indivisible. Within our world of experience however, it appears to be divided into a myriad different personalities, just as the unitary moon comes to be reflected separately by every ripple of the restless sea.

Every state of mind consists of a flow of images in consciousness. It is the presence of the experiencer of these images, in the shape of the “I am”, which gives the sense of reality to these images. The images themselves are projections of the mind. Each mind projects a display of images that is characteristic of that mind.

The contents of dreams, visions and hallucinations are unique to the mind that creates them. In the case of the waking world, this flow of images is not only projected in the form of an outer world, but is linked with that of others by the process of consensus. The flow of images created by each separate mind thus comes to parallel that of others.

By this process of agreement through consensus, each individual comes to share a common world of experience. It is a world structured and shaped by the consensual ideas of the group. In the course of experience, each individual mind learns to compose a common description of the world in accordance with the views of others.

Once this description has become fixed by long association, the individual appears to be part of a synchronous world which appears to unfold equally to all participating minds. This specific mental configuration of conformity is what we call “our waking world of reality”.

The world becomes real in the manner that those who have formed it have come to share. The character of that world is moulded by the shape of the underlying beliefs which gave it birth.

Within the realm of consciousness, each experiencing “I am” moves between different levels of projection. It moves freely and easily from the waking state into that state that is called dream, and reverts equally easily again to that category of imagery called the waking world.

In certain situations, prompted by such stimuli as stress, trauma or psychedelic agents, the “I am” moves into other realms of expression, called alternate states. For as long as the “I am” reverts to that condition which characterises its waking world, it is said to be “alive”.

When it ceases its affiliation with this level, it is considered to be “dead”. From the standpoint of the waking world, “death” represents an awesome gulf. It is a departure from one field of expression into another.

The stage of separation, which the waking world calls death, appears to draw a curtain of finality upon the” I am” that manifested within that physical context. But the” I am” never dies. It merely illuminates another level of expression in consciousness.

When death supervenes upon the level of expression that we call our waking world, the “I am” separates itself from its physical form, and moves on to another state of consciousness. The physical body, with which the “I am” had previously been identified, then dies. As far as this physical body is concerned, it then ceases to exhibit its coordinated character, and returns to its fundamental source of energy.

As Maharaj explains: “It is the change in the living process of a particular body. Integration ends and disintegration sets in.”  1

Just as in life, when the “I am” moves from that dense level of consciousness that reflects the waking world to the more subtle level that is called a dream, so in death the “I am” moves to a new level of consciousness.

As Maharaj confirms, “Consciousness can only become subtle and refined, and that is what happens after death.”  2

This process of change from one realm of consciousness to another, which takes place so easily and harmoniously between the waking world and the dream, or hallucination, normally takes place equally easily and harmoniously between the “living” state and the next, at the moment of death.

But because the “I am” has in certain cases become so firmly entrenched in its identification with a physical body, this separation can sometimes be difficult and prolonged. The link with the physical body may be so strong, and the fear of the unknown so great, that the “I am” may not easily relinquish its grip on the physical body, which had for so long seemed synonymous with its identity.

This can lead to a protracted struggle at the time of death. Ramana Maharshi describes what may then ensue.

“When a person gasps for breath it indicates that this person is unconscious of this body; another body has been held and the person swings to and fro. While gasping there is a more violent gasp at intervals and that indicates the oscillation between the two bodies due to present attachment not having been completely snapped.”  3

The person who entertains no fear at the thought of dying moves easily from the physical to the more subtle form. Along with this new form, there emerges a new set of images, and the soul then undergoes a new set of experiences.

But just as the nature of experience on the plane of consciousness called the waking world is determined by the actions of the individual concerned, so in the after-death state, the individual continues to be influenced by these actions. As we find recorded in the Brhadaranyaka Upanishad:

“A man acts according to his desires to which he clings. After death he goes to the next world bearing in his mind the subtle impressions of his deeds; and after reaping there the harvest of his deeds, he returns again to the world of action. Thus he who has desire continues subject to rebirth.”

It is this continuing thread of desire that chains the individual to the wheel of life and which draws the individual unerringly back to another form in which to pursue the fruits of desire.

It is only when these bonds of desire are finally broken, that the “I am” merges with its source of Supreme Reality and the cycle of rebirth is at an end. The individual soul then rediscovers its untarnished nature, and revels in eternal bliss.

For as long as the “I am” continues to identify itself with a particular form, and continues to act in accordance with its desires, it remains bound by the strict equation of karma, and is bound by the cycle of rebirth.

The individual soul then becomes associated with a new physical form, which allows it new opportunities for the fulfillment of its desires. It reincarnates in a specific form, and under specific circumstances, which match its former actions and desires.

The cycle of life continues. But this idea of reincarnation of the soul, from one physical body to another, is the product of a commitment to a particular vehicle of expression. As long as the” I am” seeks to express itself through the fulfilment of desire, it continues to be linked with one body after another in an endless cycle of rebirths.

In truth, however, the “I am” remains ever desireless and free, for it is the reflection of the eternal sun of Awareness. The individuality with which it appears to be associated is, in fact, illusory. For this reason the highest teaching of the Sages is that the very idea of reincarnation is itself illusory.

Since there are in reality no individual selves, and never were, there can be no such thing as one self being continually reborn. In responding to questions, the Sages invariably tailor their answers to the level of understanding of the questioner concerned, as we see from the following example.

QUESTION:  “Maharaj says that there is no rebirth of the individual – the consciousness is just expressing itself. Then he tells another that his attitude will bring many rebirths.

MAHARAJ:  To the ignorant who are obsessed by the ideas of rebirth, etc., I say, ‘You are going to have rebirths’, but to one who is capable of understanding I will give knowledge only.”  4 

Those who remain convinced that they exist now as individual souls, will continue to find themselves manifesting in one form after another, in accordance with the dictates of their desires. This round of manifestation will continue as long as the desires themselves continue.

But for those mature souls who can grasp the subtle truth that what passes for individuality is nothing more than a string of images held together in memory, the Sages do not talk of dying and rebirth. For, as Ramana Maharshi reveals:

“Reincarnation can only be as long as there is ignorance. There is no reincarnation either now, nor was there before, nor will be hereafter. This is the truth.”  5

The Bhagavad Gita echoes this same duality of explanation according to the level of understanding of the seeker. In verse five of the Fourth Chapter, Krishna tells Arjuna: “Many births of me are passed, and of thee, 0 Arjuna. I know them all; thou knowest them not, Paramptapa.”   6

But in verse twenty-eight of the Second Chapter, Krishna reveals:

“In the beginning, Bharata, are beings unmanifest; their middle state is manifest; their final state, unmanifest; what place therein for lamentation?”  7

For the individual soul who is convinced of the idea of independent existence, the experiences which occur to it are derived from its underlying desires and actions. Its experience is determined by belief. The events which occur to each individual are set in train by those thoughts which motivate its actions.

Just as the experiences of the waking world are dependent upon the individual thoughts and beliefs that are held within the waking state, so experiences in the state of the afterlife are similarly affected. Our experiences after death continue to be influenced by our thoughts, and our beliefs continue to dominate our experiences upon the subtle planes of consciousness as well.

As Maharaj explained to the following questioner:

QUESTION:  “When an ordinary man dies, what happens to him?

MAHARAJ:  According to his belief it happens. As life before that is but imagination, so is life after. The dream continues.”  8

Continued in Part Two

References:

1  “I Am That”, Conversations with Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, translated by Maurice Frydman, Book I, Chetana, Bombay, 1973, p. 13.

2  Ibid, Book II, p. 3.

3  “Talks with Sri Ramana Maharshi”, recorded by Swami Saraswathi, Sri Ramanasramam, Tiruvannamalai, 1968, p. 201.

4  “Seeds of Consciousness”, The Wisdom of Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, edited by Jean Dunn, Grove Press, New York, 1982, p. 205.

5  “Talks with Sri Ramana Maharshi”, op. cit., p. 330.

6  “The Bhagavad Gita”, translated by W.D.P. Hill, Oxford University Press, London, 1928, p. 103.

7  Ibid, p. 87.

8  “I Am That”, Book II, op.cit., p. 1.

Allan, Beyond the Grave, September 22, 2019, 8:54 pm

Selection # 14 – The Chosen Ones – Part Three

This selected entry was originally published here on July 15, 2010.

Scott:  My name is Scott Paton.  I am talking today with Allan Colston.  He is the author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”. This is a book dealing with prophecy. 

For those listeners who may be new to this topic, today’s podcast is the fifteenth in the series,  and is titled  ” What Should We Do ?”.  Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.

Thanks Scott. It’s good to talk to you again.

Scott:  So Allan, what do you plan to talk about today?

Well Scott, I’d like to wrap up the topic of “The Chosen Ones” by posing the question “What should we do?”  And for those folks who may have missed my last Podcast, perhaps I should start off by giving a brief summary of what exactly I am talking about.

As I have mentioned in my book, as well as on my Blog, the ancient prophets predict that our present world age will end in a series of cataclysms brought on by a close encounter with a comet, at which time the earth will also be struck by an asteroid.

Because of the catastrophes that will afflict the earth at that time, and the devastation caused by the global earthquakes and Tsunamis that will follow, the ancient prophets referred to this event as “The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord.”

According to these prophets, this Terrible Day of the Lord will be followed by a seven year period of terror and destruction that will end in the return to earth of the long-awaited Saviour, who will lead the world into a new Golden Age of peace, that is predicted to last for a thousand years.

Although billions of people will die on that Terrible Day of the Lord, the prophets predict that one group of people will be spared. They will be miraculously taken out of their bodies, and will not have to endure the disasters that are coming. These people are what the Bible calls the “Chosen Ones.”

In earlier Podcasts, I explained who these Chosen Ones were, and why they would be chosen.  And this brings me to the subject of today’s discussion. If these disasters really are about to happen on the earth, then what SHOULD we do about it?

Notice here that I am not posing the question that most people would no doubt like an answer to, which is the question “What CAN we do about it.” And that is because it is more important right now to learn what we SHOULD do about it.

Scott:  Why is that Allan?

The reason is that these two questions deal with diametrically opposite aspects of our lives.

If we ask the question “What CAN we do about it?”, the answer obviously is “Plenty”. For there are literally hundreds of things we could decide to do if a comet was heading our way. And this is something I will definitely deal with closer to the time.

But whatever we did decide to do, these decisions would undoubtedly deal with our outward lives, and would involve things like our physical bodies, our possessions, our jobs, homes, families and the like.

Whereas the question “What SHOULD we do about it” deals with the spiritual aspect of our lives.

For Jesus made it plain that when the events of the Last Days began, it would be our spiritual condition that would matter most, rather than how much money we had, or how many possessions we had acquired, and so on.

In his famous Sermon on the Mount, Jesus is recorded as saying:

Lay not up for yourselves treasures upon earth, where moth and rust doth corrupt, and where thieves break through and steal; but lay up for yourselves treasures in Heaven, where neither moth nor rust doth corrupt, and where thieves do not break through nor steal.”

So based on these words of Jesus, when the events of the Last Days arrive, what we SHOULD be doing is focusing on our Souls, rather than on our physical bodies. And just to emphasize this fact, Jesus goes on to say in that same Sermon on the Mount:

Therefore I say unto you, take no thought for your life, what ye shall eat, or what ye shall drink; nor yet for your body, what ye shall put on. Is not the life more than meat, and the body than raiment?”

“But seek ye first the Kingdom of God and of His righteousness, and all these things shall be added unto you. Take therefore no thought for the morrow, for the morrow shall take thought for the things of itself. Sufficient unto the day is the evil thereof.”

Scott:  So Allan, are you saying that there is no point in doing anything practical beforehand, because we are all going to die?

Definitely not Scott. Although I have no doubt that everyone would take action if they knew for certain that a comet was bearing down on the earth, there really would be little point in doing ANYTHING beforehand, if we are all doomed to die anyway.

But that is what this series of Podcasts is all about. We are not ALL doomed. For as I indicated in Part One of The Chosen Ones, some people WILL be spared. They are the people the Bible calls “The Chosen Ones”.

And the reason they will be spared is because of their Spiritual qualities, rather than in how much money they have, or how many possessions, and so on. You will recall that in Part One of this series, Scott, I listed what sort of qualities these people would have.

And here I should clarify what I said earlier about spiritual qualities. I didn’t mean that we’re all going to be judged by a shopping list of items. Instead, the determining factor in deciding who will be saved will be the motivations that people have in their hearts.

So the qualities that will decide who will be saved, and who will not, will be the FRUITS of the spiritual path, rather than the path itself.

Scott:  I’m not sure I understand what you mean.

What I mean Scott, is that the qualities that we think of as being spiritual, are the FRUITS of spiritual progress, and they occur naturally, just like the fruit that grows on a tree. In fact, Jesus used this analogy himself when he talked about the Last Days in his Sermon on the Mount.

As St Matthew writes in chapter 7 of his gospel:

You shall know them by their fruits. Every good tree brings forth good fruit; but a corrupt tree brings forth evil fruit. Every tree that brings evil fruit is cut down, and cast into the fire. Therefore by their fruits shall ye know them.”

So to recap, when the Great and Terrible Day of the Lord arrives, we don’t know who exactly will be saved and who will be doomed. What the Bible tells us is simply that those who will be spared will be the “Chosen Ones”.

Jesus said that at the time of the end, people would be divided into two groups. One group would consist of those who listened to his warning and acted accordingly, while the other group would consist of those who ignored these warnings.

Those who ignored his warnings would simply carry on living as they had before. And, as Jesus pointed out, they would make up the vast majority of people alive at that time. Those who acted on his warnings would be the wise ones.

In fact, Jesus ended his Sermon on the Mount with the following words:

Therefore, whosoever heareth these sayings of mine, and doeth them, I will liken him to a wise man, who built his house upon a rock; And the rain descended, and the floods came, and the wind blew, and beat upon that house; and it fell not; for it was founded upon a rock.”

Scott:  So did Jesus give any explicit advice about what people should do at this time?

Yes Scott, he did. He urged his followers to be watchful, and to be prepared. He also told them to pray that they would be spared from the plagues of the Great Tribulation. In the 21st chapter of the gospel of St Luke, Jesus tells the people:

And take heed to yourselves, lest at any time your hearts be overcharged with surfeiting, and drunkenness, and cares of this life, and so that day come on you unawares.”

“For as a snare shall it come on all them that dwell on the face of the whole earth. Watch ye therefore, and pray always, that ye may be accounted worthy to escape all these things that shall come to pass, and to stand before the son of Man.”

So Scott, his message to us today is to watch – and pray. And I would urge all listeners to take these words of Jesus to their hearts. For there is no limit to the power of prayer in transforming a contrite heart.

So no matter what we may have thought or done in the past, if we are truly sorry for our misdeeds, and are committed to changing our ways, then our prayers will be heard, and we will be saved, even at this late stage.

However, I should also emphasize that not all those who will be saved will be among the Chosen Ones.

Scott:  Once again, Allan, I’m not sure I understand what you mean.

According to the Bible, about one third of all the people who are alive on earth at the time of the Great and Terrible Day of the Lord, will die in the disasters that will happen on that day.

And as I have indicated previously, this will be followed by a period of seven years in which the forces of darkness will dominate the earth, leading up to the final battle between Goodness and Evil that will culminate in the return to earth of the Great Redeemer, who will usher in the thousand years of peace.

And according to the Book of Revelation, about one quarter of those who are left upon the earth will be killed by means of what have come to be known as “The Four Horsemen of the Apocalypse”. In verse 8 of the 7th chapter, St John writes:

And I looked and behold a pale horse: and his name that sat on him was Death, and Hell followed with him. And power was given unto them over the fourth part of the earth, to kill with sword, and with hunger, and with death, and with the beasts of the earth.”

So Scott, there will still be many people who still be alive on the earth to confront these terrors. But even they are not all doomed, for there will be some who will be purified as a result of their experiences, and they will join the Chosen Ones when the Great Redeemer returns to the earth.

For as we read in the 13th chapter of the Old Testament prophet Zechariah:

And it shall come to pass, that in all the land, saith the Lord, two parts therein shall be cut off and die; but the third shall be left therein. And I will bring the third part through the fire, and will refine them as silver is refined, and will try them as gold is tried; they shall call on my name, and I will hear them: I will say, it is my people: and they shall say, the Lord is my God“.

And according to the 12th chapter of the book of the prophet Daniel:

Many shall be purified, and made white, and tried: but the wicked shall do wickedly: and none of the wicked shall understand; but the wise shall understand.”

So I want to emphasize again Scott, that even though they may not be among the Chosen Ones who will be spared these disasters, there will still be many who will triumph in the end, having been purified by their experiences during the seven year period of terror.

Scott:  So does this mean that there will be two groups of people who will be saved. The Chosen Ones at the beginning of the seven year period, and others at the end when the Saviour comes?”

Exactly Scott. I couldn’t have put it better myself. But obviously those who are saved at the beginning will be spared the horrors that lie ahead. And that is the reason Jesus warned his followers to be prepared.

And, as the Oracle of Tolemac says in my book:

Let those who would be saved continue to watch and pray. For no matter how advanced a person may seem to be upon the Path of Returning to Everlasting Light, they do not know if they will be able to withstand the fire of the Great Initiation. Pray that you will be given guidance in the days that are to come.”

And that pretty much sums up the situation Scott. None of us can be sure we will be included among the Chosen Ones. All we can do is to pray that we will be spared, and do the best we can in the meantime to live according to our faith, and our inner guide.

Meanwhile, the other thing we all need to do is to watch out for the signs. And these signs refer to the events that are unfolding in the world today. And that is what I plan to talk about in my next Podcast, which will be another in the series “Signs of the Times”.

And just a reminder for those people who would like to read my book, it can be reached here

Scott:  Thanks Allan.  You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”.   Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.

Allan, Selections, September 19, 2019, 11:52 am

Selection # 13 – Prophetic Dreams and Visions

This selected entry was originally published here on March 9, 2008.

The prophets of old, particularly those in Biblical times, suggested that in times of crisis, premonitions of future events would come to ordinary people in the form of visions and prophetic dreams. This would especially be the case during the “last days” leading up to the return of the Messiah. This was what the Jewish prophet Joel wrote:

And it shall come to pass afterward, that I will pour out my spirit upon all flesh; and your sons and your daughters shall prophesy, your old men shall dream dreams, your young men shall see visions.” (Joel 2:28)

There can be little doubt that the world today is undergoing a global crisis in which the very future of the earth is threatened. This is no longer a matter of debate. This feeling of impending gloom has penetrated deeply into the psyche of mankind. It has become the “zeitgeist” (spirit of the age) that now impacts the whole of humanity.

So it should come as no surprise to find that there are people today who are experiencing dreams and visions that seem to bear out the words of the Biblical prophet. When the popular North American radio talk show “Coast to Coast AM” recently invited listeners to submit examples of their dreams and visions for 2008 and beyond, these were some of the replies that were received.

Global Firestorm

I have had two very realistic dreams of the end of the world. … In both dreams, I was with my loved ones and we were witnessing a global firestorm that was about to engulf us. … In the first dream, we stood atop a flat-roofed building watching the firestorm approach and I clearly remember feeling at peace and completely comfortable with the circumstances, as if I already knew there was more for me to see as the firestorm approached. I remember standing up and taking a deep breath and feeling a warm calm surround me.

The second dream was a bit more complicated, I remember being at my family home, pressed up against the foundation of the house waiting to see if we were going to survive the firestorm, and in the end I don’t know if we did or not – but the feeling of calm and comfort was not there.
Leigh in Ontario, Canada

Massive Earthquakes in 2010

Circa: 2010. An abrupt ending to Mid-Eastern wars and current global conflicts occurs – due to massive earthquakes as the continental plates shift from their present location. Many nations and islands will be obliterated. Food shortages and lack of fresh water supply will escalate, affecting all people on Earth. (I see the obliquity of Earth’s axis changing due to the melting of polar ice, shifting trillions upon trillions of tons of Earth’s mass towards the equator, which causes the continental plates to shift).
George D. in Vancouver, BC

Apocalypse via Planetoid

Back in 1995 I had this dream. It seemed so real and powerful. I was on vacation at the Sand Banks in Picton, Ontario, Canada. I was sleeping in this old stone house which was part of the hotel. Anyway, the dream was of this big huge planet-like sphere in the night sky and it was pulsing and very bright. We knew it was the end of our world as we know it. It was kind of scary, yet most amazing and we were in awe, and this entity was so huge and powerful that you just accepted it. The whole event was so real. It’s like the whole world came together to look up at this thing and we all realized that there was no stopping this.
Lawrie

Mt. Ranier Blows its Top

I am an intuitive/sensitive…shamanic counselor/teacher with a professional spirit medicine practice, and I live rurally in southwestern Oregon. Two years ago I had what was undoubtedly a prophetic dream that I feel needs sharing…The dream was of Mt. Rainier exploding! literally, exploding!…The top blew off and there was great devastation for many, many miles. It was so explosive that I awakened instantly and KNEW that is was a prophetic dream! I was not aware of when this would happen, but it felt like it was in the not-distant future, anytime really.

Last year, after this dream, I had the occasion to drive north from my home in Southern Oregon to visit friends at the tip of the Olympic Peninsula in Washington. During the drive from Portland north, along the western flank of Mt. Rainier, I could literally FEEL, as an intuitive/sensitive, the instability of the earth over which I was traveling. It was very powerful and a feeling I could not shake. To this day, when I recall this dream, I instantly get chicken skin and a hugely anxious feeling in my body.
Best Blessings from a long-time (12 years) listener.
Kathleen Jones

Comment

Of course there is no guarantee that any of the above visions or dream experiences will actually happen. But the corollary is also true. There is no guarantee that they won’t. Yet the inescapable fact is that intuitive people everywhere are receiving information of a catastrophic nature. The world seems to be headed for some sort of apocalyptic climax that has long been predicted.

There is one final point which those people who have read “The Last Days of Tolemac” will immediately recognize. All of the above situations are circumstances which have already been predicted in the book. But as terrifying as such events may seem, they are not signs that our world is coming to an end. Instead, as the Oracle of Tolemac has pointed out, they are actually the birth pangs of a new and glorious age. The earth itself is in the process of being reborn, and those who inherit this new earth will experience a Golden Age that is more glorious than they could ever have imagined.

Allan, Selections, September 12, 2019, 9:13 am

Selection # 12 – The Day of the Lord – Part Five

This selected entry was originally published here on June 13, 2016.

As shown in previous instalments, the Old Testament of the Bible was filled with references to events that were predicted to occur during the “Latter Days”, which was a term used by ancient prophets to describe the period leading up to the return of the long awaited Messiah.

In particular, these prophets warned about something which they called “the Great and Terrible Day of the Lord”. This would be a day of fire and brimstone descending from the heavens, when God’s wrath would be visited upon all those who had failed to keep his commandments.

Then in the New Testament, we find further references to this theme of blood, hailstones, brimstone and fire raining down upon the earth from the skies. For when the disciples asked Jesus about the signs that would precede his return to the earth, he replied:

“And there shall be signs in the sun, and in the moon, and in the stars; and upon the earth distress of nations with perplexity; the sea and the waves roaring; Men’s hearts failing them for fear, and for looking after those things which are coming on the earth: for the powers of heaven shall be shaken”.   (Luke 21:25-26)

The signs spoken of by Jesus were further clarified by St. John, who devoted his entire book of Revelation to the events that would herald both the end of the present era of humanity, and the beginning of a new golden age that would last for a thousand years.

Now many Christians may be surprised to learn that John was not the only Christian saint who had visions of things that would happen in the future. More than a thousand years after his death, another person had similar visions, and was later recognized as a saint by the Catholic Church.

That person was the Christian mystic St. Hildegard of Bingen, a town on the river Rhine located not far from the modern city of Frankfurt in Germany. Hildegard was born at the end of 11th century, and from an early age began to experience visions of events that would occur in the future.  As she wrote:

“Up to my fifteenth year I saw much, and related some of the things seen to others, who would inquire with astonishment, whence such things might come. … Frequently, in my conversations, I would relate future things which I saw as if present, but, noting the amazement of my listeners, I became more reticent.”

Perhaps because her early visions, Hildegard was drawn towards a life in the Church. She joined a Benedictine monastery where she rose to the position of Abbess. She proved to be a remarkable woman blessed with many talents, and was even consulted by bishops, popes and kings.

At a time when few women became accomplished writers, Hildegard produced major works of theology, as well as botanical and medicinal texts. Then in the year 1141 A.D., Hildegard had a vision of God in which she was instructed to “write down that which you see and hear“.

She subsequently published her first theological text under the title of “Scivias” (“Know the Ways of the Lord”). In this work, which dealt with things that would occur during the days leading up to the return of the Christ, she wrote about a comet and its impact on “the great nation”.

“Before the Comet comes, many nations, the good excepted, will be scoured with want and famine. The great nation in the ocean that is inhabited by people of different tribes and descent by an earthquake, storm and tidal waves will be devastated. It will be divided, and in great part submerged.”

As she went on to record:

“The Comet by its tremendous pressure, will force much out of the ocean and flood many countries, causing much want and many plagues. [After the] great Comet, the great nation will be devastated by earthquakes, storms, and great waves of water, causing much want and plagues.

“The ocean will also flood many other countries, so that all coastal cities will live in fear, with many destroyed. All sea coast cities will be fearful and many of them will be destroyed by tidal waves, and most living creatures will be killed and even those who escape will die from a horrible disease”.  (View Source)

So here we have evidence, written almost a thousand years ago, of a close encounter between the earth and a comet, that described how a “great nation” would be “divided” (split into two parts), and devastated by “earthquakes, storms, and great waves of water”, and “in great part submerged”.

What has made St. Hildegard’s words so significant, is how closely what she saw in her visions matched with the information relayed by the American seer Edgar Cayce in the course of various readings that he gave in the early years of the 20th century.

From time to time Cayce was asked questions about the future of America, and especially about events that were predicted in the Bible to occur during the days leading up to the return of the Christ. For example, in January 1934, when asked about physical changes to the earth, Cayce replied:

“The earth will be broken up in the western portion of America. The greater portion of Japan must go into the sea. The upper portion of Europe will be changed as in the twinkling of an eye. Land will appear off the east coast of America.

“There will be the upheavals in the Arctic and in the Antarctic that will make for the eruption of volcanoes in the Torrid areas, and there will be shifting then of the poles – so that where there has been those of a frigid or the semi-tropical will become the more tropical, and moss and fern will grow.”   (Reading  3976-15)

It is clear from this reply that the continent of North America would be the “great nation” that would undergo dramatic geological changes at the time of the end. This was confirmed in another famous reading in which he was asked: What is the shape of the world to come? Part of his reply is quoted below:

“And what is the coast line now of many a land will be the bed of the ocean. Even many of the battle fields of the present will be ocean, will be seas, the bays, the lands over which the new order will carry on their trade as one with another.

“Portions of the now east coast of New York, or New York City itself, will in the main disappear. This will be another generation, though, here, while the southern portions of Carolina, Georgia – these will disappear. This will be much sooner.

“The waters of the lakes will empty into the Gulf, rather than the waterway over which such discussions have been recently made. It would be well if the waterway were prepared, but not for that purpose for which it is at present being considered.

“Then the area where the entity is now located (Virginia Beach) will be among the safety lands, as will the portions of what is now Ohio, Indiana and Illinois, and much of the southern portion of Canada and the eastern portion of Canada; while the western land – much of that is to be disturbed – in this land – as, of course, much in other lands.”   (Reading 1152-11)

And this is where a second American possessing unusual talents enters the scene. His name is Gordon-Michael Scallion. And just as in the case of Edgar Cayce, Scallion’s unusual ability manifested itself unexpectedly in his life as a result of a health crisis affecting his throat.

In 1979, while he was is the middle of delivering a public lecture, he suddenly lost his voice completely “in a split second”. He was taken to hospital where doctors conducted a series of comprehensive tests on his vocal chords, larynx and throat. Because they were unable to find anything wrong, they dismissed his symptoms as psychosomatic.

Yet within a few hours of being discharged from the hospital, Scallion found that his physical vision had changed. He now began to see colours and lights around animals, plants, trees and people. He had no idea what these colours represented, and concluded that it was his vision that was to blame.

It was only later that he realised that what he was seeing were the “auras” of people, plants and animals. And like Cayce before him, he discovered that he had the ability to look into people and see what was wrong with their physical, mental or spiritual bodies.

Then in 1991, Scallion found that he was able to sense what was wrong with the earth itself. He began to experience nightmares in which it appeared as if the earth was a sentient being, just like a human, and that it was in great pain.

He also began to get visions of changes that would take place to the existing continents of the earth in future times and, in particular, changes that would take place on the North American continent. As he later wrote:

“Since 1979 I have had ongoing visions concerning the Earth, sometimes as many as ten or more in a day, lasting from a few seconds to minutes. In 1982, I began to sketch a map based on the visions, and I updated it through the years as new information was presented to me.”

In the June 1996 Issue of “The Earth Changes Report”, Scallion described for the reader a series of dramatic visions that had occurred to him at that time that appeared to show changes to the earth as a result of a collision between the earth and an asteroid.

“..I am now shown the Earth, and as a result of the shockwave, the Earth shudders everywhere. There are winds. I am watching large landmasses that appear to be the North American Plate and the Pacific Plate. They are moving, perhaps half the plate structure of the Earth, shift as if in a single movement.

“They do not go up or down, but rather they slip. The movement from my perspective doesn’t seem far, but it might be something akin to twenty-five or thirty degrees of slippage. I watch certain land masses that were warm become instantly cold.

“I see animals, grazing animals that look like herds of cattle, frozen in their paths. I watch other areas that are mile-high with snow, melting. I realize that it is the Antarctic. As I am watching there is a time lapse which I would assume would be weeks or months.

“I watch Greenland; the ice is melting so fast that water levels are rising. The water is moving in so fast that new seaways are made.

“I can see inland seas in the United States. I can see a river running from the Great Lakes to Phoenix. I can see that the St. Lawrence Seaway has become a large inland sea. The Mississippi divides the United States in two.

“Europe has become a series of larger islands and most of Northern Europe is under water.

 “At the same time I am seeing other land masses thrust up from the ocean bottom as a result of the shift. I see huge land masses in the Atlantic and the Pacific thrust up, even though the melting has raised the water level. Are there still twelve tectonic plates? I move round to see how many there are. After counting I find there are twenty-four.”

Based on the visions which Scallion experienced at that time, he created a revised map of the world that illustrated all the changes that he had witnessed in his visions. These changes in sea level in all the different regions of the world can briefly be summarised as follows:

What will happen in North America

The damage caused by the comet will completely change the outline of the entire North American continent. After these changes have taken place the United States will be totally different from the way it looks today. While some of these changes will occur when the comet passes close to the earth, others will happen over the following months.

Not only will the coastlines on both the east and west coasts of America be devastated by enormous tidal waves, but these coastal states will themselves be swallowed up by the ocean. More than half the existing population of the United States will be lost in these catastrophes.

In addition, the waters of the Great Lakes will no longer drain through the St Lawrence Seaway into the Atlantic Ocean, but will instead empty into the Gulf of Mexico. The Mississippi River will be greatly expanded as the ground sinks as a result of earthquake activity in the region.

It will no longer be possible to travel by land across the country because of the water that will flood the central states of America.

When the asteroid hits the ocean, the tidal waves generated by this impact will swamp the cities along both the east and west coasts of North America. These will be followed by enormous movements in the crust of the earth that will cause large sections of the western United States to sink below the sea.

This submergence of the land will extend far inland and only the highest peaks of the mountains will remain as isolated islands. Almost all of the western states of America will disappear beneath the waves. The new coastline of the west will be moved inland as far as Wyoming, Colorado and Arizona.

Similar changes will take place on the east coast and most of the coastal areas will sink beneath the sea. The sea will inundate the land all the way from Maine down to Florida. The same will apply to the coastal states along the Gulf of Mexico.

The coastal areas of Mexico will also be covered by the sea, especially around the Yucatan, while the Baja Peninsula will be submerged. The low lying lands of Central America will also sink beneath the sea, leaving the higher areas as separate islands.

All the major lands of the Caribbean will disappear beneath the waves, including the islands of Cuba, Haiti, Jamaica, Puerto Rico and the Dominican Republic. The Panama Canal will no longer be needed as a new waterway will open up linking the Gulf of Mexico with the Pacific.

In Canada, the Hudson Bay will expand to form a large inland sea. Other parts of the north will be inundated as well as the islands of the eastern seaboard. The St Lawrence River will expand to flood parts of Quebec and the Maritime Provinces.

In the west there will be widespread damage on the coast and on Vancouver Island, which will bear the full force of the incoming waves. Severe earthquake activity will also cause parts of south eastern British Columbia to sink beneath the sea.

The central regions of Canada from the Alberta border to the western portion of Quebec, will be spared from most of the destruction that will be taking place elsewhere in North America. They will become places of refuge for people displaced from other regions.

What will happen in South America

South America will be greatly changed as a result of the undersea changes taking place in the region. Parts of the Amazon Basin will be reclaimed by the sea, as will low lying areas of Argentina, Uruguay and Brazil.

On the west coast, earthquakes and volcanic activity will transform the land. Some parts of the west coast will sink below the waves, while others will find themselves lifted to higher elevations.

What will happen in Europe

Because Europe has long been the centre of western civilization, and because it has also been the focus of some of the worst wars fought in the history of humanity, much of Europe will sink beneath the waves, so that the negativity that has accumulated over many thousands of years can be washed away.

Due to the sudden change in the axis of the earth, Europe will go through some of the most severe changes that will be taking place on earth at this time. Most of Northern Europe will be completely submerged. All that will be left of Finland, Denmark, Norway and Sweden will be isolated islands that once were lofty mountains.

Much of France will be claimed by the waves, as will most of Germany and Poland, especially those areas involved in the major battles of the two world wars. The sea will also inundate the lowlands of Holland and Belgium.

The higher regions of Spain and Portugal will be spared and will be sought out as refuges from the floods. Switzerland and Austria will be surrounded by the waters of an inland sea.

In Eastern Europe, most of the Balkan countries will be submerged as will Bulgaria, Romania, and parts of western Turkey. Amongst the Mediterranean countries, the coastal areas of Greece and Italy will be most affected, and earthquakes in the region will also claim many lives.

Most of the United Kingdom will once again disappear beneath the waves as other land masses arise in the Atlantic Ocean. Only a few small islands will remain, including areas around London and the Midlands. In Ireland many places will be deluged and only the higher elevations will be spared.

What will happen in Africa

The continent of Africa will be split into three different parts. The valley of the Nile will widen and a rift will form that will extend through the middle of the continent all the way down to southern Africa. Another inland sea will form in northern Africa that will extend from Algeria through Mali and Nigeria down to the Congo.

On the east coast the Red Sea will widen and engulf the coastal areas of Egypt and Sudan. The Great Rift Valley of eastern Africa will fill with water and Lake Victoria will merge with Lake Nyasa and drain into the Indian Ocean.

What will happen in Australia and New Zealand

Australia will shrink in size as most of the coastal areas are engulfed by the surrounding sea. In the south the sea will intrude upon the land and an inland sea will push its way north into the Murray Darling valley.

In contrast with most of the other places in the world, New Zealand will actually grow many times in size as changes in the earth take place in the coming age.

New land will emerge from the sea causing the existing land to grow until it is larger than Australia, and its new coastline will stretch for many thousands of miles. It will also be joined to Australia by a narrow strip of land.

What will happen in Asia

When the meteor plunges into the Atlantic Ocean, the same tidal waves that will devastate the coasts of North America, Africa and Europe will destroy the coastal regions of Asia. The coast of China will be inundated by water which will surge inland in many places.

The islands of the Philippines and Taiwan will be severely damaged by floods and earthquakes. The islands of Japan will be completely swamped by water and will sink beneath the waves.

The lands of Asia will suffer from earthquake, fire and drought. Apart from the Red Sea which will expand to submerge the coastal regions of Arabia, there will also be floods in many inland regions that are affected by the breaking up of the land.

New lands will rise up out of the sea

Just as many lands now inhabited by people will be engulfed by the sea, so new land masses will rise to take their place. These new lands will become major population centers in the coming age.

As Edgar Cayce has predicted, new lands will rise out of the ocean as other countries around the world sink below the waves. Cayce spoke of new land appearing in the Atlantic and the Pacific Oceans.

The sunken lands of Atlantis and Lemuria will rise up out of the ocean, cleansed and ready for life in the new age that will unfold on the earth. Atlantis will reappear just where Plato said it once existed, across from the Pillars of Hercules, or the Straits of Gibraltar.

Atlantis will be an enormous island, the size of Western Europe today. Lemuria will rise up out of the southern Pacific Ocean. It will be a new continent more than twice the size of Australia.

Other lands will rise out of the ocean in different parts of the world. New islands will emerge off the east and west coasts of America. One of these will be west of what is now Oregon, while another large island will appear in the region of the Bahamas.

The island of Tasmania to the south of Australia will grow to many times the size it is today. New lands will also emerge off the coast of Chile in South America, and off the west coast of Southern Africa.

Because these new lands will be cleansed from the destructive thought patterns of the past, many people will choose to move to Atlantis, Lemuria and Antarctica, or Lumania as it was once called.

Of the existing countries in the world there will be three in particular that will achieve great accomplishments in the coming age. Canada will become a vast commercial, cultural and scientific center in the new age. Because of its mild semi-tropical climate it will attract new settlers from all over the earth.

Australia and New Zealand will also become important spiritual centers in the coming years. The sandy deserts that exist in Australia today will be transformed into fertile lands.

Finally, for those readers who would like to get a closer look at those land masses that will be most affected, as well as what those regions in which they live today will look like in the coming age, a link is provided here with different segments of Scallion’s new world map.

There is, however, one cautionary reminder that all readers should bear in mind, and that is that although the future world map that Scallion has outlined here represents the final outcome of future world changes that appeared to him in visions, the actual timing of these changes will vary.

Although many of these changes will undoubtedly happen on the “Day of the Lord” when the asteroid plunges in the ocean, others will only occur later as a result of subsequent shifts in the tectonic plates in different parts of the world.

And, as always when dealing with matters of a spiritual nature, no one should move from their present location unless they feel compelled to do so by a strong inner impulse, for the Lord knows how to protect all those who are his true followers.

Allan, Selections, September 5, 2019, 9:52 am

Selection # 10 – The New Golden Age

This selected entry was originally published here on July 2, 2013.

Readers of this Blog will by now have realised that the central message of my book The Last Days of Tolemac, is that we are currently living through the death throes of the present world age, and that the new age that is dawning will exceed everything we can imagine.

In the penultimate chapter of the last book of the Bible, the book of Revelation, we find the following words:

And God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes; and there shall be no more death, neither sorrow, nor crying, neither shall there be any more pain: for the former things are passed away.” (Revelation 21:4)

However, the transition from our existing world age to the new one that is coming, will be accompanied by world-wide calamities brought on by a close encounter with a comet, that will totally transform the surface of the earth. As St John goes on to explain:

And I saw a new heaven and a new earth: for the first heaven and the first earth were passed away.” (Revelation 21:1)

The world that we know today with its continents and countries will be completely changed. Many landmasses that are presently above the sea will sink below the waves, while new lands will arise where previously there was only ocean. The earth will appear to have been made new.

And because this close encounter with a comet will cause a change in the axis of the earth, the stars that previously inhabited the night sky will now be seen in different parts of the heavens. To those who will inherit this new earth, it will appear as if the stars themselves have moved. The old heaven will have passed away.

Now the idea of the earth undergoing cataclysmic changes leading to successive world ages is not new. In fact it is as old as time itself, and stories of similar past events can be found in the sacred writings of all the ancient cultures of the world.

When Immanuel Velikovsky was researching the global legends of mankind in the course of developing his revolutionary cosmological ideas that led up to the publication of his book Worlds in Collision, he was struck by the fact that so many societies retained in legend, dim memories of cataclysmic changes which had destroyed entire societies and changed the face of the earth.

Velikovsky found that these legends were common to many societies which otherwise were remote in time and geography from one another. According to these legends, the planet appeared to have enjoyed periods of physical stability interrupted by recurring cataclysms of overwhelming ferocity.

In many cases which Velikovsky documented, the earth appeared to have been shaken in its course, altering not only its polar alignment, but also its orbit around the sun. According to these legends, the history of the earth was reckoned by successive ages.

Each age was a period of relative stability between cataclysms, and was in turn characterized by a particular “sun”, which represented the path traversed by the sun through the heavens during that particular age.

Among the peoples of Meso-America, persistent traditions of cosmic catastrophes can be found among the Incas, the Aztecs and the Maya. The Maya referred to these past ages by the names of their “suns”, such as Water Sun, Earthquake Sun, Hurricane Sun and Fire Sun. They substituted the word “sun” for ”world age” in order to define a time characterised by a specific orbit of the earth around the Sun.

As H. B. Alexander wrote in his epic Latin American Mythology published in 1920:

The Water Sun (or Sun of Waters) was the first age, terminated by a deluge in which almost all creatures perished; the Earthquake Sun or age perished in a terrific earthquake when the earth broke in many places and mountains fell. The world age of the Hurricane Sun came to its destruction in a cosmic hurricane. The Fire Sun was the world age that went down in a rain of fire.”

The idea that the earth has undergone a succession of catastrophic upheavals associated with cosmic encounters did not originate with the Maya. Legends, myths and stories of these devastating events can also be found throughout the ancient world. They tell of times when dwellings were destroyed and the earth was convulsed by natural disasters which had their source in space.

While these stories vary in the number of ages that have come and gone, they all agree that there have been at periodic intervals, various disasters that have assailed the earth causing widespread destruction. The agents of this destruction have been earthquake, fire, wind and flood.

The Chinese called these vanished ages Kis, and recorded that ten ages had passed from the beginning of the world up to the time of Confucius. The ancient Chinese encyclopedia Sing-li-ta-tsiuen-chou described these past eras in the following words: “In a general convulsion of nature, the sea is carried out of its bed, mountains spring out of the ground, rivers change their course, human beings and everything are ruined, and the ancient traces effaced.”

The sacred Hindu book Bhagavata Purana called these past ages Kalpas or Yugas, and referred to four previous ages that had terminated through different catastrophes. The Buddhist scripture Visuddhi-Magga, written about 430 BC, contains a chapter on “World Cycles” declaring that: “There are three destructions: the destruction by water, the destruction by fire, the destruction by wind”. Each of these ages is separated from its previous one by a world catastrophe.

Similar references can be found in the Zend-Avesta, the sacred book of the Persians. The Pahlavi Texts quote the prophet Zarathustra referring to “the signs, wonders, and perplexity which are manifested in the world at the end of each millennium.” One of the books of the Avesta, the Bahman Yast, numbers seven world ages or millennia that have preceded the present age.

The Greek philosophers Anaximenes and Anaximander both referred to past world ages in their writings, as did Diogenes of Apollonia in the fifth century BC. Heraclitus (540-475 BC) taught that the world was destroyed by fire at regular intervals, while Aristarchus of Samos claimed that in every period of 2,484 years, the earth underwent various destructions, some by flood and some by fire.

In his work Theogony, the Greek poet Hesiod described the end of one of these ages:
The life-giving earth crashed around in burning . . . all the land seethed, and the Ocean’s streams . . . it seemed even as if earth and wide Heaven above came together; for such a mighty crash would have arisen if Earth were being hurled to ruin, and Heaven from on high were hurling her down.”

Another famous Greek by the name of Herodotus (484-425 BC), who has been called the “Father of History” because he was the first Greek historian to collect his materials systematically, test their accuracy, and then reduce them to a written narrative, had an opportunity to visit Egypt. In his Second Book of History, Herodotus referred to his own meeting with various Egyptian priests, and recorded his conversation with them. As he wrote:

The priests asserted that within historical ages and since Egypt became a kingdom, four times in this period (so they told me) the sun rose contrary to his wont; twice he rose where he now sets, and twice he set where he now rises.”

The Greek philosopher Plato recorded in his essay Timaeus, that the renowned Athenian statesman Solon (638-558 BC) also undertook a visit to ancient Egypt. While he was there he was confronted by an elderly priest who told him:

Oh Solon, Solon, you Greeks are all children, and there is no such thing as an old Greek. You are all young in mind. You have no belief rooted in old tradition and no knowledge hoary with age. And the reason is this.”

“There have been and will be many different calamities to destroy mankind, the greatest of them by fire and water, lesser ones by countless other means. Your own story of how Phaeton, child of the sun, harnessed his father’s chariot, but was unable to guide it along his father’s course and so burnt up things on earth and was himself destroyed by a thunderbolt, is a mythical version of the truth that there is at long intervals a variation in the course of the heavenly bodies and a consequent widespread destruction by fire of things on the earth.”

Jesus predicted that there would come a future time on earth when nations would rise up against other nations, as well as kingdom against kingdom. These wars would be compounded by other troubles such as famines, pestilences and earthquakes in different parts of the world.  (Matthew 24:7)

This affliction and tribulation throughout the earth would culminate in a cataclysmic event that would bring an end to the current cycle of civilisation. In his book of Revelation, St John described the disasters that would herald this event.

The first angel sounded, and there followed hail and fire mingled with blood, and they were cast upon the earth: and the third part of the trees was burnt up, and all the green grass was burnt up.

“And the second angel sounded, and as it were a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea: and the third part of the sea became blood; and the third part of the creatures which were in the sea, and had life, died; and the third part of the ships were destroyed.

“And the third angel sounded, and there fell a great star from heaven, burning as it were a lamp, and it fell upon the third part of the rivers, and upon the fountains of waters; and the name of the star is called Wormwood: and the third part of the waters became wormwood; and many men died of the waters because they were made bitter.

“And the fourth angel sounded, and the third part of the sun was smitten and the third part of the moon, and the third part of the stars; so as the third part of them was darkened, and a third of the day shone not, and the night likewise.”  (Revelation 8: 7-12)

And the fifth angel sounded, and I saw a star fall from heaven unto the earth;  and to him was given the key of the bottomless pit. And he opened the bottomless pit; and there arose a smoke out of the pit, as the smoke of a great furnace; and the sun and the air were darkened by reason of the smoke of the pit.”  (Revelation 9:1-2)

At the time these words were written, these enigmatic predictions by the favoured disciple of Jesus could have held little meaning for those living in past centuries. Today however, their meaning stands revealed as the clear imprint of a heavenly harbinger of doom. The tribulations predicted by John are a vivid illustration of just those disasters that would befall the earth if it were to have a close encounter with a large comet.

Suppose a large comet was to pass in orbit around the sun. As it sped away on its outward path heading back into the dark void of space, its luminous tail of particles would travel ahead of it, blown by the force of solar radiation. If the earth should happen to lie in the path of this comet after its perihelion, or closest approach to the sun, it would first come in contact with this extended tail.

If the dust particles in the comet’s tail were ferruginous (containing iron), the earth would be showered by particles of fine, red dust. The presence of these fine particles in the atmosphere would then spawn torrential downpours of rain, which would be characterized by a rusty-red colour.

As the earth continued to be showered by poisonous dust, this rusty rain would soon contaminate the rivers and the seas, causing them to become blood-red in appearance. Those who drank from these toxic waters would die.

As the nucleus of the comet drew closer to the earth, larger particles in the comet’s tail would fall as blazing meteorites. This torment of fiery hail would set fire to large portions of the land. Should a part of the comet, or even the nucleus itself, plunge into the sea, this flaming asteroid would create appalling havoc, not just to those creatures within the sea, but also to those craft which happened to be travelling upon it.

Coastal cities all around the globe would be ravaged by tumultuous tidal waves. Hundreds of millions of people would die in a matter of minutes.

The resulting collision would devastate the land and decimate all forms of life on the planet. A cloud of dust and debris would soon circle the earth, blotting out the light of the sun, moon and stars. The impact of this asteroid would severely jolt the earth, causing it to tilt on its axis and change the alignment of its poles.

Such a scenario may seem farfetched in terms of astronomical probabilities. Yet it is entirely possible that a long-period comet, hitherto unknown to science, could at any time sweep into the solar skies. Now if such a catastrophe were to afflict the earth, the existing topography of the land would undoubtedly be dramatically changed by the fury of water, wind and flame.

The earth would appear to have been made new, with the old earth having been transformed. And if the poles themselves were tilted into a new alignment, the sun would appear to traverse a new path through the constellations. The heavens themselves would appear to have been changed. A new age would then begin on earth, just as had occurred many times before in our half-forgotten past.

But whereas in ages past, those few who managed somehow to survive these disasters would have been forced to start anew amid the wreckage of a devastated planet, by reverting to living in caves and assuming a hunter-gatherer existence, the prophets of old have assured us that this time will be different.

For according to all the ancient prophecies, as well as the recorded words of sages and the founders of all the major religions of the world, this coming age will be a golden age of wonder that will dwarf even the greatest achievements of past civilizations.

It will be an age of peace, freedom and justice, as well as an age of scientific accomplishment that will beggar the mind. It will not only be an age free of all pain and suffering, but of spiritual insight and understanding where all beings will live in harmony with one another.

Allan, Selections, August 22, 2019, 10:27 am

Selection # 9 – 2012 and the Maya Calendar

This selected entry was originally published here on June 4, 2011.

Those Western writers and other prognosticators who have attached a special significance to the year 2012, believing it to be a date that has prophetic meaning to the Maya, have fallen into the same trap that has ensnared the whole of modern science. The scientists of today have disregarded the written testimony of ancient societies, preferring instead to believe that the solar system has remained unchanged since its formation many billions of years ago.

But because the length of our year has changed, the Long Count calendar of the Maya now has an inherent discrepancy of five-and-a quarter days in every solar year. And any calendar that has a built-in error of over 52 days in every decade has clearly lost its ability to predict anything of significance in the future. And unfortunately, those authors who have incorporated the year 2012 into their apocalyptic predictions, have merely compounded the errors of others and added to the confusion of everyone.

These writers might have spared themselves, and their readers, this confusion had they conducted more rigorous research, and investigated what ancient cultures actually had to say on the subject. And what these ancient societies recorded was that the earth had undergone numerous cataclysms in the past, and had changed its orbit, as well as its axis, many times. These stories can be found among the writings of all ancient peoples.

As Plato recorded in his essay Timaeus, the renowned Athenian statesman Solon (638-558 BC) visited Egypt. While he was there he was confronted by an elderly priest who said to him: “Oh Solon, Solon, you Greeks are all children, and there is no such thing as an old Greek. You are all young in mind. You have no belief rooted in old tradition and no knowledge hoary with age. And the reason is this.”

“There have been and will be many different calamities to destroy mankind, the greatest of them by fire and water, lesser ones by countless other means. Your own story of how Phaeton, child of the sun, harnessed his father’s chariot, but was unable to guide it along his father’s course and so burnt up things on earth and was himself destroyed by a thunderbolt, is a mythical version of the truth that there is at long intervals a variation in the course of the heavenly bodies and a consequent widespread destruction by fire of things on the earth.”

Another famous Greek, this time Herodotus (484-425 BC), who has been called the “Father of History” because he was the first Greek historian to collect his materials systematically, test their accuracy, and then reduce them to a written narrative, also had an opportunity to visit Egypt. In his Second Book of History, Herodotus referred to his own meeting with various Egyptian priests, and recorded his conversation with them. As he wrote:

“The priests asserted that within historical ages and since Egypt became a kingdom, four times in this period (so they told me) the sun rose contrary to his wont; twice he rose where he now sets, and twice he set where he now rises.” Obviously, such an event would cause catastrophic effects throughout the earth. Commenting on this Plato wrote in his book Politicus: “There is at that time great destruction of animals in general, and only a small part of the human race survives”.

Early scholars of Mexican hieroglyphics noted that the Sun (Tonatiuh) was considered to have four motions. “The sun that moves towards the east, contrary to the present sun, is called by the Indians Teotl Lexco. The people of Mexico  symbolized the changing direction of the sun’s movement as a heavenly ball game, accompanied by upheavals and earthquakes on the earth.” (Seler: Gesammelte Abhandlungen)

Different nations had differing traditions about past world ages. Each of these ages was associated with a particular “sun”, since the sun charted a different course across the heavens in each succeeding age. And as has happened in the past, so these nations believe that similar events will occur in the future.

And we shall see how the prophecies of the Maya pose a modern warning to the world.

The idea that the earth has undergone a succession of catastrophic upheavals associated with cosmic encounters did not originate with the Maya. Legends, myths and stories of these devastating events can also be found throughout the ancient world. They tell of times when dwellings were destroyed and the earth was convulsed by natural disasters which had their source in space.

While these stories vary in the number of ages that have come and gone, they agree that there have been, at periodic intervals, various disasters that have assailed the earth causing widespread destruction. The agents of this destruction have been earthquake, fire, wind and flood. But these stories go further. They claim that as a result of these encounters, our world has repeatedly changed its axis, as well as its orbit around the sun.

The Chinese called these vanished ages Kis, and recorded that ten ages had passed from the beginning of the world up to the time of Confucius.The ancient Chinese encyclopaedia Sing-li-ta-tsiuen-chou described these past eras in the following words: “In a general convulsion of nature, the sea is carried out of its bed, mountains spring out of the ground, rivers change their course, human beings and everything are ruined, and the ancient traces effaced.”

The sacred Hindu book Bhagavata Purana called these past ages Kalpas or Yugas, and referred to four previous ages that had terminated through different catastrophes. The Buddhist scripture Visuddhi-Magga, written about 430 BC, contains a chapter on “World Cycles” declaring that: “There are three destructions: the destruction by water, the destruction by fire, the destruction by wind”. Each of these ages is separated from its previous one by a world catastrophe.

Similar references can be found in the Zend-Avesta, the sacred book of the Persians. The Pahlavi Texts quote the prophet Zarathustra referring to “the signs, wonders, and perplexity which are manifested in the world at the end of each millennium.” One of the books of the Avesta, the Bahman Yast, numbers seven world ages or millennia that have preceded the present age.

The Greek philosophers Anaximenes and Anaximander both referred to past world ages in their writings, as did Diogenes of Apollonia in the fifth century BC. Heraclitus (540-475 BC) taught that the world was destroyed by fire at regular intervals, while Aristarchus of Samos claimed that in every period of 2,484 years, the earth underwent various destructions, some by flood and some by fire.

In his work Theogony, the Greek poet Hesiod described the end of one of these ages. “The life-giving earth crashed around in burning . . . all the land seethed, and the Ocean’s streams . . . it seemed even as if earth and wide Heaven above came together; for such a mighty crash would have arisen if Earth were being hurled to ruin, and Heaven from on high were hurling her down.”

Among the peoples of Meso-America, persistent traditions of cosmic catastrophes can be found among the Incas, the Aztecs and the Maya. The Maya referred to these past ages by the names of their “suns”, such as Water Sun, Earthquake Sun, Hurricane Sun and Fire Sun. They substituted the word “sun” for “world age” in order to define a time characterised by a specific orbit of the earth around the Sun.

As H. B. Alexander wrote in his epic Latin American Mythology published in 1920: “The Water Sun (or Sun of Waters) was the first age, terminated by a deluge in which almost all creatures perished; the Earthquake Sun or age perished in a terrific earthquake when the earth broke in many places and mountains fell. The world age of the Hurricane Sun came to its destruction in a cosmic hurricane. The Fire Sun was the world age that went down in a rain of fire.”

The Maya did not record the date of the last cosmic disturbance that led to a change in the orbit of the earth. They did however alter their calendar to match this change, by putting aside the former Long Count calendar, and instituting in its place the 52 year cycle known as the Calendar Round. However another nation, also known for its meticulous record of historical events, has left us with a written record of this event.

When the Assyrians descended on the Jews like “the wolf on the fold”, the Old Testament prophet Isaiah predicted that Jerusalem would not fall into the hands of the enemy, and that their leader Sennacherib who had blasphemed against the Lord would be killed by a “blast” sent by the Lord. (Isaiah 37:7) Isaiah went on to tell king Hezekiah that the Lord would send a sign of this deliverance. As we read:

“And I will defend thee and this city out of the hand of Assyria; and I will defend this city. And this shall be a sign unto thee from the Lord, that the Lord will do this thing that he hath spoken; Behold, I will bring again the shadow of the degrees, which is gone down in the sun dial of Ahaz, ten degrees backward. So the sun returned ten degrees, by which degrees it was gone down.” (Isaiah 38:6-8)

“And it came to pass that night, that the angel of the Lord went out, and smote in the camp of the Assyrians an hundred four-score and five thousand; and when they arose early in the morning, behold, they were all dead corpses.” (II Kings 19:35) In his book Worlds in Collision, Immanuel Velikovsky writes: “The rabbinical sources state in a definite manner that the disturbance in the movement of the sun happened on the evening of the destruction of Sennacherib’s army by a devouring blast.”

Velikovsky also quotes from the work of French scholar Edouard Biot: “The year 687 BC, in the summer, in the fourth moon, in the day sin mao (23rd of March) during the night, the fixed stars did not appear, though the night was clear (cloudless). In the middle of the night stars fell like a rain.”

The End of the Cosmic Cycle and the Dawn of the New Age

Although the Maya of today emphatically deny that our world will end on December 21, 2012, they do believe that the existing world age will shortly come to an end.

And just like the other world ages that have come and gone in the past, they believe that our current age will also end in a series of cosmic disasters. These disasters will devastate the planet, and lead to the destruction of our existing way of life. However, according to the Mayan prophetic tradition, the new world age that is coming will see a return of peace and harmony.

The chief spokesman for this ancient tradition is Don Alejandro Cirilo Oxlaj. Oxlaj, or “Wandering Wolf” as he prefers to be called, is President of the National Mayan Council of Elders. This is a body of 440 elders of wisdom who represent various Mayan ethnic groups of Guatemala. He is also an international lecturer on Mayan culture, and he travels the world sharing the message and the prophecies of the Mayan people.

In September 1999, speaking in Santa Fe, New Mexico, “Wandering Wolf” described the prophetic purpose of his world-wide mission.

“We are all here because it is our destiny, our mission. Spirit has called each of you here. You are special. I am no more special than you are. You are more than me. I am a poor Mayan. We do not have schools and universities like you do. We live in the poor countryside. What I have is given to me by my father. The Cosmos is the source of our knowledge. We study the Cosmos.”

“Our books are the Mayan Codices. For us, this is our writing. The hand is a book. We have 5000 codices. We study these. We communicate with the invisible ones, the star people, who gave me my name,”Wandering Wolf.” I come in fulfillment of the prophesies of the Mayan and Hopi, which says: “Those of the center will unite the eagle of the north and the condor of the south, because we are one, like the fingers of the hand.”

“This means that the elders of Central America will unite with those of North and South America. This is a fulfillment of our prophesies, that is why I am here. Our elder astronomers are watching over time and when it will be fulfilled. It shall be fulfilled in Twelve Baktun and it began on August 17, 1987, the Harmonic Convergence. It was then that I began my walk all over the world.”

“The Harmonic Convergence began the Twelve Baktun, Thirteen Bahaou and will end in 2012 or 2013 by your calendar. This will end the fifth period of the sun by our calendar. There will be huge problems. Catastrophes and cataclysms will befall us.”

When Alvaro Colom was inaugurated as President of Guatemala on January 14, 2008, “Wandering Wolf” was invited to address the gathered throng of dignitaries. In his address he expanded on the theme he had announced some twenty-one years before.

“According to the Maya Long Count calendar, we are finalizing the 13 Baktun and 13 Ahau, thus approaching the Year Zero. We are at the doorsteps of the ending of another period of the Sun, a period that lasts 5,200 years and ends with several hours of darkness. After this period of darkness there comes a new period of the Sun; it will be the sixth one. In each period of the Sun there is an adjustment for the planet and it brings changes in the weather conditions and in social and political life as well.”

“The world is transformed and we enter a period of understanding and harmonious coexistence where there is social justice and equality for all. It is a new way of life. With a new social order there comes a time of freedom where we can move like the clouds, without limitations, without borders. We will travel like the birds, without the need for passports. We will travel like the rivers, all heading towards the same point . . .  the same objective.”

“The Mayan prophecies are announcing a time of change. The Pop Wuj (Popul-Vuh), the book of the Counsel, tells us, ‘It is time for dawn; let the dawn come, for the task to be finished.”  In subsequent talks, “Wandering Wolf” has clarified his teachings on the events leading up to the end of the current world age, and of the sixth world age that lies ahead.

“You and I may meet again in another dimension after the Year Zero. The Year Zero is the word of the Maya. At that time the sun will be hidden for a period of 60-70 hours and this is when we shall enter the period of the Sixth Sun. Then you will realize that what the Mayans speak are facts and not false preachings. We are not saying the world will end in 2012. There are false ones who say these things to frighten and threaten the world without awakening.”

“But the Mayan priests and astronomers know what is happening and see what shall happen in the future. This is my only message. I do not come to intimidate you. I come to say that we should love one another. We are all children and we pray that our Father be with us. Thank you.”

Allan, Selections, August 15, 2019, 12:32 pm

Stories That Defy Science – Part Three

Elaine Wilson (pseudonym) was a science mistress at a school in Penzance, a seaside resort in Cornwall in southwestern England. Elaine had been undergoing medical treatment for more than four years for thyroid and pituitary glandular dystrophy.

She had, in addition, suffered from a curvature of the spine which left her round-shouldered. She had trouble walking as her legs tended to swell if she was on her feet too long. She also had rheumatism in her left thigh.

In February 1953, Elaine learned of a healing mission that was to be conducted in Penzance. Although she was highly sceptical of the claims made in the course of such missions, she felt she should attend so that she might undertake a critical evaluation of the methods used by these alleged healers.

It was during the second day of this mission that Elaine felt an impulse to join the crowd that was lining up in front of the altar rail. She did so, although she was not aware of any strong emotion at the time, nor did she experience any special stirring of faith.

She knelt at the altar rail and felt the healer place her hands on her neck. As she did so, Elaine felt a deep-seated burning sensation within her torso. She described the heat as “unexpected, uncomfortable, and slightly strangling.” She then returned to her seat.

Elaine remained in her seat while the congregation began singing various hymns. As the second hymn ended, she became aware of convulsive movements to her neck and shoulders. Her shoulders began to jerk back until they were upright and parallel to the back of the pew, but the lower part of her body did not move.

Her head and neck began stretching upwards. She felt as if a noose had been placed around her neck pulling her head up. Yet she felt no pressure on her skin. The pull on her neck caused a definite upward movement in the head. These movements seemed to be beyond her control.

At no time, however, did she feel any pain. She could feel her vertebrae creaking and thought that the person alongside must surely have heard them. Walking back home after the service, Elaine felt somewhat lightheaded.

She noticed that her feet were not as swollen as usual, as she had difficulty keeping her shoes on. Later that evening, she continued to feel a burning sensation throughout the thyroid region. Her throat felt as if she had been drinking strong brandy. This inner heat later spread to her tonsils and from there up the left Eustachian tube to the middle ear on her left side.

The next morning Elaine awoke feeling fresher than usual, although she had only retired late the previous night. Her head was much clearer, as if a load had been lifted from her brain. Throughout the day she was again aware of various jerking movements in her neck and spine.

Although she could control these movements mentally by concentrating on them, they started again whenever she relaxed. It was then that she realized that the rheumatism in her left leg had completely disappeared.

The stretching movements and sensations of heat continued sporadically for the next few days. Elaine noticed that she could now walk up to a mile (1.6 kilometers) without difficulty, and an old injury to her left leg no longer ached when she walked quickly.

One month later, she noted in her diary that she had taken no tablets for four weeks nor had she received any injections. Her blood pressure was normal. Her back was still upright at the neck and waist. Her feet were no longer swollen and the pain in her legs had not returned.

Her hair was softer, and her skin had become more sensitive. The flesh on her forehead seemed thinner and moved more easily over her scalp. She could walk quickly, even uphill, without difficulty. Her one problem, however, was that her clothes no longer fitted her owing to the change in shape of her figure.

Four months later, she wrote, “My own healing has been permanent, and my health has increased daily. I can now play tennis for over two hours as opposed to five minutes last year. I am continually finding more and more of my old limitations gone. This throws new light on the meaning of the word ‘miracle’. I don’t understand it, but it has happened”. 9

In the earlier part of the twentieth century, when the British were still lords of India, a Calcutta lawyer and his wife, Abhoya, started out on a visit to their Guru, Lahiri Mahasaya, who lived in Benares (now called Varanasi).

Their carriage was delayed by heavy traffic, and by the time they reached Howrah station in Calcutta, the train to Benares was whistling its departure. Abhoya, who was a devout disciple of Lahiri Mahasaya, prayed silently to her Guru and implored him to stop the train as she could not bear to suffer any further delay in seeing him.

As the couple reached the platform, they saw an amazing sight. The wheels of the train were moving round and round, but the train itself was making no forward progress. In consternation, the engineer and many of the passengers got off the train to take a closer look at this extraordinary phenomenon.

As Abhoya and her husband were waiting on the platform wondering what to do, they were approached by an English railway guard. Contrary to all precedent, the guard offered his services to them saying; “Give me the money. I will buy your tickets while you climb aboard.”

As soon as they were seated and had been given their tickets, the train began to move slowly forward. The engineer and those passengers who had disembarked rushed to the doors to climb aboard, having no idea how the train had started or why it had stopped in the first place.

The remainder of the journey passed uneventfully for Abhoya and her husband. In due course they reached Benares, where they made their way impatiently to the home of Lahiri Mahasaya.

Seeing her Guru at last, Abhoya was overcome by emotion and prostrated herself before her master. In the Indian manner of extreme devotion, she sought to touch his feet. “Control yourself, Abhoya,” said Lahiri, “how you love to bother me.” And then, with a twinkle in his eye, he added: “As if you could not have come here by the next train!” 10

In May 1974, a man bought a book to read to pass the time while he was travelling. He was sufficiently intrigued by its contents to extend a personal invitation to the author.

The Book was Supernature and its author Dr Lyall Watson. This man invited Watson to visit him at his home in Venice, Italy, to witness a peculiar trick that his daughter Claudia was able to perform.

Watson travelled to Venice and in due course met Claudia, who was then eight years old. Shortly after dinner that evening, while the adults talked among themselves, Claudia lay on the carpet paging through a magazine.

Her father reached for a tube of tennis balls from a corner table, and casually rolled one across the carpet. It came to rest in front of Claudia. She picked it up and held it affectionately to her cheek. Then, balancing the ball in her left hand, she gently stroked it with her right. What followed next left Watson stunned.

“One moment there was a tennis ball – the familiar off-white carpeted sphere marked only by its usual meandering seam. Then it was no longer so. There was a short implosive sound, very soft, like a cork being drawn in the dark, and Claudia held in her hand something completely different: a smooth, dark, rubbery globe with only a suggestion of the old pattern on its surface – a sort of negative through-the-looking-glass impression of a tennis ball.”

Watson examined the object closely. He found that the tennis ball had been turned inside out. Yet it still contained a volume of air under pressure. He squeezed the ball and it retained its former shape. He dropped it and it bounced.

Then he picked up a knife from the dining room table and pierced the rubber. The air inside came hissing out. He then cut right around the circumference and was able to recognize the familiar fur which normally covered the outside of the ball.

Later that evening, Claudia performed the trick again. This time Watson kept the ball and took it back to his hotel, where he placed it on the mantelpiece in his room. As Watson described it, the ball stared at him as a mocking symbol. This enigmatic sphere defied his reasoned world of logic. It seemed to him to undermine the very laws of nature.

“It still disturbed me” he wrote. “I know enough of physics to appreciate that you cannot turn an unbroken sphere inside out like a glove. Not in this reality.” 11

Berthold Schwarz graduated from Dartmouth Medical School and received his medical degree from the New York University College of Medicine. After interning at the Mary Hitchcock Memorial Hospital, Hanover, New Hampshire, Dr Schwarz became a Fellow in Psychiatry at the Mayo Foundation where he received an M.S. from the Mayo Graduate ­School of Medicine.

He is a member of numerous medical associations, including the American Psychiatric Association and the American Board of Psychiatry and Neurology. What stamps Dr Schwarz as an unusual man among his peers, is his penchant for investigating strange talents and even stranger stories, with a view to discovering their underlying meaning.

Throughout his career he has followed the advice of the celebrated physicist, John Wheeler, who is renowned for exhorting his students: “In any field, find the strangest thing, and then explore it.”

Since the spring of 1984, Dr Schwarz has studied a young Florida housewife whom he calls “Katie”, in deference to her wishes to remain anonymous. Katie is the tenth of twelve children born of her part Cherokee Indian mother. Katie was forced to discontinue her education in the third grade in order to care for her ailing mother.

Despite her lack of formal education, or perhaps because of it, Katie has demonstrated a spectacular array of psychic talents, including psychokinesis, stigmata, healing and telepathy. She seems to have passed on her talents to her son, who has demonstrated among other things the ability to bend and split metal spoons.

On one particular occasion, Katie’s son, who was then fifteen years old, asked his mother if it was possible to go back in time. She replied that she believed it was. With that the boy went immediately to her walk-in closet, closed the door, and lay down on the floor.

As he later told Dr Schwarz, “I wanted to see what it was like in the 1920’s.” The boy appeared to enter a trance-like condition for he suddenly became aware of being in a strange room. He noticed a Christmas tree in the room, and he could see an old bald-headed man and an oil lamp nearby.

He also spotted an interesting looking cardboard box. He moved towards it, but in doing so managed to knock over the oil lamp. In the ensuing confusion, he simply recalled grasping the cardboard box before the vision faded and he found himself once more back in the walk-in-closet.

Incredibly, the cardboard box was still in his possession. He opened it and found an ostrich-skin cigarette lighter enclosed in a gold leather pouch. Dr Schwarz was later able to examine this lighter. He found that it bore the following inscription: “Compliments Moragues. Bay City. Inc., Mobile, Ala., Christmas 1928.” 12

Several years ago, a Latin-American friend of mine called Jorge Lopehandia was living in Ecuador, in the little village of Baños. He happened to be walking one day down a narrow jungle path along the edge of a cliff. After having travelled down this path for a short distance, Jorge decided to return.

He headed back along the same narrow path. As he was making his way back, Jorge was astonished find the path blocked by an enormous spider web. The web extended from the branches of a bush which flanked the path across the cliff face. The web stretched from his chest down to his feet. In the centre of the web was a brilliant, silver, metallic spider.

What amazed Jorge was that he had walked down that same path only a few minutes earlier, and there had been no sign of any spider or its web. It seemed incredible that such a large web could have been spun in so short a time.

Yet he was now in a quandary, for his only way home was to follow the path that was now blocked by the web. It was impossible to get around the bush without falling down the cliff. Jorge looked at the extraordinary, shining spider, and wondered how he could pass by without having to destroy the creature’s magnificent web.

He closed his eyes and prayed that he might somehow be able to pass without damaging the gossamer threads. When he opened his eyes a few seconds later, Jorge was confronted by an amazing sight. In the middle of the web was an open archway, allowing him to walk easily through. The brilliant, metallic spider was nowhere to be seen. 13

All of the foregoing experiences serve, in one way or another, to challenge our traditional scientific view of reality. They seem to defy the very laws of nature. How then can we account for these anomalies?

The tough-minded realist may react by questioning the authenticity of these stories, branding them as anecdotal and unreliable, probably even the product of unsound minds. Yet for every case presented here, there remain a vast legion of others which might have been included in their place.

It is this wealth of material, coming from sources which are independent of culture, creed or sex, that become for the serious investigator a tide of evidence that simply cannot be ignored. As Jung himself recognized, they are facts which are in practice “uncommonly important and fraught with consequences.”

What strange vision did Sir Victor Goddard see on that stormy day in 1935? Perhaps it is significant that at the time he saw the hangars at the airfield at Drem, he noted that “the scene was lit with brilliant light” which seemed to him like sunshine. Yet within a few seconds he flew back into the pouring rain.

If we suppose that Sir Victor was blessed with a vision of the future, there remains the nagging point that he distinctly recalled seeing the hangar walls renovated in brick, whereas they actually were rebuilt in steel. His vision, if that is what it was, was not an accurate copy of the future airfield at Drem.

Carl Jung may equally well have had a vision, of a type generally referred to as hallucination. He too was aware of a “mild blue light that filled the room” which he did not question at the time. But if it was hallucination, it was also shared by his lady friend.

However, unlike the experience of Goddard, Jung and his friend did not see some entirely different scene replacing that of customary reality. Only the walls seemed to be superimposed with the magical mosaics, for the baptismal font remained unchanged, as Jung himself recorded.

Graham Conway was not aware of any change in awareness, yet for some ten minutes he watched two figures moving towards him along a snowy road. Although they seemed perfectly real, there were no tracks in the snow.

Did Conway then imagine these interlopers? If so, under what conditions might others also become aware of things and people that are not real? Or were they visitors from another realm, who could be seen but left no marks of their passing?

Strange creatures like the hairy hominid witnessed by David Buckley and John Fuller do leave evidence of their passing, as can be seen from physical traces reported in numerous other cases. Are they hoaxes, or instances of men disguising themselves in Halloween costumes? If so, this would seem to be a hazardous pursuit in a land where the constitution grants every citizen the right to carry arms.

And what of those creatures that seem stranger still, like the elves witnessed by Elizabeth Howard? Were they simply characters generated by the imagination of a childish mind? If so, what could have been the cause for such impromptu carnivals of thought?

Faith healing is a long-established phenomenon, although one that is still hotly debated within medical and scientific circles. Yet cases such as these continue to be reported from generation to generation.

Finally, there remain those experiences that seem to defy all logic and rationality. The inverted tennis ball that so bemused Lyall Watson is just one example of events that confound the accepted laws of physics. We dub them miracles.

These cases remain enigmatic anomalies of science. Many people doubt even the possibility of an event like the train that halted in its tracks to allow two late comers to climb aboard. Such stories are usually dismissed as after-dinner tales of fantasy. Yet cases such as these do occur, and they keep on recurring.

What these stories show is that our existing “laws of science” are seriously flawed. Not only are scientists unable to explain these events, but they simply ignore them and are content to relegate them to a category which they call the “paranormal”.

What these stories do prove, however, is what mystics have been saying for centuries, and that is that the universe is a manifestation of an unlimited principle that is fundamentally free. Because of this, it can never be bound by a pre-determined set of laws. So things that cannot be explained by science not only happen, but will continue to happen.

Furthermore, they claim that life holds out the possibility, for those who have the courage and the resolve, to chart anew their course in life, according to their own desires. And material obstacles like the web that confronted Jorge Lopehandia can be overcome in answer to a need.

For such people, truly nothing is written but the scroll they write themselves. They are free to write their will across the stars.

References

9 Elsie Salmon, “Christ Still Healing”, Arthur James, Worcester, 1956, pp. 61-67.

10 Paramahansa Yogananda, “Autobiography of a Yogi”, Self Realization Fellowship, Los Angeles, 1977, pp. 326-7.

11 Lyall Watson, “Lifetide”, Simon and Schuster, New York, 1979, pp. 17-19.

12 Berthold Schwarz, “Presumed physical mediumship and UFO’s“, in “Flying Saucer Review”, Vol. 31, No 6, p. 21.

13 Jorge Lopehandia, personal communication. 

Allan, Stories That Defy Science, August 9, 2019, 9:53 am

Science That Defy Science – Part Two

In January 1976, Graham Conway took his three children, together with three of their friends, on a short holiday to a Youth Hostel in a valley near Chilliwack, in southern British Columbia, Canada.

Their purpose was to do some cross-country skiing away from the regular trails. On the evening of their arrival in the valley it snowed heavily, depositing some fifteen centimetres (seven inches) of powder snow.

The next morning Conway left the teenagers at the Hostel and set off down an old logging road for Chilliwack Lake, about 2.5 kilometres (1.2 miles) away. As he skied through the snow the temperature rose, melting the powder snow and impeding his progress.

Finally, he reached the lake and rested for a while, enjoying the crystal air and the spectacular scenery. Then, looking at his watch, he realized that he would not be back at the Hostel at his pre-arranged time. He decided therefore that he would make faster time on the return journey if he carried his skis and walked back through the snow.

He returned along the same logging road that he had taken to the lake. Coming down a short, steep hill from the lake, he rounded a bend and had an uninterrupted view some 400 metres (440 yards) down the road ahead. Approaching him in the distance were two figures who appeared to be skiing.

He looked attentively at them and concluded that they were his eldest daughter and her friend. He assumed that she had become concerned over his non-arrival and had set out in search of him, together with her friend. The two figures appeared to be engrossed in conversation.

A short distance later the road dipped slightly, and the girls were lost from view. Coming to the top of the dip, Graham was in time to see the two teenagers cross over from one side of the snow-covered road to the other. Although the couple was now closer, he still could not identify them positively.

After a few moments he decided that they were in fact his youngest son and his friend. He now saw that they were not skiing but were walking through the snow as he was. They still appeared to be engaged in a deep conversation.

Before they had come close enough to enable him to recognize them clearly, the two figures left the road, crossed a shallow ditch, and entered the young forest that bordered the road. At that point Graham assumed that they had left to answer a call of nature.

Continuing his steady walk along the now empty road, he was concerned when they did not emerge from the trees. He was also surprised since he knew how difficult it was to walk though the bush in summer, and that it would be worse in the winter when snow covered the branches, rocks and holes that lay buried beneath.

In the deep snow walking would be a formidable and rapidly exhausting task. Graham mentally marked the position where the two figures had left the road and focused on it as he approached the spot. But when he reached the place where he had last seen the two figures, he was dumbfounded to find that in place of the footprints he expected to see, there was only the unbroken surface of the snow.

Thinking that he might have misjudged the area where they had left the road, he searched the entire stretch. Not a single footprint or trail was visible to mark the passage of the two young people. Apart from the imprints of his tracks, the pristine snow lay as it had fallen on the night before.

Conway returned to the Hostel in a daze and found the teenagers all present. None of them had left earlier in search of him. Later that afternoon he returned to the scene but could find no evidence that two strangers had walked along that road and left it to enter the adjoining forest. They seemed simply to have vanished into the crisp Canadian air. 4

In October 1974, Bill and Jesse Fonda were driving down Interstate 40 approaching Asheville, North Carolina, when they spotted a red-haired young man standing at the side of the road. They stopped to pick him up.

The man introduced himself as Clayton and said that his truck had broken down at a nearby motel. He said he was working on a construction job in the town. He also spoke of his family back in Tennessee and said how much he missed them.

Bill and Jesse felt sorry for the young man as they dropped him off at his motel. Standing outside was a blue, 1959 pick-up truck looking very much the worse for wear. Bill helped Clayton repair the truck – a task which took well into that Saturday night.

Clayton was delighted. As he wiped his hands, he announced that he would have to hurry to get back home, as he had to be back by Monday. Bill and Jesse stood waving as the old truck moved off, sputtering and backfiring.

The manager of the motel came up and joined them. He looked thoughtfully down the highway, and then turned to them and said: “He comes here every year, same week, same day. His truck breaks down. He fixes it and then I see him again next year. He’s such a sad fellow.”

Bill and Jesse happened to live in an apartment a short distance from the motel. When they finally got to bed that night, Jesse was restless and could not sleep. She got up and looked out of the French doors in the living room. The moon was full and as she glanced outside, she caught sight of a blue truck.

She went outside to investigate. There was Clayton. The hood of his truck was up, and he was labouring over it.” Hi, Clayton,” Jesse whispered, “what are you doing back? How did you know we lived here?” Clayton didn’t answer but continued to labour over the engine.

Finally, he stopped, looked at Jesse and said pleadingly, “Please help me get home. I miss my wife and baby. I’ve got to get home.” His eyes filled with tears. Jesse ran back into the apartment to wake her husband. Clayton followed close behind. Bill woke up, irritated, and looked outside. There was no sign of Clayton or his truck.

The Fonda’s forgot about this incident. About a month later, they happened to be driving in the country looking for a house with some land which they could purchase. Suddenly Jesse saw a familiar-looking blue truck in a field.

They stopped the car and walked into the field to investigate. “Wow!” Bill exclaimed, “whoever was in that really got it. Look at those bloodstains. Let’s go ask someone what happened.” They made their way to a nearby farmhouse and an elderly man answered the door. When they enquired about the truck the old man shook his head sadly.

“You must be mistaken about the bloodstains” he told them. “Although the incident is still fresh in my mind, that truck has been there for ten years. It happened the week of the full moon in October. I remember that because it was so light outside. I was shaken from my sleep by a terrible crashing noise about 2.00 o’clock.

I ran out into my field and that blue truck had been knocked out there from the highway by a semi-trailer. The truck driver was okay. He admitted he’d fallen asleep at the wheel. It took us two hours to get the boy out and he cried pitifully the whole two hours, begging us to get him home to his wife and baby.

I remember his red hair and blue eyes. The ambulance came – they had to call from the road because I didn’t have a phone – but the boy died before they got him to hospital. It’s a sad thing, such a strong young man had to die. We never found his wife. He had no identification, not even a tag on his truck. Nobody ever claimed him.” 5

It was an early summer evening in 1979 when Lucille Ruda walked down the beach to the pier about half-a-mile (800 metres) from her new residence in Pacifica, California. The waves lapped gently on the sand and the air was fragrant with salt.

From the pier she watched the distant rocky coves and felt a sense of refuge from the strains of life. She thanked God for leading her to such a tranquil spot. As twilight darkened into night, and the pier light came on, Lucille slowly made her way back.

She ambled down the sidewalk along Beach Boulevard. There was no one else in sight. The two houses at the end of the road were shrouded in darkness. A van was parked some distance away. As she moved towards it, she was startled to see four men carrying beer cans emerge from the far side of the van.

They were young, burly and bearded. She heard one of them say, “Let’s get her,” as they fanned out towards her. Lucille was faced with an open field to her left and a sandy bluff on her right which offered no protection. As the men advanced, she prayed silently for help.

Suddenly she felt something press against her right leg. She looked down and saw a huge white German Shepherd at her side. The men stopped, then retreated. One of them cried, “Jesus! look at that”. Then they all scrambled back into the van.

Lucille felt the warm fur of the animal and admired the dog’s noble head. Its white body glowed in the dark. The dog followed her to her door, licked her hand and then loped off into the darkness. She watched it go until it was lost from sight. Lucille had never seen this dog before, nor did she ever see it again. 6

In August 1982, farmhands David Buckley and John Fuller were about to check on the cows at Valley Farms in Connecticut. It was shortly before midnight. As they made their way through the darkness, they were startled to see a strange creature.

“We almost had a heart attack,” said Buckley. “We were about two feet away from it”. Buckley described the creature as about six-foot-tall, weighing about 300 pounds, with immense muscles. It had long, dark brown hair over its entire body and arms that hung down to its knees. It had ominous dark eyes and a set of dangerous looking teeth. Its nose resembled a human’s rather than a monkey’s snout.

“We walked around the back and we saw it on a feed bunk, sitting right on the edge of it, like a person,” said Buckley. “It was watching the cows and it had its hand in the silage and was either playing in it or eating it.”

The creature turned and got up quickly, saw the two farmhands, and walked slowly towards John Fuller, who screamed in terror. It then veered toward Buckley, with its arms outstretched. Buckley later recalled, “We had the impression he wanted to have us for dinner!”

The creature then turned, ran slowly around the corner of the feeding bins, and then simply “vanished into nowhere.” The two men, who were understandably shaken, ran the other way and immediately called the police. Equally understandably, the State Police at Troop C Barracks in Stafford thought the two men were “stoned”.

After Buckley and Fuller were able to persuade them of the genuineness of their encounter, several troopers searched the area. Nothing was found. Buckley told the police: “I’ve never seen a human with a build like that. Not even the muscle builders. ” 7

In 1963, Elizabeth Howard (pseudonym), who was then about six years old, was out driving with her parents along the Upper Levels highway in the Lynn Valley region of Vancouver’s north shore. It was a day in late spring, and although it was around half-past-five in the afternoon, it was still clear and sunny.

Elizabeth was sitting in the rear section of the family station wagon. On their journey home after visiting her grandparents, they stopped at a Drive-In for hamburgers and milkshakes. Then, having collected their refreshments, they continued driving along the Upper Levels highway.

Elizabeth was in the back seat drinking her milkshake and looking to her left out of the window towards the north shore mountains. As they were passing a bank covered in shrubs, she was astonished to see three little elves climbing up the bank.

She continued to watch them until they passed beyond her field of vision. The elves looked just as if they had stepped out of a Disney movie. They were about two-and-a-half feet in height and were all dressed alike.

Each little elf was wearing a red vest, green and white striped leggings, three-quarter length trousers, brown shoes with up-turned points and a red toque with tassels on the end. They were all carrying picks over their shoulders as they clambered up the bank.

Elizabeth could not believe her eyes and was too shocked to mention what she had seen to other members of her family. She insists, however, that what she saw was real, and that she was not taking any medication at the time. 8

References

4 Graham Conway, personal communication.

5 Jesse Fonda, “I met the real phantom hitchhiker”, Fate magazine, January, 1977, pp. 55-57.

6 Lucille Ruda, “At my time of need”, Fate magazine, October, 1985, p. 50.

7 Janet and Colin Bord, “The Evidence for Bigfoot and Other Man-Beasts”, Aquarian Press, Wellingborough, 1984. pp. 14-16.

8 Elizabeth Howard, (pseudonym), personal communication. 

Allan, Stories That Defy Science, August 1, 2019, 12:41 pm

Stories That Defy Science – Part One

Our world is filled with material objects. These objects have been found by science to exist in certain relationships with one another. From an analysis of these relationships we have built up our scientific laws.

We have learned to explain the action of light, the process of heat, and the force which attract magnets to one another. Western technological civilization has been built upon the practical application of these relationships.

And because the manufactured objects which this technology has produced exist in themselves, they have become evidential proof of the validity of these laws.

Our concept of electricity is reinforced every time a bolt of lightning strikes the earth, or when we operate elevators or appliances. The force of gravity, which allegedly caused an apple to caress the head of Newton, is verified every time we hit a baseball in the air.

Nature too obeys these laws, for we warm ourselves at night beside log fires which convert the kinetic energy stored within the atoms and molecules of the wood into heat.

Our three-dimensional world seems very secure, and the scientific laws which explain the way it works seem as solid as the ground beneath our feet. Our world seems very real, for we have sensed it so, and our scientific knowledge has confirmed our faith.

Yet there are occasions in life when mysterious events occur which seem to defy the solid foundation of our beliefs. Because scientists are not able to explain these events within their normal definition of reality, they tend to lump them together as examples of things that are beyond the normal – the paranormal.

It is these strange events of the paranormal, most commonly described in anecdotal form, that are the keys to a new understanding of reality. They are occurrences that caused the 18th century British astronomer William Herschel to admit that “according to received theories these events ought not to happen.”

Yet they do happen, and they continue to happen. But if we examine them carefully, we will find that they become the facts upon which a new view of reality can be built. This new concept of reality becomes pregnant with power, for it offers up the possibility that we may in fact be able to bend reality according to our will.

Here are a few examples of strange events that defy our normal understanding of reality.

Air Marshall Sir Victor Goddard graduated in science from Cambridge University, and subsequently obtained a post-graduate degree in aeronautical engineering.

In 1918 he became a founder member of the Royal Air Force and Captain of the Airship R.36. In 1935 he was appointed Deputy Director of Air Intelligence in the Air Ministry.

In that same year, Goddard flew to Scotland where he intended to play a round of golf at Gullane by the river Forth. Not far from Gullane was a derelict airfield that had not been used since the first World War and had since been converted into a farm.

It was called Drem. Since he was in the neighbourhood, Goddard decided to drive to Drem to visit the owner of the farm. He wanted to see if it could still be used to land light aircraft in case he came again.

“I found the old air-field divided into many separate pastures by barbed wire, each being well populated with sheep or cattle, and one with pigs. The hangars were then nearing dereliction; they were all in use, as barns for hay and farm machinery, cow byres and chicken runs. It certainly was no longer a fit place for a landing or for housing any kind of aeroplane.”

On the following day, less than sixteen hours later, Goddard flew south from Scotland. The weather was bad. Heavy clouds hung close to the ground and the sky was darkened by pelting rain. Seeking to establish his position, he flew low to the ground. Through the dismal gloom he was able to make out the misty silhouettes of hangars which he thought he recognized.

“Yes, this was Drem airfield, right enough. I recognized the hangars as I crossed the boundary fence at less than thirty feet in driving rain. Then suddenly the scene was lit with brilliant light which I supposed was sunshine.

“The airfield was clear, new-mown and clean, the nearest hangar doors were open and on the tarmac apron, wet from recent rain, stood, parked, four aeroplanes – three biplanes (Avro 504s) and then a monoplane of unknown type.

“Emerging through the hangar doors there was a second monoplane being pushed by two mechanics, one on the tail, one on the starboard wing. All five machines were brilliant yellow chrome. The mechanics who were there, attending them, were all in dungarees of blue.”

Now there were no yellow aeroplanes in service in 1935, nor were there any monoplanes. The mechanics of that time wore brown overalls. But what astonished Goddard most in this extraordinary scene was the complete indifference of the men on the ground to his presence a mere thirty feet above them.

“Not one of them looked up. But they were real men. The unreality to them must then have been myself and my quite physical conveyance. No airman anywhere, on any tarmac in the world – that is, the world we think we know – could then have failed to look at me had I been there for him to see and had my roaring Hawker Hart been there for him to hear. Those airmen did not pay the slightest heed to me or it.”

Goddard sped past the four hangars, and as he cleared the last of these newly renovated buildings, he plunged again into the driving rain. In 1939, with the onset of hostilities brought about by Hitler’s Reich, Drem airfield reopened as a flying training school. It was supplied with yellow Avro 504s and Magisters.

The Magister was a new trainer – a monoplane. It was the exact replica of the monoplane Goddard had seen on that stormy day four years before. None had existed in 1935. Meanwhile, the airmen’s overalls had also been changed. They were no longer brown, but blue.

Air Marshall Goddard may have had a vision of Drem airfield in 1935 in which he foresaw the future as it would turn out to be four years later. Yet there was one small flaw. The renovated hangars that he saw in his vision were made of brick, as they had been built originally.

In 1938 they were actually rebuilt in steel. However, when the plans for the renovation were initially drawn up, it was the intention of the planners to leave the brick structures unchanged. They were later overruled. 1

In 1933, Swiss psychiatrist Carl Jung travelled to Ravenna in northern Italy. Together with a lady friend he visited the tomb of Galla Placidia, a fifth century Empress of high class who had had the misfortune to be married to a barbarian prince.

After seeing the tomb, the two of them proceeded into the Baptistery of the Orthodox. As Jung entered the baptistery, he was confronted by a strange phenomenon.

“Here, what struck me first was the mild blue light that filled the room; yet I did not wonder about this at all. I did not try to account for its source, and so the wonder of this light without any visible source did not trouble me.”

As he gazed around the room, Jung was surprised to see that on each wall was a mosaic fresco of incredible beauty. This was astonishing because on his original visit twenty years earlier, he recalled seeing windows where the frescoes could now be seen. He was vexed to find his memory so unreliable.

“The mosaic on the south side represented the baptism in the Jordan; the second picture, on the north, was of the passage of the children of Israel through the Red Sea; the third, on the east, soon faded from my memory.

“The fourth mosaic, on the west side of the baptistery, was the most impressive of all. We looked at this one last. It represented Christ holding out his hand to Peter, who was sinking beneath the waves.”

Jung and his lady-friend stopped in front of this last mosaic for about twenty minutes, discussing the ritual of baptism, before leaving the baptistery. Jung was so struck by the beauty of these mosaics that he sought to obtain photographs of them. But time was short, and he thought he might be able to order the pictures from Zurich.

When he returned home, he asked a friend who was going to Ravenna to get pictures of these mosaics for him. When his friend returned from Ravenna, he said that he had been unable to locate them. He said that the mosaics that Jung had described to him did not exist! As Jung recalled in his memoirs:

“This experience in Ravenna is among the most curious events in my life. The actual walls of the baptistery, though they must have been seen by my physical eyes, were covered over by a vision of some altogether different sight which was as completely real as the unchanged baptismal font. Which was real at that moment?”

Jung was able to establish that the lady-friend who had accompanied him to the baptistery had seen the same main features of the mosaics. She subsequently refused to believe that what she had seen “with her own eyes” had not existed. Jung added:

“To be sure, it is not a fact which can be scientifically verified and therefore finds no place in an official view of the world. Yet it nevertheless remains a fact which is in practice uncommonly important and fraught with consequences.”

There remains one curious twist to this story. During a stormy crossing from Byzantium to Ravenna in the middle of winter, the Empress Galla Placidia is alleged to have made a vow that if she survived the crossing, she would build a church and have the perils of the sea represented in it. 2

It was Christmas 1960. Tienie Groenewald and his wife Judy, who had recently married, decided to spend the festive season with Judy’s parents. At the time Tienie was a pilot stationed at the Langebaan Air Force base, located just north of Cape Town in South Africa.

Judy’s parents lived in Port Shepstone, a seaside village on the Natal coast, some 1200 miles (1900 kilometres) away. Tienie wrote to his father-in-law saying that he intended to leave Langebaan at about 7am on Saturday, and that he expected to reach Port Shepstone early on the Sunday morning. He was also looking forward to showing off his new car, which his in-laws had not yet seen.

As it happened, Tienie arrived home at about noon on the Friday. As they had already packed, he and Judy decided to begin their journey immediately, instead of waiting until the following day. As they did not have a telephone however, they were unable to warn their in-laws of their decision to leave earlier.

Tienie and Judy took turns in driving and motored throughout the night on their long overland journey. At about 10am on the Saturday morning, they had almost reached their destination. Judy looked forward to surprising her parents by arriving almost a full day earlier than planned.

Yet just as they reached the outskirts of Port Shepstone, she was astonished to see the familiar figure of her father waving to them from his van, which was parked on the side of the road.

As Tienie pulled up alongside the van, his father-in-law greeted them warmly saying, “You are right on time. When I left home a short while ago, I said to the wife, the kids will be here in fifteen minutes. When you get there,” he remarked smugly, “you’ll find the coffee waiting.”

Baffled by this unexpected welcome, Tienie asked him how he knew they would arrive almost a full day earlier. “It was easy”, came the reply, “I simply used my ‘grassie’.”

As he later explained to Tienie, “When I woke up this morning, I wondered whether you had left yet. So I took out my ‘grassie’ (a dried grass stalk that he used as a divining rod). Using a map I directed my thoughts at Langebaan, and asked if you were still there.

“To my surprise I got a negative response. Realizing that you were already on your way, I then focused my thoughts on various points along your route. Each time the answer to my mental question was negative. It was only when I tried just outside Port Shepstone that I got a positive response.

“Knowing that you would soon be here, I called out to the wife to put on the coffee, then jumped into my van and drove off to meet you. The rest you know.” 3

References

1 Victor Goddard, “Flight Towards Reality”, Turnstone, London, 1975, pp. 23-26 and p. 29.

2 Carl Jung, “Memories, Dreams, Reflections”, recorded and edited by A. Jaffe, Pantheon, New York, 1961, pp. 284-287.

3 Tienie Groenewald, personal communication. 

Allan, Stories That Defy Science, July 25, 2019, 10:44 am

Selection # 8 – On the Road to Tibet

This selected entry was originally published here on November 9, 2015.

Scott:  My name is Scott Paton.  I am talking today with Allan Colston.  He is the author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”.  This is a book dealing with prophecy.

For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this Podcast is another in the series “Signs of the Times”.  Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.

Thanks Scott. It’s been quite a while since we last chatted. As readers of my Blog will know, I have had quite a few health issues lately, but I am happy to say that these are over now.

Scott: Well Allan, I’m certainly glad to hear that. So what do you plan to talk about today?

Well Scott, Iran has been in the news quite a lot lately, so I thought this would be a good time to revisit a subject that we have talked about in various Podcasts over the last few years, and that is about Iran and its quest for nuclear weapons.

Scott: I look forward to hearing what you have to say about that Allan, especially since Iran recently concluded a deal with the West on the subject of nuclear arms. Perhaps you could start off by giving us a summary of what that was all about.

Certainly Scott. My pleasure.

As I explained in our Podcast entitled “Persia Reborn“, the land that we now call Iran was once part of a much greater land empire called Persia, which had a long and proud cultural tradition extending back for several thousand years.

However, their traditional system of Government changed in 1979 when the former leader, the Shah Reza Pahlavi, was overthrown as a result of a series of strikes and demonstrations which had effectively paralyzed the country.

It was then that one of the instigators of this revolution, a cleric by the name of Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini, returned from exile in Paris to become the Supreme Leader of the country that now became known as the Islamic Republic of Iran.

The Ayatollah Khomeini showed little interest in developing nuclear energy, and neither did his successor. In fact, the Ayatollah Ali Khamenei, who became the new Supreme Leader in 1989, actually issued a Fatwa, or religious decree in the mid-1990s, banning the use or development of nuclear weapons.

All that changed in 2001, when Islamic terrorists attacked and destroyed the twin towers of the World Trade Center in New York. In response, President George Bush launched bombs and missiles against various Taliban facilities in Afghanistan.

And of course, as we all know, Bush did not stop there. In March, 2003, he ordered US forces to launch an attack on the city of Baghdad, in a mission that came to be known as “shock and awe”, thereby beginning his war against Saddam Hussein and the forces of Iraq.

So in the space of just two years, Iran saw the countries on either side of them attacked by a coalition of Western forces that led to the removal from power of both of their leaders. Clearly, it was time for Iran to act, and act they did.

Scott: So Allan, what did the Iranians do?

Well Scott, although they continue to deny it to this day, the Iranians began their quest to develop nuclear weapons. And as we talked about in our Podcasts titled “Iran’s Nuclear Blunders” and “Nuclear Showdown“, the immediate priority of the Iranian government was to buy time.

The first thing that Iran needed to do was to create an elaborate smokescreen, that was designed to fool other countries into thinking that all they were doing was enriching uranium to the level consistent with that needed to fuel a civilian nuclear power plant.

Secondly, they needed to make sure that the facilities they were building to enrich uranium to the level needed to make atomic weapons, were hidden from the prying eyes of the inspectors of the International Atomic Energy Agency.

As part of their strategy of stalling for time, Iran first entered into a series of long drawn out negotiations with the international community, over whether they should undertake this enrichment process themselves, or whether they should simply import enriched uranium from other designated countries like Russia or the United States.

These discussions dragged on for years without ever reaching a conclusion, which of course was exactly what the Iranians intended. However, things changed in 2006 when the United States as well as other Western nations  imposed severe economic sanctions on Iran.

Over time these sanctions damaged the Iranian economy to such an extent that in November, 2013, they decided to begin a series of formal negotiations with the P-5+1 countries, consisting of China, Russia, France, the UK and the United States, plus Germany and the European Union.

Finally, in July of this year, a formal agreement was reached between the various parties involved that became known as the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action, or JCPOA. And it was this agreement that became the deal on nuclear arms that you were referring to.

Scott: Thanks Allan. That really helps me to understand how it all came about. Which brings me to my next question. What did this agreement have to say?

Well Scott, obviously it had a lot to say. In fact the published text of this Joint Plan of Action ran to 159 pages. But in a nutshell, this is what Iran and the P-5+1 countries agreed:

Iran agreed to eliminate its stockpile of medium-enriched uranium completely, as well as reduce its stock of low-enriched uranium by 98%. It also agreed to reduce the number of its centrifuges by two-thirds for the next fifteen years.

Also, for the next fifteen years, Iran will only be able to enrich uranium to a level of 3.67%, and they will not be able to build any new uranium-enrichment or heavy-water facilities. The existing heavy-water plant at Arak will be converted.

Under this agreement, whatever enrichment activities that Iran does decide to undertake over the next ten years will be limited to a single facility that only uses first-generation centrifuges, and not the more advanced kind which they have been using up until now.

Both parties agreed that all the terms of this agreement would be monitored and verified by inspectors of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), who would be granted regular access to all existing Iranian nuclear facilities, as well as any other sites which the IAEA may wish to inspect in the future.

In return for these conditions, it was agreed that once the IAEA inspectors had verified that Iran had fulfilled all of the above obligations, all nuclear-related sanctions imposed by the United States, the European Union and the United Nations Security Council would be lifted.

This agreement was signed in Vienna on 14 July, 2015. It was immediately hailed by President Obama as a triumph of negotiation, and a victory for diplomacy that would rid the entire Middle-East from the spectre of war with Iran for the foreseeable future.

Unfortunately Scott, this is where things began to unravel, and now just four months later, you have to wonder how the various countries involved in these negotiations with Iran could have allowed the situation to have gone so badly wrong.

Scott: What sort of trouble are you referring to?

In answer to your question Scott, there is an old English proverb that says that anyone who sups with the devil needs a long spoon. What this means is that anyone who deals with a devious person needs to be ultra-cautious, for fear of being harmed.

And those who negotiate with Iran have every reason to be concerned, as subsequent events have now proved. For at the very heart of the Iranian approach to these negotiations was their strategy of “Taqiyya“.

According to the Shi’a practice of Islam, “Taqiyya” is a religious dispensation which permits an individual to commit illegal or even blasphemous acts, as a means of deceiving another in order to gain a future advantage.

The ink was hardly dry on this agreement when Iranian President Hassan Rouhani went on local TV to say that Iran had got everything that it wanted, plus a lot more. For example, his version of this agreement went as follows:

• Our prime objective in entering into these negotiations was to keep our nuclear program intact, and to have all sanctions lifted. This we have achieved.
• At first they wanted to limit us to 100 centrifuges. Now we keep 6,000.
• They wanted restrictions for 25 years. Now it is 8.
• First they said we could only have first-generation centrifuges, now we can have IR6, 7 and 8 advanced centrifuges.
• At first they said that the heavy-water plant at Arak had to be dismantled. Now it will remain under certain conditions.
• At first they said that the underground nuclear facility at Fordo had to be closed. Now it will stay open and we will keep 1,000 centrifuges there.
• All sanctions, including on missiles, will be lifted on the day of implementation. Not just suspended, but lifted completely.

In fact President Rouhani presented such a distorted picture of the final agreement, that one had to wonder whether he had ever paid any attention to the details of what had been negotiated in Vienna. But worse was to follow. Much worse.

Scott: Why do you say that, Allan?

Well Scott, as President Obama went to great lengths to explain to both Chambers of Congress, this agreement is founded not on trust, but on monitoring and verification. In other words, the inspectors of the IAEA will verify that Iran does what the agreement says.

In fact this assurance by Obama was a complete farce. For example, the agreement states that in the event of Iranian violations, sanctions will be re-imposed by all the nations involved. The term that Obama used was that these sanctions would “snapback” into place.

However, Article 37 of this agreement explicitly states: “Iran has stated that if sanctions are reinstated in whole or in part, Iran will treat that as grounds to cease performing its commitments under this JCPOA in whole or in part.”

But it is not just a question of whether or not sanctions can or will be reinstated if Iran fails to abide by the terms of this agreement Scott, the harsh truth of the matter is that the immediate outcome has already begun to fulfill Iranian expectations.

Scott: Can you give us some examples?

Well Scott, as President Rouhani told the Iranian people, his primary purpose in entering into these negotiations was to remove the international sanctions. He had good reason to gloat, for without even waiting for Iran to do anything, numerous nations have already dropped these sanctions altogether.

The United Kingdom has already lifted the ban on 22 Iranian banks and companies that were previously blacklisted. German trade with Iran has risen by 33 percent, making it the Islamic Republic’s third largest trading partner after China.

China has agreed to help Iran build five more nuclear power reactors. Russia has now agreed to deliver S300 anti-aircraft missile systems which were previously banned under the sanctions, and is also engaged in talks to sell them Sukhoi fighter planes.

France has sent its Foreign Minister as well as a 100 person strong delegation to negotiate new business deals, including projects to double Iran’s crude oil exports. India’s trade with Iran has jumped by 17 percent, and is negotiating to build a massive sea and rail hub at the Iranian port of Chah-Bahar.

So as you can see Scott, the international community have not even waited for the starting gun to go off before jetting off to Iran to promote their own trade and commercial interests. So what hope is there that Iran will keep to their nuclear obligations now that sanctions are unravelling by the day.

Scott: So tell me Allan, if the previous sanctions are unravelling as you say, do you think that Iran will continue to honour its nuclear obligations under this agreement?

Well Scott, if the past is any guide, the world should not hold its breath. Iran has not stuck to the agreements it made in the past, so there seems little reason to believe that they will start doing so now.

Take for example the recent missile test conducted by Iran. The agreement had hardly been completed when Iranians announced that they had test-fired a new precision-guided medium-range missile that was capable of delivering a nuclear weapon.

This was a clear violation of the 2010 Security Council resolution banning ballistic missile tests by Iran, as well as a violation of the JCPOA agreement in which they agreed not to launch ballistic missile tests for the next eight years.

So in terms of the principle of “Taqiyya” which I described earlier, this was a classic example of “Gotcha“. “You gullible Westerners fell for the trap we laid out for you“.

That may seem bad enough Scott, but the “worse” that I was referring to earlier, is that Iran has not even agreed to the conditions of the agreement announced with so much fanfare by President Obama.

Scott: What do you mean by that Allan?

Well Scott, the Supreme Leader of Iran, Ali Khamenei, who is the final authority on all matters involving the Islamic State of Iran, has not only not approved the terms of the JCPOA agreement, but he has added new conditions since the original agreement was finalised.

In a letter which he dictated to the Iranian President Rouhani after the agreement had been announced, Khanenei prescribed nine new conditions that would have to be met by the JCPOA, and if they weren’t, Iran would cease to be bound by the terms of the agreement.

Here again we see the principle of “Taqiyya” at work. “We set new conditions that you have to meet, and if you don’t then we will scrap the deal, at the same time telling the world that you were responsible“. Talk about being between a rock and a hard place!

So the bottom line announced by the Tehran Times in its edition dated November 7, 2015, is that any sanctions imposed, or re-imposed, by anyone under any circumstances at any time, will invalidate the agreement, and absolve Iran of the need to fulfill its side of the deal.

Scott: So Allan, let me ask you this. Based on what you have talked about today, do you think that Iran will one day get nuclear weapons?

That’s a good question Scott. Obviously only time will tell. But you may be interested in something that took place some forty years ago. It happened in August, 1974, on the road to Tibet.

I was living in India at the time, and to escape the blistering heat of the Southern plains, I decided to travel up to the mountain kingdom of Kashmir. I ended up spending the entire summer there, moving from one hill station to another.

At the time that this incident took place, I was staying at a tourist bungalow at the hamlet of Sonamarg. This exquisite retreat is located along the main road that winds its way from Srinagar in Kashmir, through the Zanskar mountains of Ladakh, up to the western plateau of Tibet.

On the day in question, the monsoon had begun in earnest, and the rain was coming down in torrents. I had met two students from England a few days earlier, and to escape the deluge the three of us were sitting on the covered veranda of the tourist bungalow, drinking tea.

As we talked, our discussion was interrupted by the arrival of an amazing-looking man. To me, he looked like the living image of the 19th century Russian mystic, Grigori Rasputin. He simply walked in out of gloom, and at our invitation, joined us at our table.

He was dressed in thick sheepskin clothing held together by a large black leather belt. Covering his head was what looked like a fisherman’s oilskin hat, and on his feet were black wellington boots that reached up almost to his knees. He seemed to be in his mid-thirties.

But the most striking feature about this man was his thick black beard and his piercing dark eyes. Once he had settled down and accepted our offer of a hot drink, we asked him where he had come from and where he was going. His answer astonished us all.

He said that he had come from France, and was on his way to visit his Guru who lived in Tibet. When we asked him how he had travelled, he said that he had covered most of the journey overland and on foot, hiking through fields and forests to avoid border officials along the way.

When we asked him what route he had taken, he delved into the heavy rucksack that was slung across his back, and pulled out a large map that was covered in plastic to protect it from the rain. He opened it up carefully and spread it out in front of us.

As he was pointing out the various countries he had travelled through en route, I was struck by an unusual feature which appeared on the map. It was a series of black crosses which were scattered over the map in what seemed to be a haphazard fashion.

You’ll never guest what they were Scott.

Scott: Well I have to admit that you’ve got me there, Allan.

When I asked him what they were he replied: “The crosses mark the places where future nuclear explosions are going to take place“. When I asked him how he knew, he said that his Guru had shown this to him on a previous visit.

Scott: That’s amazing Allan. So where were these black crosses located?

Well this is where things get a little vague. You have to remember that this meeting took place over forty years ago. The other thing is that he sat on the opposite side of the table from me, so the map was upside down. But I remember seeing about five or six of these crosses.

Of course, from the vantage point of my present research, I wish I could have had the chance to ask him more questions. But unfortunately, no sooner had he had finished his drink when he got up and said he needed to be on his way. He vanished into the gloom as mysteriously as he came.

Scott: So tell me Allan, do you remember anything about where these crosses were located?

As I say Scott, from where I was sitting on the verandah that day, the map was pretty much upside down. However I do recall the various countries that were marked on the map, and the crosses appeared to be in Iran, Afghanistan and Pakistan.

As you can imagine, I have thought about that meeting many times over the years, especially in view of my own research into future prophetic events. And from my point of view, this does seem to fit in with Biblical End Time prophecies.

Of course, even if these crosses do mark the location of future nuclear explosions, they don’t indicate the source of these attacks. But based on what we know today, Pakistan already possesses nuclear weapons, and Iran may be close to getting them in the near future.

So to get back to your earlier question Scott, if I were a betting man, I would lay good odds that there will come a time when Iran will succeed in getting nuclear weapons, and will use them in the course of hostilities with neighbouring nations.

Not a pleasant prospect Scott, but as you have heard me say many times, I believe we are now living in the End Times, and that the time of Great Tribulation predicted by Jesus and the Old Testament prophets, will soon be upon us.

Scott: Thanks Allan. This has been a fascinating insight into events that have been taking place recently in Iran, and how they may fit in with ancient prophecies of the “End Times”.

You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”.  Do join us for our next Podcast in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.

Allan, Selections, July 18, 2019, 11:35 am

Selection # 7 – Nuclear Showdown

This selected entry was originally published here on April 20, 2013.

Scott:  My name is Scott Paton.  I am talking today with Allan Colston.  He is the author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”.  This is a book dealing with prophecy. For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this Podcast is another in the series “Signs of the Times”, and is titled “Nuclear Showdown”.

Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.

Thanks Scott. It’s good to be with you again.

Scott:  Allan, in your last Podcast  you talked about Iran and how it is trying to develop nuclear weapons.  Before you go into further detail,  perhaps you could start off by telling listeners what it takes to build a nuclear bomb in the first place.

That’s a good point Scott. Well in theory, building a nuclear bomb is fairly straight forward. Just get the necessary ingredients and then put them together in the right way. However in practice things are not quite so simple. And to understand why we need to go back to Albert Einstein.

As you know Scott, Einstein came up with probably the most famous equation in all of science, and that is E = MC2 . What that means in reality is that all matter is simply a form of energy. In fact, incredibly large amounts of it. Just to give you an example, there is enough energy locked up inside a single airplane ticket to fly a plane around the world several times.

So the trick to making a nuclear bomb is to find a way to unlock this energy, and then unleash it in the form of a bomb. Now as we were taught in school, every atom has a nucleus, or centre. Inside this nucleus are varying amounts of protons and neutrons. And the heavier the atom is, the more protons and neutrons it has.

Scott:  So how do you go about unlocking this energy?

Well Scott, the problem is that most elements in Nature are stable. And because the nuclear force that binds protons and neutrons together inside the atom is so strong, it is extremely hard to get atoms to break apart. In fact, when the United States finally succeeded in doing this in 1945, there were only two ways of doing so. And basically, the same is true today.

The challenge is to find an atom that is large enough to be unstable, and then find a way to cause the nucleus of this atom to break apart. This process of splitting the atom is called nuclear fission. Another important point is that there has to be enough nuclear material available to create what is known as “critical mass” for an explosion to take place.

In a bomb, an initial explosive charge causes more and more neutrons to be released. These neutrons then cause other atoms to break up, causing a chain reaction. So when they break apart, they cause other atoms alongside them to break up as well. And this chain reaction then keeps going until there is so much energy that the bomb explodes.

Scott:   So what materials do you need to make a bomb?

So far only two elements have been found to be capable of causing the chain reaction needed to make a bomb. One element is Uranium, and the other is Plutonium. What makes them suitable for nuclear weapons is that both of these elements have very large nuclei, containing large numbers of protons and neutrons.

Uranium has 238 protons and neutrons, while Plutonium has 239. But what makes it so difficult to build a nuclear bomb in practice, is that neither Uranium or Plutonium are easy to come by.

The reason is that the Uranium ore usually found in nature is a stable element, and is therefore unable to trigger a chain reaction. So to cause an explosion, this ore has to be changed into Uranium 235. It has to be artificially enriched until it is in an unstable state. This is a long process requiring highly specialised equipment known as centrifuges.

Plutonium on the other hand, doesn’t exist in Nature at all, so it has to be made artificially. And the only way to do this is inside a nuclear reactor. So the problem for Iran, as I explained in my last Podcast, is that once they made the decision to build nuclear weapons, they first had to acquire a regular supply of either enriched Uranium or Plutonium, or both.

Scott:  And what did they have to do after that?

They also had to find a way to hide this from the eyes of the world, and from the Inspectors of the International Atomic Energy Agency. Because Iran needed time to develop the fissile material needed to make nuclear weapons, they needed to con the Western world into believing that all they were after was to develop nuclear technology for peaceful purposes.

And so began a carefully choreographed series of negotiations that were designed to go nowhere. And in this they have been brilliantly successful. These negotiations first began in 2003, and they have been consistently going nowhere for the last ten years. The latest round of negotiations were held just two weeks ago in the city of Almaty in Kazakhstan.

Despite two days of intensive negotiations, the EU Foreign Policy Chief Catherine Ashton announced that these talks had also been fruitless. There can be little doubt that this news would have been warmly received in Iran, and their chief negotiator Saeed Jalili would have been highly praised.

Scott:  Why do you say that, Allan?

Well Scott, since the entire purpose of these negotiations has been to keep the Western nations talking, so that they would not have a reason to make good on their military threats, these successive delays have provided Iran with the breathing room needed to acquire the necessary fissile material for making nuclear weapons.

But although Inspectors for the Atomic Energy Agency have so far been unable to visit the various nuclear sites in Iran, they have issued reports which give outsiders a pretty shrewd idea of what has been going on behind the scenes over the last few years.

As I pointed out in my last Podcast, the main locations used by Iran to enrich Uranium are in underground installations located at Natanz and at Fordow. You can also add another one to this, and that is the heavy water reactor in Arak, which is used for the production of Plutonium.

Using Plutonium to generate a nuclear explosion is not new. Although the original atomic bomb that was dropped by the United States on the Japanese city of Hiroshima used Uranium, the next one that was dropped on Nagasaki was a Plutonium-implosion design bomb. The main advantage of using Plutonium in the manufacture of a bomb is that it is a lot easier to create and control the chain reaction process.

And as a matter of interest Scott, all the nuclear bombs belonging to India, Pakistan, Israel and North Korea use Plutonium as a fuel source. So it is easy to see why this would appeal to Iran as well.

Scott:  So does Iran have supplies of both Uranium and Plutonium?

Yes Scott, they do. In fact a recent report in the British newspaper  “The Telegraph” indicated that clouds of steam were recently photographed being emitted from forced air coolers at the Arak plant in Central Iran, indicating that the plant was in full operation.

This is further evidence that the Iranian regime has been pursuing more than one way to build a nuclear weapon. All they have to do now is to enrich the quantities they have already stockpiled to the level needed to create the chain reaction in a bomb. However they do have one final hurdle to overcome.

They have to develop the trigger mechanism necessary to create the first explosive charge within the confined space of the bomb. And this is what they have been doing at their military explosives facility at Parchin, just outside of Tehran, which has also been off limits to nuclear inspectors in recent years.

Scott:  So tell me Allan, do you think that recent events in North Korea have had an influence on Iran?

Absolutely Scott. In fact the two most interested spectators in the whole drama that has been taking place between North and South Korea and the United States have been Israel and Iran – and for totally different reasons.

Iran has been watching the unfolding saga in North Korea very closely, to see how the United States would react if it was challenged by a country that possessed nuclear weapons. And based on what we have seen up to this point, the answer is “very carefully”, so as not to provoke a nuclear showdown.

Israel, by contrast, is watching events in North Korea with increasing alarm. For the way that North Korea has been acting lately is exactly how they have been warning that Iran would behave if they ever acquired nuclear weapons. In other words, Iran would be quick to challenge their enemies and threaten them with thermo-nuclear war.

Scott:  So where do you think all this will end Allan?

Well Scott, my own personal view is that it will end exactly where the Old Testament prophet Ezekiel said it would end. In previous Podcasts, I have quoted from the prophecies of Ezekiel, and his prediction that there would be a coalition of Islamic nations that would launch a land invasion on Israel.

Scott: What makes you say that?

Well Scott, we need look no further than what the Iranians themselves have been saying. Speaking recently to a group of Iranian war veterans, President Ali Khamenei said that Israel would disappear from the (and I quote) “landscape of geography”, and that the country would soon be returned to the Palestinians.

This is only the latest in a long war of words in which Iran has threatened to destroy the land of Israel. And of course the leader of Israel, Benyamin Netanyahu, is a man who does not take these threats lightly.

After all, he grew up with the memory of the Jewish Holocaust still fresh in his mind. He learned from the hard school of history that when a despotic leader announces to the world beforehand that he plans to destroy the Jews, as Hitler did in his book entitled Mein Kampf, then it would be wise to take these threats seriously.

And he certainly is in the forefront of those warning of the threat posed by a nuclear Iran. Another spokesman for this view is Ehud Barak, who was until recently the Israeli Minister of Defence. Speaking in an interview with the Washington Post, Barak said, and I quote:

A nuclear Iran will be the end of the nonproliferation regime. Saudi Arabia will turn nuclear immediately, Turkey within several years, and probably the new Egypt will start moving to do it. Not to mention the potential of weapons-grade material leaking into the hands of terrorist groups from Iran.”

We also need to remember that Israel is not Iran’s number one enemy. The Islamic world has for many years now been split along sectarian lines. One group follows the Shiite sect of Islam, and this faction is led by Iran. The other group consists of Sunni Moslems, and is dominated by Saudi Arabia.

So as Ehud Barak has pointed out, if Iran were to acquire nuclear weapons, there would be an immediate rush by surrounding countries to do the same, and this would inevitably lead to a much more terrifying threat to world peace, quite apart from the danger to the continued existence of the state of Israel.

Scott:  So Allan, if Iran is poised to become a nuclear power, what can the rest of the world do to stop it?

Well Scott, this is where the rubber meets the road. Since it is clear that sanctions alone will not stop Iran from acquiring nuclear weapons, and since North Korea has already shown that a country that has nuclear weapons can effectively thumb its nose at the rest of the world, then the choices facing the West are stark indeed.

During his recent visit to Jerusalem, President Obama made it clear that while he believed that there was still time for diplomacy to work in negotiations with Iran, if these negotiations were to fail, then the United States would (quote) “do what is necessary”.

I leave it to listeners to decide for themselves what Obama means by this. But if the words of Obama are not a sufficient deterrent,  then the response by the Government of Israel should leave no doubt in anyone’s mind. If the United States is not prepared to bomb the nuclear facilities in Iran, then Israel will do so on its own.

So the 64,000 dollar question is this. How long will it take for Iran to explode its first nuclear device? It may be a matter of weeks, or it may be a matter of months. But I personally feel that it will be sometime before the end of this year.

And if this is the case, then the entire Middle East will be plunged into crisis. For you can imagine that if their nuclear sites are successfully attacked, then Iran will do everything in its power to retaliate, and a number of different countries will be in their cross-hairs.

But I will have more to say about all this in my next Podcast. And just a reminder for those people who would like to read my book, it can be reached here

Scott:  Thanks Allan.  You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”.   Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series called “Signs of the Times”.

Allan, Selections, July 11, 2019, 12:07 pm

Selection # 6 – Iran’s Nuclear Blunders

This selected entry was originally published here on January 14, 2013.

Scott:  My name is Scott Paton.  I am talking today with Allan Colston.  He is the author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”.  This is a book dealing with prophecy.

For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this Podcast is another in the series “Signs of the Times”, and is titled “Iran’s Nuclear Blunders”. 

Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.

Thanks Scott. Always a pleasure to talk to you again.

Scott:  Allan, in your last Podcast  you talked about modern Iran, and how it would come to play an important part in future events prophesied in the Bible.  How do you think this will come about?

Well Scott, as I mentioned earlier, what has taken place in Iran over the last few years has not only brought the country to the brink of disaster, but as a result of their nuclear blunders, they have brought the world closer to the very scenario predicted by Ezekiel.

The situation in Iran right now is that the entire country is in a state of crisis, largely as a result of international sanctions imposed by Western countries, in response to Iran’s intransigence, and its apparent efforts to produce nuclear weapons.

Scott:  What sort of crisis are they facing?

A short while ago, Shamseddin Hosseini, who is the Minister of the Economy in Iran, reported that the country was facing a 50% drop in oil revenues as a result of these sanctions.

In addition, many of the country’s imports, such as food and consumer goods, have been drastically reduced. For example, the number of container ships visiting Iran dropped from 378 in 2010, to a little over one hundred in 2012.

And the number of dry bulk ships carrying food, as well as necessary commodities like coal and iron ore, has dropped by 75% over the last two years. Only eight refrigerated cargo vessels carrying fresh produce called in at Iranian ports during the first ten months of 2012. And only five fishing trawlers docked in the same period, down from 20 two years before.

In October the Government announced that traders would no longer be able to export goods like wheat, flour, sugar and red meat, in order to conserve dwindling supplies at home.  And two weeks later, Iran’s Oil Minister announced plans to ration the supply of diesel fuel, in a bid to curb the rampant smuggling of scarce fuel to neighboring countries.

According to the International Monetary Fund, the Rial, which is the main currency of Iran, has lost about 40% of its value against the American dollar since August. And while the official rate of inflation is given as 25%, many economists believe that it is actually closer to 75%.

This reduction in the value of their currency has brought severe economic hardship to citizens throughout Iran. And this has led to the first signs of social unrest, as street protests have broken out recently in various parts of the country.

And in a rare public confession that the Government was struggling under the weight of these international sanctions, the Ayatollah Khamanei was quoted as saying: “These sanctions are barbaric. This is a war against a nation“. And in a predictable show of defiance, he went on to add: “But the Iranian nation will defeat them.”

All of these problems have been brought about by Iran’s biggest blunder, and that is their decision to build nuclear weapons in the first place.

Scott:  But don’t the Iranians say that their nuclear program is designed for peaceful purposes only?

Correct. In fact they have been saying that repeatedly to anyone who would listen, ever since their nuclear program began. But not many countries believe that today. Europe and the United States don’t. Neither do other Arab states. And Israel certainly doesn’t.

The very fact that Iran has been willing to undergo such hardships, and for so long, has sent a clear message to the world that they are determined to develop nuclear weapons as soon as possible, no matter how many sanctions they have to endure along the way.

The ironic thing about their present situation Scott, is that if they had wanted to, they could have succeeded in developing nuclear weapons long ago, soon after they came to power in 1979. The fact that they chose not to do so at that time, has subsequently proved to be yet another in a long series of political and strategic blunders by the religious leaders of Iran.

Back in the 1950’s, at a time when the Shah was the leader of Iran, he launched a nuclear program with the help of the United States that was part of an Atoms for Peace program. Under this program, the Shah approved plans to build up to 23 nuclear power stations by the year 2000.

As part of this program, President Gerald Ford signed a directive in 1976 offering Tehran the chance to buy and operate a US built reprocessing facility for extracting plutonium from nuclear reactor fuel – the very thing that Iran is now trying so desperately to achieve.

However, when the regime of the Shah was toppled by the Islamic Revolution in 1979, the new leader of the country, the Ayatollah Khomeini, cancelled the entire program, saying that it was incompatible with Islamic law.

And following the death of Khomeini in 1989, his successor, Ayatollah Ali Khamanei went even further. He issued a “Fatwa” – or religious edict – saying that the production, stockpiling and use of nuclear weapons was forbidden under Islamic law.

Scott:  So Allan, when do you think Iran decided to go ahead with the development of nuclear weapons?

Well Scott, it is evident that the attitude of the rulers of Iran changed dramatically after 9-1-1. As you will no doubt recall, the response by George Bush to the attack on the World Trade Center, was to launch a full scale invasion of Afghanistan in October 2001.

And if that didn’t cause the Iranians to reconsider the need for nuclear weapons, then the events of March 19th, 2003, certainly did. For it was on that night, as the world looked on, that CNN broadcast live coverage of the US attack on the Presidential Palace in Baghdad.

This destructive display of aerial firepower came to be known by the phrase “Shock and Awe”. There is little doubt that those who were most shocked and awed by this ferocious display of firepower, were the rulers in Tehran.

For in the space of just nineteen months, they had come to witness both the countries on either side of them being attacked by the US. And in each of these cases, the aerial attacks were followed by land invasions, as part of George Bush’s global war on terror.

For a country that had captured US diplomats in the past, and held them hostage for over a year, all the while referring to America as the “Great Satan”, this should surely have caused the rulers in Tehran to ask themselves: “How long before we are next?”

So the impetus to gain nuclear weapons would have gone into overdrive from that moment on. And the reason for doing so was, as I explained in my last Podcast, that no country that has developed nuclear weapons in the past, has ever been attacked by any other state.

The perfect example of this is North Korea. Despite openly flaunting the West, including the United States, and continually threatening to destabilize the area, no nation has been willing to confront them, simply because they are known to have a small stockpile of nuclear weapons.

Scott:  So what has been happening in Iran over the last ten years?

Well Scott, the leaders of Iran were now confronted with an enormous challenge. They not only had to acquire the materials and equipment necessary for the enrichment of uranium, as well as the facilities needed to house them, but they also had to find a way to do so without the rest of the world finding out about it.

And over the last ten years, this has been a saga that would have done justice to any James Bond novel.

The first thing that Iran needed to do was to create an elaborate smokescreen, designed to fool other countries into thinking that all they were doing was enriching uranium to the level consistent with that needed to fuel a civilian nuclear power plant, which is about 5%.

Secondly, they needed to make sure that the facilities designed to enrich uranium to the level needed to make atomic weapons, were hidden from the prying eyes of the inspectors of the International Atomic Energy Agency.

As part of their strategy of stalling for time, Iran first entered into a series of long drawn out negotiations with the international community, over whether they should undertake this enrichment process themselves, or whether they should simply import enriched uranium from other designated countries like Russia or the United States.

When these negotiations inevitably failed, Iran announced that they would now have no choice but to build the enrichment facilities themselves. However, in place of the accepted standard of uranium enrichment needed for civilian nuclear power stations, which was 5%, they announced that they intended to raise the enrichment level to 20%.

When the international community refused to go along with this, and enacted a series of sanctions against them, the President of Iran announced that it was their “inalienable right” to do this. He branded the sanctions as “illegal actions imposed by arrogant powers”.

Scott:  So where does Iran have their enrichment facilities?

Well Scott, Iran now has seventeen sites that are known to be involved in various aspects of their nuclear program. Of these, two are the most important, because they are the ones that contain the centrifuges that do the actual enrichment of uranium.

The biggest of these facilities is known as Fordow, located outside the holy city of Qom, about a hundred miles to the south of Tehran. The other is at Natanz, roughly midway between Qom and the city of Isfahan.

Both of these facilities are underground. The Fordow site is located about 300 feet below the ground, and has been excavated from the inside of a mountain. Fordow is considered to have about 3,000 centrifuges at this time.

Natanz is a hardened Fuel Enrichment plant built about 25 feet underground, that is protected by a layer of concrete some two and a half feet thick, as well as another 70 feet of compacted earth on top of that. There are currently about 7,000 centrifuges installed at Natanz.

The other key location is Parchin. This is a military complex about 12 miles from downtown Tehran. Although Parchin is officially described as a facility for the testing and manufacturing of explosives, there have been reports that it has also been involved in nuclear weapons research.

But although inspectors of the International Atomic Energy Agency claimed in November 2011 that they had credible information that the Parchin facility had been used for implosion testing, their repeated attempts to visit this site have so far been blocked by Iran.

So as you can see Scott, this is not the sort of behaviour that would encourage countries like Israel and the United Sates to believe that the Iranian authorities are simply engaged in peaceful research.

Scott:  So what has the rest of the world been doing about this?

Well Scott, Western countries have been relying for some years now on an escalating series of sanctions, to try to force Iran to give up its nuclear ambitions. But as we have already seen from the response I quoted earlier by the Ayatollah Khamanei, these sanctions only seem to have made Iran even more determined to succeed.

But behind the scenes, almost every kind of covert operation that you can think of has been tried at one time or another, especially by Israel and the United States. And that is why I compare this covert operation to the sort of thing you might read in a James Bond novel.

One of the strategies used was to attack the centrifuges themselves by means of cyber warfare. In June 2010, a computer worm was discovered that came to be known as Stuxnet. Although no one has ever admitted to creating Stuxnet, it is believed to have  been a joint creation of Israel and the US.

Stuxnet was the first system of malware designed to target industrial systems, specifically the Siemens software and equipment used by Iran in their enrichment process. Stuxnet was believed to have rendered hundreds of centrifuges inoperable.

Two years later, another source of computer malware emerged, that also targeted Iranian computers. This one was called Flame. Flame was designed to record audio, screenshots, network traffic and keyboard activity.

This information was then relayed to command and control servers scattered around the world. The Flame virus could also spread to other computer systems over Local Area Networks, or by way of USB sticks, and it is thought to have been responsible for infecting thousands of centrifuges.

But this covert campaign has not been limited to cyber warfare. During the years 2010 and 2011, at least five Iranian nuclear scientists have been killed by unknown attackers. Their favourite MO has been to approach on motorcycles and then plant magnetic bombs on the outside of the cars in which these scientists were traveling.

I have even read stories about specially designed pens containing Radio Frequency ID chips, that have been given to Iranian scientists by visiting dignitaries, that could send radio signals to overhead drones to signal their locations.

As I say Scott, we would probably be amazed if we knew the full extent of this covert operation targeting the Iranian nuclear program. And this is where I feel the Iranians have been guilty of another huge strategic blunder.

Scott:  Why do you say that, Allan?

Well Scott, if their purpose in developing nuclear weapons was designed to protect them from outside attack, then their nuclear enrichment program of the last ten years has been an unmitigated disaster.

Not only has the country been brought to its knees economically, as a result of the severe sanctions that have been applied by the West to all the countries that do business with Iran, but it seems ever more likely that they will invite the very attack that they fear.

I fully expect an aerial attack on Iranian nuclear facilities by either Israel or the United States, or both, before the end of this year. And when that happens, it will set in motion a chain of events that will lead to the very scenario predicted by the prophet Ezekiel.

It still amazes me Scott, that in spite of the fact that we live in such a sophisticated world, with supposedly wise heads governing the affairs of nations, that a situation could arise that exactly matches the words of an old Hebrew man who lived more than 2,600 years ago. But I will have more to say about all this in my next Podcast.

And just a reminder for those people who would like to read my book, it can be reached here

Scott:  Thanks Allan.  You have given us valuable insights into what is going on in the Middle East at this time, and how these events seem to be unfolding according to ancient prophecy.

Allan, Selections, July 3, 2019, 11:57 am

Selection # 5 – Persia Reborn

This selected entry was originally published here on December 2, 2012.

Scott:  My name is Scott Paton.  I am talking today with Allan Colston.  He is the author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac“.  This is a book dealing with prophecy.

For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this Podcast is another in the series “Signs of the Times”, and is titled “Persia Reborn”. Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.

Thanks Scott. It’s a pleasure to be with you again.

Scott:  So Allan, I see that the title of today’s talk is called “Persia Reborn”.  What exactly do you mean by that?

Well Scott, you will recall that in earlier Podcasts I explained that the ancient prophets predicted that our present world age would end in a series of cataclysms brought on by a close encounter with a comet.

Because of the catastrophes that would afflict the earth at that time, and the devastation caused by the global earthquakes and Tsunamis that would follow, the ancient prophets referred to this event as “The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord.”

According to the prophet Ezekiel, this Terrible Day of the Lord would happen after the Jews had returned to the lands of their fore-fathers, and Israel became a nation state once more. As I pointed out in my last Podcast, this occurred on May 14, 1948.

In chapter 38 of his Biblical book of prophecy, Ezekiel went on to say that after Israel had once again become a nation,  it would be threatened by many nations, and that the armies of these nations would surround Israel on every side.

Now if this prediction proves to be correct, in the same way that his prediction about the creation of the state of Israel was correct, then Ezekiel gives us a clear timeline as to when this comet will appear.

So what this means Scott, is that because we now know what to look for, we can study world events and see if they unfold in the way that Ezekiel predicted they would. And that is what I plan to do in succeeding Podcasts.

Scott:  So Allan, how does this relate to Persia?

Well Scott, according to Ezekiel, the great coalition of armies that would march on Israel would come from, and I quote, “the north parts“, and from countries like “Persia, Libya and Ethiopia“.

Of particular interest here, and what I want to talk about today, is Ezekiel’s reference to the land of Persia.

What I find significant, Scott, is that if Ezekiel’s words do prove to be correct, then the old foes of Persia and Israel will once again confront one another, just as they did in Biblical times.

Scott:  So Allan, does that mean we are about to see a replay of the Bible conflicts of the past?

Well Scott, yes and no. For while the modern state of Israel is slightly less than 65 years old, and is similar in many ways to what it was in Biblical times, the ancient empire of Persia has been completely transformed.

For starters, the Persia of old no longer exists. The old empire has been replaced by a new country called the Islamic Republic of Iran. This new republic officially came into being on April 1st, 1979, so modern Iran is just over 33 years old.

It certainly wasn’t like that in Biblical times. For the Persia of old was one of the great empires of the world. Its history stretched back to before the Iron Age, to a time when the western nations of today didn’t even exist.

Ancient Persia has been home to some of the world’s oldest civilizations, with urban settlements dating back to about 4000 years BC. At the height of its golden age, it ruled an area extending from Libya and Spain in the west, to the coast of India in the east.

Over the centuries Persia was ruled by a succession of dynasties, beginning with the Medes, who unified the nation in 625 BC. However, it was later conquered by the invading armies of the Greeks under Alexander, followed by the Arabs, the Turks and the Mongols.

The turning point in Persian history happened between 633 and 656 AD, when the country was invaded by Moslem Arabs. This was the time when their ancient religion based on the teachings of the Prophet Zoroaster, was replaced by the religion of Islam.

After many years of foreign occupation by various invading armies, Persia was once again unified as an independent state in the year 1501, under Islamic rulers known as the Safavids.

But whereas up until that time, most of the population of Persia were Sunni Moslems, under the Safavids they were forced to become Shi’ites, and from then on Shi’a Islam became the official religion of Persia.

Another significant change introduced by the Safavids, was that Persia became a monarchy, and was ruled either by an emperor or a Shah. This system of government continued until up until 1979, when the Shah Reza Pahlavi was driven from power.

Scott:  Wasn’t that the time of the American hostage crisis?

Yes Scott, it was. The revolution actually began in January 1978, when street riots broke out against the increasingly authoritarian rule of the Shah. These disturbances continued throughout that year until, in January 1979, the Shah fled after strikes and demonstrations had effectively paralyzed the country.

On February 1st, 1979, one of the instigators of the revolution, a cleric by the name of Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini, returned from exile in Paris to become the Supreme Leader of the country.

The Shah meanwhile had been diagnosed with cancer, and he traveled to the United States for treatment. This was the pretext used by the Ayatollah to organize students to storm the American embassy in Tehran.

Fifty two embassy personnel were captured when students poured into the embassy compound , and they were held hostage in Iran for 444 days. They were finally released in January 1981, on the day that President Ronald Reagan took office.

Incidentally, it was also at this time that Khomeini began referring to America as the “Great Satan”. However, this ideological slogan proved to have serious consequences for Iran, as it unleashed a powerful anti-Iranian backlash throughout the West that still continues to this day.

And this is where the destinies of Israel and Iran became intertwined once again. For no sooner had Iran become a nation state in 1979, than it became embroiled in civil war, just like the state of Israel had been some 30 years before.

At the time that Israel became a state, the United Nations called for the land of Palestine to be partitioned into two parts. One part was to consist of an independent Arab state, while the other part was to become an independent Jewish state.

The UN also decided that the city of Jerusalem would not belong to either the Jews or the Arabs, but would instead be ruled by an International Trustee System, administered by the United Nations themselves.

Well as you can imagine Scott, this was pretty much a recipe for disaster, and there could have been little surprise when civil war broke out between the Jews and the Arabs the very next day.

Scott:  So Allan, how does this compare with the situation in Iran?

The situation in Iran was slightly different. In their case, the civil war didn’t break out between Iranians and non-Iranians, but between the Iranians themselves. The revolution was between supporters of the Shah, and those who aligned themselves with the Ayatollah.

The revolution itself was relatively short-lived, as the Pahlavi dynasty of the Shah collapsed when the military declared its neutrality a short while later. And the country officially became an Islamic Republic when the people approved a national referendum on April 1, 1979.

But this didn’t bring an end to the fighting. Soon after, Marxist guerillas joined rebels in various parts of the country, engaging in fierce fighting with government forces. The most violent of these revolts was the Kurdish uprising, which led to thousands of casualties.

It was while Iranian Government forces were embroiled in defeating their internal enemies, that Saddam Hussein tried to take advantage of the ongoing political and social crisis, by launching a full scale assault on Iran.

On September 22, 1980, the Iraqi army invaded Iran at Khuzestan, which took the leadership of Iran completely by surprise. This was the beginning of the Iran-Iraq war which was to last for six years, and cause almost a million casualties in Iran.

And it was out of this conflict that the seeds were planted that would lead, some thirty years later, to the armed confrontation that now exists between the states of Israel and Iran.

And this unfolding saga has proved to be as devious, twisted and malign as the plot of any fiction novel.

Scott:  I sense that you’re about to take us on a James Bond type ride. Am I right?

That’s a good analogy Scott, because the intrigue associated with the Iranian manoeuvres over the last few years would easily rival any spy story.

But to go back to the time of the Iran-Iraq war which finally ended in 1988, Iran’s neighbor Afghanistan was involved in a battle of its own, with US backed mujahadeen  fighting Soviet forces in a conflict that ultimately cost the Afghans over a million lives.

And having just emerged from a costly war of its own, both in terms of casualties and resources, the overriding concern of the Iranian leadership at that time was to find a way to avoid being over-run by either of these two superpowers.

This fear was undoubtedly reinforced some years later when the Americans attacked Iraq, and destroyed the forces of Saddam Hussein. So in short order, the leadership in Iran saw both of their neighboring countries, Iraq and Afghanistan, being invaded by American troops.

So Iran now found itself in the same position that Israel had been some thirty years earlier. And their response to their predicament was to do exactly what the Israelis did. I suspect you can probably guess what that was Scott.

Scott:  Well Allan, my guess would be that they decided to build an atom bomb.

Pretty shrewd Scott. You’re right. As history has now shown, both nations decided to adopt the same strategy to protect themselves from the forces ranged against them. They decided to develop nuclear weapons.

And the reason they did this was simple. Iran realised, just like Israel had learned before them, that those countries that had their own nuclear capability were safe from attack, both from the West and from the East.

Outside of the main nuclear nations of the West, allied with China and Russia, only four countries have developed the capacity to produce nuclear weapons. These four are India and Pakistan, along with Israel and North Korea.

Of these four nations, only Israel has never publicly admitted to having nuclear weapons, choosing instead to follow a policy of ambiguity. Under this policy, Israel neither admits or denies that it has nuclear weapons, even though this is now taken for granted by its enemies.

From a defensive standpoint, perhaps the best example of the protective power of nuclear technology, is the country of North Korea. Ever since they exploded a small nuclear device in October 2006, North Korea has been safe from outside attack.

This despite some of the most provocative behaviour by any nation, and despite continuing threats to the people of South Korea. The fact that North Korea could effectively do whatever they liked, and thumb their noses at the rest of the world, has not been lost upon the leaders of Iran.

And if there were any doubts about the effectiveness of this strategy, they have surely been laid to rest by the recent overthrow of Muammar Gaddafi in Libya. Shortly after Gaddafi seized power in a military coup in 1969, he tried to obtain nuclear technology.

Although his initial efforts met with failure, over the years he managed to acquire both the expertise and the fissionable material needed to succeed.

However, shortly after the attack on the World Trade Centre in 2001, Gaddafi surprised everyone by announcing that he had decided voluntarily to eliminate his stock of chemical weapons, and to stop the production of nuclear material.

This later proved to have been a critical mistake, because if he hadn’t done this, it is unlikely that NATO would have risked intervening in the Libyan crisis that led to his death, and the collapse of his authoritarian regime.

Scott:  So Allan, how does this tie in with what happened in Iran?

Well Scott, Like Gaddafi, the Ayatollah Khomeini no doubt saw the value of having nuclear weapons. But partly as a result of his religious dogma, and partly because of an amazing sequence of strategic blunders, Iran has stumbled from crisis to crisis.

As I suggested earlier, what has taken place in Iran over the last few years would surely rival any James Bond novel for deception, mystery and intrigue.

In following Podcasts, I want to talk about some of these blunders and explain firstly, why the present strategy in Iran has brought the country to the brink of disaster, and secondly, how this will likely lead to the precise scenario predicted by Ezekiel.

And just a reminder for those people who would like to read my book, it can be reached here

Scott:  Thanks Allan.  You have given us some fascinating insights into what is happening today in the Middle East, and how these events seem to be unfolding according to ancient prophecy.

Allan, Selections, June 26, 2019, 1:49 pm

Selection # 4 – Land of the Covenant (Part One)

This selected entry was originally published here on December 5, 2015.

Scott: My name is Scott Paton.  I am speaking today with Allan Colston.  He is the author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”.  This is a book dealing with prophecy.

For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this Podcast is another in the series “Signs of the Times”.  Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.

Hello Scott, how are things with you?

Scott: Great, thank you. As you will no doubt recall Allan, at the end of our last Podcast about ISIS, I asked you what would happen to the Jews. You said that that was a topic for another time, so I was hoping that you could perhaps elaborate on that today.

Certainly Scott. My pleasure. But before I do that I would just like to say that I remain convinced that the Biblical description of the origin of Judaism is one of the most bizarre accounts in the history of civilization.

Much of what has happened to the Jews over the millennia simply defies rational understanding. So before I talk about the future of Israel, I think it would help to go back and review some of the extraordinary things that have happened in the past.

The Old Testament of the Bible is full of improbable stories that prompt more questions than they provide answers. For example, according to the eleventh chapter of the Book of Genesis, after the time of the Biblical flood, it says that “the whole earth was of one language, and of one speech“.

At that time the descendants of Noah said to themselves: “Go to, let us build us a city and a tower, whose top may reach unto heaven; and let us make us a name, lest we be scattered abroad upon the face of the whole earth“.  Then in verses 5 to 8 we read:

And the LORD came down to see the city and the tower, which the children of men built. And the LORD said, behold the people is one, and they have all one language; and this they begin to do: and now nothing will be restrained from them, which they have imagined to do.

“Go to, let us go down and there confound their language, that they may not understand one another’s speech. So the LORD scattered them abroad from thence upon the face of all the earth: and they left off to build the city“.

Now Scott, this is one of the most intriguing stories in the entire Bible, and it raises a whole series of questions for which we simply have no answers.

• What exactly were these descendants of Noah trying to do, and why was this so offensive to the LORD?.
• Who was this LORD the Bible was referring to anyway?
• Who were the “us” who proceeded to scatter the descendants of Noah upon the face of the earth, and then cause them to speak in a host of different languages?
• And how exactly did they accomplish such a stupendous feat?

Let’s just think about that for a moment Scott. How do you manage to scatter an entire people all over the earth, and in the process cause them to forget their mother tongue and replace it with a language that is completely different? It just boggles the mind. At least it boggles mine.

Scott: So who do you suppose these people were?

I really have no idea Scott. But there is another strange story in the Book of Genesis that may give us a clue. In chapter six we read the following:

And it came to pass, when men began to multiply on the face of the earth, and daughters were born unto them, that the sons of God saw the daughters of men that they were fair; and they took them wives of all which they chose.

“And the LORD said, My spirit shall not always strive with man, for that he also is flesh: yet his days shall be an hundred and twenty years. There were giants in the earth in those days; and also after that, when the sons of God came in unto the daughters of men, and they bare children to them, the same became mighty men which were of old, men of renown“.

One of the things I find particularly interesting is that in the King James version of the Bible, the word LORD here is spelled in capital letters, just like it was in the story of the tower of Babel. Could this possibly refer to his rank, and could this LORD possibly be the leader of the “sons of God”?

And could these “sons of God” be the same beings who were so outraged when the descendants of Noah began to build their great tower? And were these “sons of God” giants, and if so where did they come from and where did they go?

Notice Scott that in the above quotation the LORD said that his spirit would not always strive with man, because “he also is flesh”. This certainly suggests that the LORD was not some supreme deity, but was made up of flesh and blood himself. This is a point I will return to later.

So do you see where I am going with this Scott? There is something decidedly other-wordly about many of these stories. You might even say that they are “out of this world”.

And this brings me to something that I have studiously avoided in all the years that I have been writing my Blog, not only because it has long been the butt of ridicule, but also because there is now so much disinformation surrounding the whole subject that most people assume it is all a hoax.

Scott: So what exactly are you referring to Allan?

The subject I am referring to Scott is UFO’s. Now before you and other listeners think that I have finally lost my marbles, let me emphasize that I am being perfectly serious about this, and I have a special reason for introducing this topic into our discussion.

Obviously the subject of UFO’s has been debated endlessly over the last fifty years or more, and is a topic that invariably generates far more heat than light. I just want to cut to the chase and mention the name of someone you have probably never heard of before Scott. His name is Clifford Stone.

Scott: You’re right there Allan. So what does he have to do with the history of the Jews?

Well Scott, Clifford Stone is one of those people that I could talk about for hours. But since we don’t have the time I’ll try to be brief. However, for the sake of those people who follow these Podcasts on my Blog, I’ll put a link there so that they can read more about him if they wish.

Clifford Stone is an American who was born in Ohio. At an early age he had memories of being contacted by ET’s. At the age of eight he was befriended by an Air Force captain, and this was the beginning of his association with the military. During the Vietnam war he tried to enlist in the US Air Force.

When Clifford was turned down by the Air Force as a result of a skin condition, his friend suggested that he try to join the Army instead. He did so and was selected for the job of clerical typist. But to his surprise, he hardly got to type a single letter.

Instead, a few weeks after joining the Army he was picked up in a staff car and taken to the Pentagon. From there he was moved by means of an underground shuttle to a location where he was told that he had been specially chosen for a secret assignment.

His assignment was to interact and communicate with extraterrestrial beings who were housed at this secret location. During the 22 years that Clifford spent with the Army, he also formed part of an elite group whose task was to recover crashed UFO’s and their occupants.

Since his retirement, Clifford has conducted numerous interviews describing his experiences with alien beings. In these discussions he has indicated that he personally knew of 57 different types of alien beings that had been in contact with the earth.

So if Clifford Stone is to be believed, alien beings are real and they are visiting our planet at this time. Obviously we can only speculate as to what their motives are for doing so. But the reason why I believe that his stories are true is because I have seen UFO’s myself on three different occasions.

So the point I want to make here Scott is this. If many different types of alien species are visiting the earth today, then they could well have visited earth in the past. And if they are communicating with us now, they could just as easily have communicated with those people who were alive then.

And so we need to examine many of the Bible stories to see if they can shed any light on possible human and alien interactions. And this brings me to what is undoubtedly the strangest story of them all, and that is the saga of Moses.

Scott: Why do you say that Allan?

Well Scott, I think most people are familiar with the story of Moses, and how he was called upon by God to rescue the children of Israel from bondage in the land of Egypt, and then lead them to a promised land flowing with milk and honey.

What most people seldom stop to consider is that the LORD who commanded Moses to carry out this mission, begins to look more and more like an extraterrestrial being, rather than the everlasting Deity. He also seems to be someone who clearly had an agenda of his own.

One of the most striking features of the Bible is the difference between the God of the Old Testament and the God of the New. While the God of the New Testament is portrayed as an all-loving God, the God of the Old Testament seems more like a choleric martinet.

The LORD God of the Old Testament insists on obedience. He is jealous of any other rivals and is quickly roused to anger. He is also ready to seek vengeance on anyone who disobeys him. Certainly he comes across as an entity to be feared, rather than a God who is all-loving.

While the God of Jesus loves all of humanity to the point that he is even prepared to sacrifice his own Son upon the cross, the LORD of the Old Testament orders Abraham to offer up his own son Isaac as a human sacrifice, no doubt as a test of his faith, or should that perhaps be his ability to follow orders?

And whereas the God of Jesus embraces not only the Jews but also the Gentiles, or those people born outside of the Jewish faith, the LORD makes a covenant or pact with one specific tribe of people, and then announces that they are his chosen ones above all others.

As recorded in the 14th verse of the 4th chapter of the Book of Exodus, when Moses argues with the LORD saying that he doesn’t have the eloquence needed for the job of convincing Pharaoh to set the Jews free, we read that the anger of the LORD was kindled against Moses. I mean relax… calm down!

But things get even stranger, for in verse 24 of the same chapter we read that: “It came to pass by the way in the inn, that the LORD met him (referring to Moses), and sought to kill him“. Now I don’t know about you Scott, but I always get a tad edgy when I read about Gods who try to kill people.

Scott: So Allan, are you saying that the God who spoke to Moses wasn’t divine?

Well here’s the rub Scott. The stories about the behaviour of the LORD of the Old Testament are not the sort of thing that I would expect from an eternal God or heavenly father, as has been described by Jesus in the New Testament. At least not by today’s standards of morality.

In the passage about Moses that I just described, we see the same reference to the LORD, again spelled in capital letters. While I am prepared to concede that Jehovah or Yahweh might well represent Deity, I am troubled by these questionable actions that are ascribed to the LORD.

Then again, the above passage says explicitly that the LORD met Moses on the road to the inn. Does that mean that the LORD was actually a flesh and blood person? And if so, does this relate to the passage I discussed earlier, where the “sons of God” said that they were flesh and blood like us?

All of these stories make me wonder whether a race of alien beings might have arrived on the earth in the distant past posing as divine beings, and then used their advanced intelligence and technological knowhow to impress and manipulate the local population into obeying their commands.

Anyway, to get back to the story of Moses, when he returns to Egypt and orders Pharaoh to let the Jews go, he refuses. As the LORD explains to Moses, this is because he (the LORD) has hardened Pharaoh’s heart. So he decides to bring about a series of plagues upon Egypt as punishment.

Now most people who read the Bible are left with the impression that the plagues that assailed Egypt at that time were a series of miracles ordered by the LORD, in order to change Pharaoh’s mind. Several millennia later, it was left to another Jew to explain what was really going on at the time.

In his book Worlds in Collision, written by the Jewish research scientist Immanuel Velikovsky, he explains that the plagues of Egypt were not miracles at all. They were actually the natural consequences of a close encounter between the earth and a large comet. I talk about all this in our Podcast # 11.

And then Scott, there is the mystery of the pillar of cloud by day, and the pillar of fire by night.

Scott: So what can you tell us about that?

When Moses led the children of Israel out of Egypt, the land was shrouded in darkness. As Velikovsky explains in his book, the reason why the earth was in darkness was because it was immersed in the gaseous tail of the comet which enveloped the earth in a veil of gloom.

Yet despite this hardship, it seems that the LORD was able to provide some timely help to Moses and his wandering band of Israelites. Verses 21 and 22 of Chapter 14 of the Book of Exodus explain this in the following way:

And the LORD went before them by day in a pillar of a cloud, to lead them the way; and by night in a pillar of fire, to give them light to go by day and night. He took not away the pillar of the cloud by day, nor the pillar of fire by night, from before the people“.

So I ask you again Scott, what on earth do you think was going on here?
Now maybe I have too wild an imagination, but I have come across something that looks remarkably similar to what is described in this passage in photographs of the so-called cigar-shaped UFO’s that were common in the 1950’s.

They were able to disguise themselves in atmospheric clouds during the day, but at night they were illuminated by the glow of the energy fields of the craft. In fact almost all UFO’s glow brightly at night, and this is the reason why these sightings are referred to as LITS – Lights in the Sky.

There is an even more telling passage taken from the Book of Exodus in Chapter 33 verses 9 to 11.

And it came to pass, as Moses entered into the tabernacle, the cloudy pillar descended and stood at the door of the tabernacle, and the Lord talked with Moses.

“And all the people saw the cloudy pillar stand at the tabernacle door: and all the people rose up and worshipped, every man in his tent door. And the LORD spake unto Moses face to face, as a man speaketh unto his friend

So Scott, the above passage alone should make it obvious that the cloudy pillar was actually a vehicle of some sort, and that the LORD used it as a means of conveyance. And the kicker here is that all the Israelites saw the LORD speaking to Moses face to face, like a man speaking to a friend.

So here we have a passage that provides compelling evidence that the LORD of the events described in the Book of Exodus appeared as a physical being, or someone who had the power to look like one, and who travelled in a craft of some sort. But of course Scott, there is more.

Scott: Carry on my friend. This is certainly far out.

Well Scott, this LORD was not content to act merely as a guide to the wandering Israelites. He also assumed the role of teacher and technological Guru, as we can see from the detailed instructions that he gave to Moses on how to build an Ark.

Unless the Ark is recovered one day from wherever it was hidden in antiquity, we will probably never know exactly what it was or what it was used for. However, we do know from Biblical accounts that it could be used as a weapon, such as the time when it was used to bring down the walls of Jericho.

It is clear that it generated some type of force field, which was the reason why Moses was warned never to allow others to approach it too closely. Finally, when the great temple was built by Solomon in Jerusalem, a special room was set aside in the Holy of Holies in order to house the Ark.

Another aspect about the Ark that I find intriguing is the fact that two Arks are mentioned in the Bible. One was the Ark built by Noah and the other was the Ark built by Moses. The Ark that Noah built was used as a means of salvation, while the Ark of the Covenant was used as a means of destruction.

Which brings us to the pinnacle of the LORD’s agenda in his dealings with Moses and the children of Israel, and that was to act as their Teacher and Lawgiver.

Scott: Let me guess Allan. Are you referring here to the Ten Commandments?

Absolutely Scott. If there is one thing we can say about the LORD who spoke to Moses, it is that he liked giving orders. The second is that he was a micro-manager, for we have chapter after chapter devoted to the minutiae of how the Israelites were commanded to live every aspect of their lives.

And the laws that the LORD proclaimed to Moses did not only apply to the men and women, but to their sons and daughters, their man-servants and maid-servants, as well as any strangers who might happen to be living with them. These laws even applied to their cattle.

The LORD was at his best itemising every tiny detail about how the Israelites should conduct various ceremonies, sacraments and ritual sacrifices. And naturally, everything that the LORD told Moses was dutifully passed on to his followers. You can find them all set out in the first five books of the Bible.

Of course what we remember most about the encounters between the LORD and Moses are the Ten Commandments. After the children of Israel had been wandering in the desert for some months, they arrived at Mount Sinai. The Bible records how Moses climbed the mountain to commune with the LORD.

As we read in the Book of Exodus, Chapter 24, verse 12: “And the LORD said unto Moses, come up to me into the mount and be there, and I will give thee tables of stone and a law, and commandments which I have written, that thou mayest teach them“.

And we all know what happened next Scott. Moses was on the mountain for forty days and forty nights. Now we have to remember that he was already over eighty years old at the time, so it is no surprise that when he didn’t reappear for over a month, his followers gave him up for dead.

So naturally, they then did exactly what anyone could have predicted. Believing they would never see Moses or the LORD in the flesh again, they resorted to their old habits when they were in Egypt. They created a calf out of gold earrings to be the focus of their worship and prayers.

When Moses did finally return, carrying with him the tablets of stone on which were inscribed the Ten Commandments, he was outraged to find his followers engaged in revelry. He hurled the two stone tablets to the ground, where they were smashed into tiny pieces.

This could have been highly embarrassing for Moses, but fortunately the LORD came to his rescue with two more stone tablets to replace them. I would sure love to know Scott, just what might have been said between the LORD and whoever it was who had to carve these laws all over again.

Scott: I have to admit it must have been an interesting situation.

The laws that Moses received on the stone tablets were a series of basic rules that the Israelite were commanded to live by. There were ten of them. Based on what we have already learned about the LORD so far, it is no surprise to find that the first three rules related to the LORD God himself.

The LORD proclaimed on these stone tablets that he was a jealous God who would tolerate no competition from any other God or graven images, nor could anyone take his name in vain. Also not surprisingly, seven out of the ten commandments began with the words “Thou shalt not…”.

On the positive side, the Israelites were commanded to honour their parents and keep holy the Sabbath day. Now I am the first person to enjoy a day off now and then Scott, but the LORD of Moses insisted that the Israelites obey this commandment to an extreme degree.

The LORD set out a litany of things that the Israelites were expressly prohibited from doing on a Sabbath, using as his reason the fact that God took six days to create the heavens and the earth, and that on the seventh day he rested. And this commandment applied to everyone, even the cattle.

It is interesting to compare the commandments of the LORD of Moses with those of Jesus. Whereas most of the commandments consisted of things the Israelites were forbidden to do, Jesus simply demanded that people love God with all their heart, soul and mind, and love their neighbours as themselves.

Obviously Scott, this is not the place to compare Christianity and Judaism. However, there is one point on which both Christians and Jews do agree, and that is the commandment not to kill. Yet the fact is that no sooner had Moses descended from Mount Sinai, than he gave the order to kill.

As we read in the Book of Exodus, Chapter 32, verses 26 to 28:

“Then Moses stood in the gate of the camp and said, who is on the LORD’s side? Let him come to me. And all the sons of Levi gathered themselves together unto him.

“And he said unto them, thus saith the LORD God of Israel, put every man his sword by his side, and go in and out from gate to gate throughout the camp, and slay every man his brother, and every man his neighbor.

“And the children of Levi did according to the word of Moses: and there fell of the people that day about three thousand men.”

The Bible doesn’t say what the LORD’s reaction was to this massacre. Presumably he approved since he went on to prescribe a host of other laws which included: “And if any mischief follow, then thou shalt give life for life, eye for eye, tooth for tooth, hand for hand, foot for foot.” (Exodus Chapter 21: 23,24)

People today express their revulsion at what they consider to be the barbarism of modern Sharia law, where thieves have their hands chopped off and adulterers are stoned to death. But under the law of Moses, Jews were doing the very same thing two thousand years before.

Anyway Scott, my purpose here is not to denigrate the Jewish religion. I merely want to point out some of the mysterious anomalies associated with their early history, as well as some of the unusual behaviour displayed by the LORD in his dealings with Moses.

Of course, as far as their past is concerned, the Jews have had to endure more hardships than perhaps any other people. Although they have always been assured that that they are the chosen ones of the LORD, it might be more accurate to say that they have been the victims of the LORD.

Scott: Why do you say that Allan?

Well Scott, the LORD promised Moses that he would lead the Israelites to a land flowing with milk and honey. But let’s face it, the place he led them to has turned out to be the most fought over piece of real estate on the planet. And then there are the incredible hardships that the Jews have had to face.

Their people have been led into captivity, not just once but twice. Their great temple in Jerusalem, hailed as one of the great places of worship of their time, was utterly destroyed – firstly by Nebuchadnezzar the king of Babylon, and then again in the year 70 A.D. by the Romans.

Their people have been driven out of their own land to every corner of the world where they have had to endure abuse, hostility and oppression. Even Shakespeare used the moneylender Shylock in his play The Merchant of Venice as an example of corruption and personal avarice.

What prompted Hitler to target the Jews and wipe out six million of them in the holocaust? The Jews have their faults like any other people, but they never did anything to warrant such extreme slaughter. And now there is Iran. What did the Jews ever do to incur the wrath of the Ayatollahs?

No Scott, there is something sinister happening here, and it has been going on for thousands of years. I would like to think that now that the Jews have at last returned to their ancestral land, that they face a better future. Unfortunately, the prophets of old suggest that even worse lies in store for them.

Well Scott, I’m sorry to have taken up so much of our time talking about the past, but in our next conversation I will focus on what Biblical prophecy has to say about the future of Israel.

Scott: Well Allan, I think I can honestly say that this has been the most extraordinary Podcast we have ever done together. You have truly blown my mind. In fact I hardly know what to expect in our next discussion.

You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”.  Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series titled “Signs of the Times.”

Allan, Selections, April 25, 2019, 11:46 am

Selection # 3 – Why America is Not Mentioned in “End Time” Prophecy

This selected entry was originally published here on September 30, 2014.

In a Poll conducted toward the end of last year by the Barna Group, a research firm that focuses on matters of religious faith, it was reported that 41% of Americans over the age of 18 believe that the world is currently living in the “End Times” period, as prophesied in the Bible.

Yet the Poll revealed an interesting dichotomy. While 77% of those people who consider themselves to be Evangelicals supported this view, an almost equal percentage of people who profess to be Catholics (73 %), felt that the “End Times” are not upon us at this time.

But while there may be conflicting opinions about whether or not we are now living in Apocalyptic times, both groups were in agreement on one point. And that is the question: “Why is there no mention of the United States of America in “End Time” prophecy?

In fact, Pastors, Preachers and Ministers from across the United States confess that this is the question that is most commonly asked of them by their congregations. It is an enigma that appears to defy conventional explanation.

As noted in Charisma Magazine, when the New York Times best-selling author Joel C. Rosenberg tells his audiences that America is not mentioned in Bible prophecy, many ask in amazement how the wealthiest, most powerful nation in history can play no part in the events of the Last Days.

While numerous countries are specifically mentioned in Biblical texts concerning the events of the Last Days, such as Israel, Libya, Egypt, Ethiopia, Persia, modern Turkey and Iraq, as well as references to Russia and even China, there is nothing at all about America.

As Joel Rosenberg himself explains:

The Bible doesn’t say what happens to us. But by the absence of us being clearly defined in the text, it means something has happened. The question is what—what will happen to us that will neutralize our ability or desire to be an influential player in the last days of history before the return of Jesus Christ?” (View source)

Billy Graham, doyen of American evangelists, has for many years warned that the world is living in the End Times, and that the Second Coming of Jesus is not far off. His son Franklin, has gone even further. He predicts that America is about to experience God’s wrath because of its wickedness.

In the last four years, we have begun to turn our backs on God. We have taken God out of our education system. We have taken him out of government. You have lawyers that sue you every time you mention the name of Jesus Christ in any public forum.

“What has happened is we have allowed ourselves to take God out everything that we do – and I believe that God will judge our nation one day“. (View Source)

Exactly what form this judgement will take is something that Franklin Graham has not gone on record to say. But that has not stopped numerous other preachers around the country from weighing in with their own opinions.

For example, Greg Laurie, who is Pastor of the Harvest Christian Fellowship in Riverside, California, contends that there are three plausible reasons why America does not feature in End Times prophecy. The first is that the United States might be devastated by a nuclear war.

In support of this possibility, he cites the continuing threat posed by Russia, as well as other hostile nations that now possess, or may soon possess, nuclear weapons. He even foresees the possibility of a series of nuclear strikes carried out by terrorist organizations.

The second reason quoted by Laurie is that the country may simply decline as a world power. As he writes:

As our country becomes more and more secular, systematically eliminating God and the Bible from our education system, courts, and the arts we will begin to reap the inevitable results of sin. We will begin to rot from the inside“.

Laurie suggests a third reason why the United States is not mentioned in Scripture, and that is because the country might experience a great religious revival, which could lead to a vast number of its citizens disappearing off the earth at the time of the end. As he writes:

When the Rapture of the church takes place, don’t you think there would be an impact on the United States if 78 million people disappeared? If people in every level of government, the military, the economic sector, business, agriculture, medicine and communications suddenly disappeared from the face of the earth, it undoubtedly would have a crippling effect on our infrastructure as a nation.

For all practical purposes, when the Rapture takes place, it will impact every nation. It will cause the entire world to suddenly shift. This could be the scenario for the United States in the last days“. (View Source)

Unfortunately, not everyone who studies Bible prophecy is as sanguine about the future of America as Laurie is. Others suggest dire scenarios ranging from economic and political chaos, caused by the collapse of its debt-based economy, to military defeat at the hands of the armies of the Anti-Christ.

What all of these Biblical preachers share in common is that they base their views solely upon the writings of Scripture, believing them to be the direct word of God, and the final authority on all matters relating to the Last Days before the return of the Christ.

Yet if they could only bring themselves to be a little more eclectic in their research, these good Christian ministers might well discover the true answer to the question of why the United States does not appear to play any part in the End Times prophesied in the Bible.

Within the span of the last hundred years or so, there have been two men who have demonstrated a profound insight into the future of the North American continent, as well as what will happen to it in the coming years. Perhaps fittingly, both of these men were born in America.

The first of these unusual men was Edgar Cayce. While there are many people who acknowledge Cayce today as an important mystic and healer, there are relatively few Americans who actually know much about who he was, what he did, or how he did it.

Edgar Cayce was born in Hopkinsville, Kentucky, in 1877, and died in 1945 at the age of 67 at his home in Virginia Beach, Virginia. Those who do recall his name tend to associate him with the best-seller written about him in 1967 by author Jess Stearn, who called him “The Sleeping Prophet“.

Yet the reality was that Cayce was neither “asleep”, nor was he a “prophet”. Instead, he was a man who discovered that he possessed an extraordinary gift that has so far never been matched by any other person. It all began when he developed an acute case of laryngitis.

His condition was so serious that it affected his ability to speak. Finally, after suffering from this condition for many months, he sought help from Al Layne, a local homeopathic physician. It was Layne who suggested that he place himself in a state of self-imposed hypnosis.

So, on 30th March, 1901, the young Cayce lay down on a couch and settled into a relaxed state. Then, to the amazement of his parents and a few others who were present in the room, he proceeded to describe exactly what was wrong with his throat, as well how to treat it.

Following his own advice, Cayce was soon completely cured of his disease. News of his remarkable recovery, which was publicized in the local press, soon attracted people from surrounding areas, all of whom were anxious to see if he could help them recover from their own illnesses.

In dealing with these cases, Cayce would always follow the same procedure.

He would lie down on a couch, place his arms across his chest, and relax. Then, just as his eyelids began to flicker, someone would ask him a question. All Cayce needed to know was the name of the person that the reading was for, and where that person was at the time of the reading.

It didn’t matter how near or far the person for whom the reading was conducted happened to be at the time. Cayce would then begin to intone an answer to the question. Although most of these questions related to health matters, over time they covered a host of other topics.

It should be noted that Cayce never actually “fell asleep” during any of his readings. To observers, he seemed to be in a trance-like state. And when he opened his eyes at the end of a reading, he remembered nothing. It was his secretary who recorded every word that had been spoken.

Nor did he ever charge for a reading. He merely invited those who wished to do so, to make donations. During his lifetime he gave over 14,000 readings, including such notable historical figures as President Woodrow Wilson, Thomas Edison, Nelson Rockefeller and George Gershwin.

Readers need to understand, as Cayce himself went to great lengths to emphasize, that he was not the author of the material contained in his readings. He said that much of the information that he gave came to him from the subconscious mind of the person for whom he was doing the reading.

He also attributed the source for most of the historical and esoteric content of his readings to the Akashic Records, which he claimed was a universal source of knowledge that was a repository of everything that had happened in the past, as well as everything that would happen in the future.

On many an occasion Cayce’s answers were in direct conflict with his own personal beliefs, such those dealing with astrology and reincarnation. But in each case he chose not to interfere, and left it up to the individual for whom the reading was given to decide on its value and validity.

For those who may be unfamiliar with the Cayce story, the following video provides a brief summary of some of the events that were predicted to occur in the coming years.

What has made Cayce an important interpreter of End Time prophecy was that, in the course of his readings, he was occasionally asked questions about the future of America, especially about events that were predicted in the Bible to occur during the days leading up to the return of the Christ.

One of his most famous readings about the future of America took place on August 13, 1931, when the question he was asked was: What is the shape of the world to come? Part of his reply is quoted below:

In the next few years lands will appear in the Atlantic as well as the Pacific. And what is the coast line now of many a land will be the bed of the ocean. Even many of the battle fields of the present will be ocean, will be seas, the bays, the lands over which the new order will carry on their trade as one with another.

“Portions of the now east coast of New York, or New York City itself, will in the main disappear. This will be another generation, though, here, while the southern portions of Carolina, Georgia – these will disappear. This will be much sooner.

The waters of the lakes will empty into the Gulf, rather than the waterway over which such discussions have been recently made. It would be well if the waterway were prepared, but not for that purpose for which it is at present being considered.

“Then the area where the entity is now located (Virginia Beach) will be among the safety lands, as will the portions of what is now Ohio, Indiana and Illinois, and much of the southern portion of Canada and the eastern portion of Canada; while the western land – much of that is to be disturbed – in this land – as, of course, much in other lands.” (Reading 1152-11)

It is clear from this reply that the continent of North America would undergo dramatic geological changes at the time of the end. This message was reinforced in subsequent readings when his source said that the earth itself would be convulsed as a result of a change in its axis.

And this is where the second American possessing unusual talents enters the scene. His name is Gordon-Michael Scallion. And just as in the case of Edgar Cayce, Scallion’s unusual ability manifested itself unexpectedly in his life as a result of a health crisis affecting his throat.

In 1979, as explained in previous Blog posts under the heading Future Flooding, Gordon-Michael Scallion, or GMS as he prefers to be called, was is the middle of delivering a public lecture when he suddenly lost his voice completely “in a split second”.

He was taken to hospital where doctors conducted a series of comprehensive tests on his vocal chords, larynx and throat. However, since they were unable to find anything wrong, they dismissed his symptoms as psychosomatic. Yet stranger things were to follow.

Within a few hours of leaving the hospital, GMS found that his physical vision had changed. He now began to see colours and lights around animals, plants, trees and people. He had no idea what these colours meant and he thought that his vision was to blame.

It was only later that he realised that what he was seeing were the “auras” of people, plants and animals. And like Cayce before him, he discovered that he had the ability to look into people and see what was wrong with their physical, mental or spiritual bodies.

Then in 1991, he found that he was able to sense what was wrong with the earth itself. He began to experience nightmares in which it appeared as if the earth was a sentient being, just like a human, and that it was in great pain.

He also began to get visions of changes that would take place to the existing continents of the earth in future times and, in particular, changes that would take place on the North American continent. As he later wrote:

Since 1979 I have had ongoing visions concerning the Earth, sometimes as many as ten or more in a day, lasting from a few seconds to minutes. In 1982, I began to sketch a map based on the visions, and I updated it through the years as new information was presented to me.

“This map is the culmination of a major ongoing effort to consolidate all the Earth change information I have received. As a result, the “Future Map of the World” is the most comprehensive and up to date representation of Earth Change visions and information presented to me over the past seventeen years.”

Scallion’s future map of North America is of particular interest, because the information he received in his visions so closely match that of Edgar Cayce in his readings half a century before. According to this map, large parts of the East Coast will be swamped by the ocean, along with major parts of West Coast. In addition, the Great Lakes will drain into the Gulf of Mexico, just as Cayce predicted in his reading 1152-11 quoted above.

But Scallion has not only compiled a map of what his visions suggest will be the future outline of the United States, he has also gone on record to indicate how these changes will occur on the Pacific Coast, as shown in the video below:

Scallion indicates that the reason for the above earth changes is a change in the alignment of the tectonic plates, such as might be caused by the interaction between the earth and a large comet. And this is where his visions match the descriptions given by St. John in his Book of Revelation.

As I explained in my article entitled What is “Wormwood” in the Book of Revelation?”, the different plagues associated with the seven angels with their seven trumpets described by St. John, are actually the predictable effects of a close encounter with a comet.

Now Scallion was not the first person to link disasters in North America with an encounter between the earth and a comet. As far back as the 12th century AD, a Christian mystic known as St. Hildegard of Bingen in Germany, was advocating just such a scenario during the End Times.

Just as Scallion’s predictions have been based on visionary experiences, so St. Hildegard, who came to be known as the Sibyl of the Rhine, had a series of visions about future events. And in 1141 AD, she had a vision in which she was instructed to “write down that which you see and hear“.

She subsequently published her first theological text under the title of “Scivias” (“Know the Ways of the Lord”). In this work, which dealt with things that would occur during the days leading up to the return of the Christ, she referred to the coming of a comet and its impact on “the great nation”.

Before the Comet comes, many nations, the good excepted, will be scoured with want and famine. The great nation in the ocean that is inhabited by people of different tribes and descent by an earthquake, storm and tidal waves will be devastated. It will be divided, and in great part submerged.”

As she went on to record:

The Comet by its tremendous pressure, will force much out of the ocean and flood many countries, causing much want and many plagues. [After the] great Comet, the great nation will be devastated by earthquakes, storms, and great waves of water, causing much want and plagues.

“The ocean will also flood many other countries, so that all coastal cities will live in fear, with many destroyed. All sea coast cities will be fearful and many of them will be destroyed by tidal waves, and most living creatures will be killed and even those who escape will die from a horrible disease. (View Source)

So here we have evidence, written almost eight centuries before the readings of Edgar Cayce, of a “great nation” that will be “divided” (split into two parts), and devastated by “earthquakes, storms, and great waves of water”, and “in great part submerged”.

It takes little insight to recognise that the “great nation” that St. Hildegard was referring to here was the United States of America, especially since her predictions match almost exactly what Cayce said in his reading 1152-11 quoted above, and what Scallion has illustrated in the above video.

There seems little doubt, therefore, that the reason why America is not mentioned in Biblical prophecy about the events of the “Last Days”, is because the entire country has been devastated by a series of natural disasters, robbing it of its former influence and power.

And for those who scoff at the idea of America splitting into two parts, it is worth remembering that three of the greatest earthquakes to have hit the continental United States, occurred in 1811 and 1812 in the Mississippi valley region of the New Madrid seismic zone.

The New Madrid fault line is a series of faults that run for 150 miles (240 Kms) beneath the continental crust of the North America plate. Earthquakes that occur in this zone threaten parts of Illinois, Indiana, Missouri, Arkansas, Kentucky, Tennessee and Mississippi.

In the case of the earthquakes of 1811 and 1812, windows shook as far afield as Washington, D.C., waking the President, while church bells rang in Richmond, Virginia. Those closer to the epicentre, such as Ohio, fled their homes in terror, as the ground continued shaking for more than ten minutes.

The entire town of Little Prairie was destroyed by liquefaction, as seismic waves caused the water-saturated soil to turn into liquid that was incapable of supporting those structures built upon it.

And when will all this happen? It will begin on the “Great and Terrible Day of the Lord”, when a giant asteroid, almost a mile wide, will slam into the Atlantic Ocean not far from the island of Puerto Rico, setting off a series of towering Tsunamis that will devastate all the coastlines of the world.

When that time comes, the judgement of God that evangelists like Billy Graham have long warned about, will strike America with a series of hammer-blows that will leave it a mere shadow of its former glory and might, and no longer able to influence the affairs of the world.

This will be vengeance indeed.

Allan, Selections, April 18, 2019, 9:12 am

Selection # 2: The Legend of Lemuria

This selected entry was originally published here on July 12, 2014.

In a news article published by the New York Times on October 28, 1921, the famed American automobile magnate Henry Ford made the memorable comment, which has since been repeated innumerable times, when he said: History is bunk!

Now Henry Ford’s remark was directed more toward his attitude that events that happen in the present are more important than things that have happened in the past. But there was more wisdom in his words than he might have imagined at the time.

In an essay devoted to this point, noted columnist Patrick Lockerby wrote:

In archaeology and library research you can make a claim based on the easy pickings that lie on the surface or you can break into a sweat as you dig deeper. But it is not enough to dig deep. You must sift every spadeful, and sift it fine. Truth is most often found in the tiniest of grains: it is easy to miss if you don’t focus intently.” (View Source)

His point goes to the very heart of the historical dilemma. The history of the past is invariably written, and rewritten, by the historians of the present. And it is often their misinformed education of the present which leads to their deformed view of the past.

And it is in this sense that much of what has been written about the past is often “pure bunk”. An example of this was provided in the previous instalment in the history of Easter Island, which reads like the script from a soap opera, replete with jealousy, vengeance, war, disease, starvation and ultimately cannibalism and death.

And all this simply because those historians who concocted the history of Easter Island prior to the arrival of Westerners, neglected to attend to the vital point mentioned by Lockerby, when he said: Truth is most often found in the tiniest of grains.

In the case of Easter Island, archaeologists, historians, geographers and a host of other scientists all missed the crucial clue, which was that the soil that covers the entire island actually arrived after the statues had been built, and not before.

But there is an even better example of a conundrum posed by a mysterious set of ancient ruins, which has also been mangled by archaeologists and historians, who have once again allowed the “easy pickings that lie on the surface” to blind them to the truth that lay beneath.

These ruins can be found today in the South American country of Bolivia, on the flanks of the Andes mountains, and are located just 45 miles (72 kms) from the modern city of La Paz. These ruins lie within the boundaries of the municipality of Tiwanaku (Tiahuanaco).

The ruins of Tiwanaku may be small in size, yet they provide a stunning display of ancient megalithic architecture, engineering and geometry that clearly supersedes anything else of its era. In fact, in designating this a World Heritage site in the year 2000, UNESCO noted:

The city of Tiwanaku, capital of a powerful pre-Hispanic empire that dominated a large area of the southern Andes and beyond, reached its apogee between 500 and 900 AD. Its monumental remains testify to the cultural and political significance of this civilisation, which is distinct from any of the other pre-Hispanic empires of the Americas.”  (View Source)

The ruins themselves can roughly be divided into four separate areas. The first is what is known as the pyramid of Akapana. Then there is the area of the semi-underground temple. This is located in front of the area of the ceremonial courtyard of Kalasasaya. Finally there is the area known as Puma Punku.

The Akapana pyramid is perhaps something of a misnomer, as it is a blend between the step pyramids of Mexico and the pyramids of Egypt. Shaped more in the form of a rectangular cross, it consists of seven different levels, each with its own stone retaining wall, and rises to a height of about 55 feet (18 metres).

 

 

However, only the lowest level and part of the second have been excavated from the earth that covers it. Investigations suggest that the entire pyramid was once clad in blocks of red sandstone. The whole structure is surrounded by well-preserved drainage canals.

The area of the small semi-subterranean temple is accessed by a series of descending steps. The temple itself is made up of 48 pillars made of red sandstone. Its most notable feature are the many styles of carved stone heads that are set into the surrounding walls.

In the centre of the underground temple stands a carved stone monolith known as “El Fraile” (The Friar). This statue was carved out of red andesite, a type of very hard granite that is common to the region.

Situated to the side of the Akapana pyramid is a large courtyard and ceremonial platform known as the Kalasasaya. The courtyard is over three hundred feet long. It is entered through a flight of seven steps cut into the centre of the eastern wall, leading to an imposing gateway made out of enormous blocks of stone.

The imposing Gateway of the Sun

The interior of the courtyard contains two carved monoliths, one of which weighs over twenty tons, as well as the most famous artifact of the entire site, which is the monumental “Gateway of the Sun”, incorporating the image of the “weeping god”.

This gateway has been carved from a single block of andesite, and has been cut to form a large doorway with niches on either side. Above the doorway is an elaborate bas-relief of the central deity, believed by the local Indians to have been their Creator-God Viracocha.

The deity is flanked on either side by thirty intricately carved glyphs, known as Chasquis, as well as a row of eleven other icons that are carved along the bottom of the panel. Another feature of the Kalasasaya temple is the “calendar wall”, consisting of ten large stone pillars set in a modern wall.

An important point that visitors to Tiwanaku should bear in mind, is that the entire area was reconstructed by archaeologists in the 20th century. So most of what can be seen in the Kalasasaya courtyard today bears little resemblance to what was originally found, but rather reflects what these archaeologists thought would make the most impressive memorial.

The cyclopean ruins of Puma Punku

Finally, there is the site located about a mile away from the main temple complex known as Puma Punku (Door of the Puma). This consists of little more than a series of scattered blocks of stone, except for the fact that some of these stones weigh anywhere from 100 to 150 tons!

Confronted with megalithic ruins of such complexity and size, modern historians were challenged to come up with a history that would explain them, especially since they were so dramatically different from anything else found on the South American continent.

The history they devised is the history that is taught to every schoolchild in Bolivia today, and is a source of immense national pride. The following is an extract from a local travel guide which gives a popular rendering of the story that historians came up with.

This civilization arose in the 6th century BC, and local Indian legends described the city as the capital of the bearded white god Wiracocha.

“Tiahuanaco endured a thousand years more than Rome, and almost 2000 years more than the Inca civilization that built Machu Picchu. Moreover, the inhabitants had developed a system of agriculture that turned barren Altiplano land into the breadbasket of their society.

“The city of Tiahuanaco, capital of a powerful pre-Hispanic empire that dominated a large area of the southern Andes and beyond, reached its apogee between 500 and 900 AD. Its monumental remains testify to the cultural and political significance of this civilization, which is distinct from any of the other pre-Hispanic empires of the Americas.

“The classic, or fourth period (300-700 AD), is perhaps the most dramatic, with its huge stone structures that watch over the site today.

“During its peak, the capital of Tiwanaku boasted a huge stone-faced pyramid, cut stone enclosures, elite residences, exquisitely decorated buildings, a system of subterranean canals, and at least four square kilometers of residential buildings.

The Tiwanaku imperial economy was based on the intensive utilization of raised fields, camelid pastoralism, terrace agriculture, an extensive exchange and colonial system, and the organization of large numbers of laborers for state projects. There was a rigid social and political hierarchy expressed in elaborate art and architectural styles.

“The ruins of Tiahuanaco bear striking witness to the power of the empire that played a leading role in the development of the Andean pre-Hispanic civilization.

“The buildings of Tiahuanaco are exceptional examples of the ceremonial and public architecture and are of one of the most important manifestations of the civilizations of the Andean region.

“Clearly, the ruins of Tiahuanaco show a great ceremonial center, and a city that numbered, at its height, more than 20,000 inhabitants. Researchers have divided this civilization into five distinct periods.

“The civilization seems to have totally vanished by 1200AD.” (View Source)

The history outlined above tells an inspiring tale of humble beginnings that lead on to greatness – of imposing architecture, sophisticated engineering and advanced agriculture that speak of the glories of a now vanished era. The unfortunate truth is that all of this is “pure bunk”.

The idea that a powerful Bolivian pre-Hispanic empire once dominated the region for thousands of years is complete fiction. There was no great capital city housing 20,000 citizens, no elite residences, no decorated buildings, and certainly no agriculture that turned the barren Altiplano (high plateau) into a giant breadbasket.

The droll part about this so-called “history”, was that archaeologists and historians had to frame their history of Tiwanaku to conform with the current scientific paradigm, which holds that the earliest civilization on the planet began 5,000 years ago with the Sumerian and Egyptian cultures.

So operating within this paradigm, historians came up with a scenario beginning in the 6th century BC, and ending with the mysterious disappearance of the entire Tiwanaku culture in the 12th century AD, thus conveniently disposing of it before the arrival of the Incas of Peru, early in the 13th century AD.

Yet if these scientists had been prepared to undertake an honest enquiry into the evidence, they would have found some interesting facts which point to the likelihood that, many thousands of years ago, Tiwanaku was originally located at sea level, at that it was at one time a flourishing seaport.

The first fact is that the ruins of Tiwanaku are at an altitude of over 12,000 feet (3,650 metres) above sea level. This is an altitude where most plants will not grow, and corn in particular will not ripen. Its average annual temperature is 45 degrees Fahrenheit (7.7 degrees C), with an average annual rainfall of 24 inches (630 mm).

Based on this evidence alone, it is clear that the present location of Tiwanaku could not possibly have supported an advanced civilization involving tens of thousands of people, especially since some of the agricultural terraces that surround the existing ruins reach as high as 18,000 feet.

The second interesting fact concerns Lake Titicaca, located just a few miles to the west of Tiwanaku. Although it is considered to be the world’s highest fresh water lake, in earlier times it was an inland salt water sea, before being suddenly thrust up to its present height of 12,500 feet (3,800 metres) above sea level.

This is borne out by the fact that the shoreline of the lake is littered with millions of fossilized seashells. It also still retains a slightly saline content, which accounts for the fact that ocean dwelling fish, as well as creatures such as seahorses, continue to be caught in the lake to this day.

Lake Titicaca drains to the south along the Altiplano plateau, spreading out over the Desaguadero Basin and on toward Lake Poopó. If the lake actually had been filled with sea water in earlier times, we should expect to find evidence of evaporated salt deposits in the region, and that is exactly what we do find.

The great salt lake of Salar de Uyuni

One of the most spectacular features in all of Bolivia is the Salar de Uyuni. It is the world’s largest dried up salt bed. It covers an area of over 4,000 square miles (10,500 square kms), which is one third of the size of Belgium, or twenty-five times larger than the famous Bonneville salt flats in Utah.

The crust that is found on the surface of Salar de Uyuni has a thickness of about 33 feet (10 metres), and is made up of eleven separate layers. It is estimated that the dry lake itself contains about ten billion tons of salt, as well as being the world’s richest source of lithium.

The existence of all this salt lends credibility to the theory that Tiwanaku was once a seawater port. And nowhere is there better evidence of this than in the megalithic blocks of stone that can be found at Puma Punku, situated a short distance away from the main ceremonial centre of the city.

Exquisite designs carved into the polished granite

Whereas the main ruins of Tiwanaku are clearly linked with the ceremonial, religious and social focus of this ancient culture, the gigantic blocks of stone that lie strewn all over the plateau at Puma Punku are distinctly different. They seem to possess a unique character of their own.

These megalithic stones are bluish-gray in colour, and generate a metallic tone when struck. They also appear to be the product of an advanced system of technology, as individual blocks have exquisitely cut edges and indentations in a variety of patterns and designs.

Recessed double-crucifix design

One of the most common of these indentations is the symbol of the cross, a double-crucifix design deeply recessed into the granite with pure, clean lines, which could only have been produced with the aid of highly sophisticated stone-cutting tools. Other motifs include arrows, circles and niches unlike anything seen at Tiwanaku.

Easily the most striking feature of the entire site are the gargantuan precision-made H-blocks made of andesite that once formed the walls. Each of these stones is so intricately carved that it has about 80 different surfaces, yet each of these surfaces seems to have been polished into a perfectly smooth finish.

Examples of the indentations carved in stone for the metal clamps that held these stones together

In assembling the walls of Puma Punku, each stone was finely cut to interlock with adjacent stones, and was designed to form load-bearing joints that fitted together without the use of mortar. These joints are so precise that not even a razor blade can fit between the stones.

Another feature of the stonework at Puma Punku was the use of metal clamps or ties. For example, the side walls of the water channels were built with upright stone slabs held together with I-shaped metal clamps which were recessed into the stone.

When analysed in the laboratory, these clamps were found to be made of an unusual alloy, comprising copper, arsenic, nickel, silicon and iron. It is also worth mentioning here that this same system of using metal clamps was found at the Ahu Vinapu megalithic wall on Easter Island.

The entire site of Puma Punku speaks of an ancient civilisation suddenly afflicted by appalling tragedy, as catastrophic forces of nature devastated the region, destroying all but the few remnants that can be seen strewn around the site today.

Who can solve the riddle of my past?

The story of who these people were, how they built their cyclopean structures, and how they met their end, would appear to be lost forever in shrouded legends of antiquity. Yet there is one relic which could be the key to unravelling the mystery of the past. It is the magnificent Gateway of the Sun itself.

Dedicated to the “weeping God” Viracocha, whose tears can still be seen immortalised in stone, the Sun Gate stands in mute splendour as it gazes over the stark plateau of the Altiplano, inviting all who pass that way to solve the riddle of its past.

Allan, Selections, April 11, 2019, 10:52 am

Selection # 1: The Wandering Hippopotamus

This selected entry was originally published here on May 18, 2014.

Scott:  My name is Scott Paton.  I am talking today with Allan Colston.  He is the author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”.  This is a book dealing with prophecy.

For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this Podcast is another in the series “Signs of the Times”.  Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.

Hello Scott. It’s good to be with you again.

Scott:  In our last discussion you referred to the American philosopher George Santayana, who wrote that those who cannot remember the past are condemned to repeat it.

That’s correct Scott. I also went on to say that our world has suffered from numerous global catastrophes in the past, and that these disasters have wiped out entire civilizations that have now vanished from the historical record.

But the reason why we no longer remember these earlier disasters is not because we lack the evidence, but because modern historians have deliberately chosen to ignore them.

Scott:  But why would historians do such a thing?

That’s an excellent question Scott. On the face of it this would seem to make no sense at all. But that is why the work of Thomas Kuhn is so important, and why I have devoted so much time to his research in recent discussions.

As Kuhn pointed out in his book The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, all science is practised in a paradigm. And he was not just referring here to natural sciences like astronomy, cosmology, physics and chemistry, but also to things like geology, biology, history and archeology.

What he meant by this is that every scientific discipline is based on a certain set of beliefs that are considered to be established facts. And because these beliefs are considered to be proven beyond doubt, they are no longer questioned.

But the problem that Kuhn identified, and which formed the major part of his book, was that within the history of science over the last 400 years, there have been numerous examples where these “proven” beliefs have later been found to be wrong.

It is these mistakes of the past which have led to complete revisions of past data, in ways that have led to enormous upheavals that Kuhn called scientific revolutions. And that is what we are seeing in the world of science today.

Scott:  Why do you say that Allan?

Well Scott, as I have indicated in my last two Blog posts, the Theory of Evolution set out by Charles Darwin in his book The Origin of Species has been hailed for over a century as one of the most complete scientific theories ever conceived, and is today regarded by science as a proven fact of nature.

Unfortunately, it also happens to suffer from one small defect.

The problem is that over the course of the 155 years that have passed since his book was first published, no evidence has been found to support Darwin’s central thesis, which is that all species have evolved from a single progenitor.

In spite of an exhaustive search of the fossil record, there is no evidence to show that one species has changed into a completely new species, as a result of an infinite series of tiny changes that have been passed on from one generation to another….Nada…. None!

Scott:  So are you saying that Darwin’s Theory of Evolution is wrong?

Absolutely. As I pointed out in an earlier Blog post, the basic principles of Darwin’s theory have now been found to be unfounded.

Now I am not saying that the idea of evolution itself is wrong. The fossil record makes it clear that different species have lived on the earth in forms of ever increasing complexity, over periods of time that span many hundreds of millions of years.

There is also no question that every species undergoes a struggle for survival, and that it is the strong who are best equipped to survive. It is also obvious that every species has a remarkable capacity to adapt to changes in its environment.

Furthermore, as Darwin correctly pointed out, every species can adapt to these changes in environment by changing their physical characteristics. And these changes can be passed on from one generation to another.

In fact, every aspect of Darwin’s acclaimed theory of evolution is correct – except for the most important one, and that is this.

One species does not change over time into another species. As the evidence now conclusively proves, no species ever has. And from this we may safely deduce that no species ever will.

Scott:  So Allan, why do you think that Darwin’s Theory of Evolution still continues to be taught?

Well Scott, it continues to be taught for the reason that Thomas Kuhn pointed out in his book. It has become an entrenched part of our current scientific paradigm, and to question this now would be to challenge the validity of the paradigm itself.

To do so would be heresy, as well as being professional suicide. No biologist would have a hope of attaining recognition or status within the official ranks of science today, if he or she publicly challenged Darwin’s theory.

And so it is with so many of the other “facts” of science. Those who try to challenge established ideas are denied space to publish their work in official journals, or to defend themselves when their characters are impugned, and the results of their research are rejected.

Or like Velikovsky, who chose to publish his unconventional ideas in books which subsequently became international best sellers, they are personally ostracised and excommunicated from their particular discipline of science.

So Darwin’s Theory of Evolution continues to be taught today for the simple reason that science doesn’t have a better theory to replace it. And because the prospect of going back to the Biblical idea of Creationism, or its later cousin called Intelligent Design, fills them with horror and dismay.

But to get back to your original question Scott, of why historians would deliberately choose to ignore evidence of past cataclysms, I need to point out something else that is closely linked to Darwin and his Theory of Evolution.

Scott:  Please carry on Allan. I find this fascinating.

When Darwin was 22 years old, he set sail on HMS Beagle on a journey that was to last five years and take him all around the world. It was while he was on board the ship that the Captain gave him a copy of a book which has just been published.

The name of the book was Principles of Geology, and it was written by one of the most influential scientists of his day, and a man whose work still forms the basis of modern geology. His name was Charles Lyell.

Lyell was an interesting man. Born in Scotland into a family of means, he was educated at Oxford University, where he graduated with an M.A. degree in 1821. After graduating, he decided to take up Law, and for a while practised as an attorney.

A few years later, however, Lyell began to suffer from failing eyesight. He therefore decided to abandon his legal career, and turn instead to geology, which had been a long-time hobby of his, and make this his new full-time profession.

One might suppose that a man with failing eyesight would have been better served by pursuing matters of law, rather than the demands of fieldwork in an exacting profession. But in Lyell’s case, it was a decision that would lead to personal fame and subsequent knighthood.

What made such a profound impact on the young Darwin, and played a leading part in the development of his theory of Natural Selection, was the fact that Charles Lyell was a staunch believer in the concept of Uniformitarianism.

Scott: What exactly was Uniformitarianism?

Well Scott, it was the idea that the earth was shaped in the past by the same forces that we see at work today. In fact the subtitle of Principles of Geology was: “An attempt to explain the former changes of the Earth’s surface by reference to causes now in operation“.

While he was a student at Oxford, Lyell had attended lectures given by William Buckland, who believed equally firmly that the earth had been afflicted by numerous catastrophes in the past.

However, Lyell became disenchanted with Buckland’s ideas, especially when he tried to link the concept of catastrophism with the Bible, by using the story of Noah’s flood as an example.

For Lyell, the present was the key to the understanding of the past, and there was no need to introduce references to God, the Bible, or any other supernatural source, in order to explain the changes that had taken place on the earth in the past.

In due course Lyell’s version of geology came to be known as Uniformitarianism, because of his fierce insistence that the processes that alter the earth’s surface act in a uniform manner, and that they take place imperceptibly slowly.

His work influenced Darwin deeply, so that when he later came to write his Origin of Species, he described the process of Natural Selection as a kind of biological uniformitarianism, where evolution took place in front of our eyes, but at a pace that was much too slow for us to recognise.

There was, however, one supreme irony in all of this. In spite of the simplicity and elegance of Lyell’s theory of uniformity, he was faced with the same embarrassing problem that later confronted Charles Darwin.

Scott: What was that?

The short answer is that Lyell’s theory wasn’t supported by the evidence. This embarrassing fact was so obvious that Lyell pointed it out himself in his book. In the 12th edition of Principles of Geology he wrote:

It has been truly observed that when we arrange the known fossiliferous formations in chronological order, they constitute a broken and defective series.”

Then after listing even more anomalies that were apparent in the stratification record, and which also were in conflict with his theory, Lyell went on to conclude:

These violations of continuity are so common as to constitute in most regions the rule rather than the exception, and they have been considered by many geologists as conclusive in favour of sudden revolutions in the inanimate and animate world.”

When Charles Darwin arrived in South America and began to examine the fossiliferous formations in that part of the world, he found even more dramatic evidence of earth’s catastrophic past. As he published in his Journal of Researches:

It is impossible to reflect on the changed state of the American continent without the deepest astonishment. Formerly, it must have swarmed with great monsters: now we find mere pigmies, compared with the antecedent, allied races.”

Certainly, no fact in the long history of the world is so startling as the wide and repeated exterminations of its inhabitants.”

“What, then, has exterminated so many species and whole genera? The mind at first is irresistibly hurried into the belief of some great catastrophe; but thus to destroy animals, both large and small, in Southern Patagonia, in Brazil, on the Cordillera of Peru, in North America up to Behring’s Straits, we must shake the entire framework of the globe.”

Scott:  So how did Charles Lyell deal with this problem?

Well Scott, you’re not going to believe this. Since he couldn’t deny the evidence that lay all around him, and which contradicted his theory of slow, imperceptible change, Lyell chose to fall back on a proven strategy that had served him well as a practising attorney.

That strategy can best be summarised as follows. When the facts support your argument, then emphasize the facts. But when they don’t, then ignore the facts completely, and question instead the integrity of all those who believe them.

Clearly, Lyell was not the sort of person to allow embarrassing facts to stand in the way of his personal theory. So instead of amending his theory to match the facts, as one would expect from an ethical scientist, he chose instead to ignore everything that contradicted his theory.

In fact he went even further. He blithely dismissed his critics as ignorant men who didn’t know what they were talking about, and, furthermore, were unaware of their own ignorance. As he wrote in Principles:

It appeared clear that the earlier geologists had not only a scant acquaintance with existing changes (caused by wind, flowing water, etc.), but they were singularly unconscious of the amount of their ignorance.”

Scott: I’m absolutely amazed, Allan. I can’t believe he could get away with it.

Exactly Scott. One can’t imagine anyone getting away with such a thing today. But get away with it he did. In fact, in certain cases he even resorted to parody as a way of shrugging off facts that contradicted his theory.

Perhaps the best example of this was the matter of the wandering hippopotamus.

Scott: What was that all about?

Well Scott, it seems that in a cave at Settle in west Yorkshire, England, located some 1450 feet above sea level, were found the remains of a variety of animals that included mammoth, rhinoceros, bison, hyena and hippopotamus.

During excavations, it became clear that the floor of the cavern was covered in sand containing foreign pebbles, which indicated that it had been submerged beneath the sea at an earlier time.

The question that perplexed people at the time was how the bones ended up together in a single cavern, especially when none of the animals found in the cave had ever lived in the British Isles.

To most geologists of that time, this seemed like clear evidence that the earth had undergone some great catastrophe in the past. Not so Charles Lyell. He dismissed such an idea, and offered up in its place the following explanation in his book Antiquity of Man:

The geologist … may freely speculate on the time when herds of hippopotami issued from North African rivers, such as the Nile, and swam northward in summer along the coasts of the Mediterranean, or even occasionally visited islands near the shore. Here and there they may have landed to graze or browse, tarrying awhile, and afterwards continuing their course northward.

“Others may have swum in a few summer days from rivers in the south of Spain or France to the Somme, Thames, or Severn (rivers in Wales and England), making timely retreat to the south before the snow and ice set in.”

This bizarre scenario may have fobbed off other lily-livered geologists of that time, but when Immanuel Velikovsky came across this passage in the course of his researches, he could not resist this sardonic response which he included in his book Earth in Upheaval:

Hippopotami not only travelled during the summer nights to England and Wales, but also climbed hills to die peacefully among other animals in caves, and the ice, approaching softly, tenderly spread little pebbles over the travellers resting in peace, and the land with its hills and caverns in a slow lullaby movement sank below the level of the sea and gentle streams caressed the dead bodies and covered them with rosy sand.”

Scott: Well Allan, I’ve got to hand it to you. That really is quite a hoot.

Well Scott, it would be if it weren’t such a sad reflection on the true state of affairs in science today.

Unfortunately, the moral of this story is that for almost two centuries geologists have allowed themselves to be hoodwinked by the theory of Uniformitarianism, and have ignored the facts that blatantly contradict this theory.

And instead of being the recipient of all the high honours that were conferred upon him, including a knighthood, Charles Lyell should have been run out of town by the nearest sheriff for being the scoundrel that he was.

In fact it gets worse. The idea that changes in the surface of the earth have primarily been the result of forces of nature that operate slowly and imperceptibly, has now also been incorporated into the paradigms of History and Archeology.

So references to cataclysmic events that can still be found in historical records are ignored by scholars today. And structural ruins that bear testimony to catastrophic changes in the past, continue to be ignored by archeologists.

They are ignored because the idea of catastrophic change within the recent history of the earth has now been officially expunged from the current paradigm of science. Those few brave souls who still continue to challenge that view are condemned to being mere voices crying in the wilderness.

So Scott, there you have the answer to your question. Historians ignore the evidence of catastrophic events that have occurred in recent times in the history of the earth, because to do otherwise would offend the theory of Uniformitarianism, which has now become part of the official dogma of science.

Scott:  So are you saying there are written records of past disasters that are deliberately being ignored by historians?

Yes Scott there are. Probably no one was better equipped to interpret these ancient records than Immanuel Velikovsky. His brilliant intellect and talent for languages allowed him to delve into records that were written in English, Latin, Greek, Hebrew, German, French, Italian and Spanish.

After spending ten years conducting research at major libraries around the world, Velikovsky went on to write numerous books detailing the evidence that he found.

His most famous work Worlds in Collision was devoted to an analysis of literary sources taken from ancient cultures in all parts of the world. And his book Earth in Upheaval focused on the geological evidence that he found.

In his books Velikovsky produced evidence taken from ancients documents emanating from pre-Columbian America, as well as from China, India, Persia, Babylon, Iceland, Finland, Greece and Rome.

Some of these literary sources are included in my Blog post here

Despite the fact that all of the excerpts taken from these ancient documents were carefully referenced and annotated, historians are content today to dismiss them as mythical stories, rather than as accounts of real events that actually happened.

In my next instalment Scott, I want to draw attention to the way modern archeologists have also chosen to ignore ruins of ancient civilizations that can still be found all over the world, simply because they too do not fit in with the dogma of Uniformitarianism.

Scott: Thanks Allan. This has been another fascinating discussion on the way the history of science has unfolded over the last few centuries.

You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”.  Do join us for our next Podcast in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.

Allan, Selections, April 4, 2019, 11:47 am

Our Magical World – Part Four

Mind and matter

Another example of the way in which our minds influence matter can be found in the ancient art of dowsing.

Dowsing is a term which has come to be used to describe a phenomenon that has been demonstrated by numerous people throughout history. It is commonly associated with the search for underground supplies of water, although it is by no means limited to such objectives. Dowsing is usually linked with the use of a divining aid, such as a rod or pendulum, although many dowsers find that they are able to dispense with an aid altogether.

In the search for underground water, a dowser usually holds a Y-shaped stick and proceeds to walk over a selected area of ground in a methodical fashion. When the dowser arrives at a point directly above a subterranean source of water, the stick suddenly jolts from its horizontal position. Those who have experienced this sudden twitch vary in their description of the nature and origin of this force. Almost none of them can agree on an explanation of this phenomenon.

Despite traditional skepticism in scientific circles as to the legitimacy of dowsing, the indisputable fact is that it works. People who simply go ahead and try it often find to their surprise that they are able to achieve practical results. Dowsing is not limited to the search for underground objects, for it has also been used to investigate everything from suspicious deaths to the diagnosis of disease.

The ideas of men like Abrams and Hieronymus with regard to natural “radiations”, find a sympathetic refrain in the work of Thomas Lethbridge.

Lethbridge was a trained archeologist at Cambridge University who undertook a series of experiments in the 1950s involving the use of a pendulum. His experiments were based on the supposition that every object in nature exhibited a specific “radiation” which could be intercepted by means of a suitable pendulum.

The pendulum that Lethbridge used consisted of a piece of string attached to a rod with a small weight at the end of it. Lethbridge found, by a lengthy system of trial and error, that any object could be identified by its own special rate of vibration. This vibration could be intercepted by matching the length of the string on the pendulum with the particular rate of vibration of the object concerned.

Lethbridge found, for example, that gold possessed a vibratory rate of twenty-nine inches. To resonate in harmony with anything made of gold, therefore, it was necessary for the length of string on the pendulum to be exactly twenty-nine inches long.

So if he wanted to find a gold ring buried in a field, then, using a pendulum with a suitable length of string, he would walk around the field with the pendulum swinging to and fro. When he approached the ring, Lethbridge found that the pendulum would change its motion and proceed to rotate in a clockwise direction without his inducing any deliberate change in motion.

Not only was he able to discover different hidden objects in this manner, but he found that the pendulum could be used in numerous other ways as well, particularly in archeological applications. He found that by means of the pendulum he was also able to identify such non-physical aspects as “age”, “heat” and “colour”. His extraordinary success in utilising a pendulum was recounted in his book Ghost and Ghoul, published in 1961.

On the face of it, Lethbridge’s ideas and his lavish claims for the abilities of a pendulum seem ridiculous, for they contradict known laws of science. When a pendulum which is swinging to and fro suddenly begins to rotate without any direct force being applied to it, it defies Newtonian physics. Critics naturally reject such a phenomenon as imaginary or fraudulent, or explain it away as the result of subconscious reflex action.

Lethbridge himself was remarkably candid about his discoveries. He was quick to acknowledge the apparent absurdity of his work, and to concede that he had no idea why it worked. By all accounts, according to his own formal education, he agreed that such things ought not to work. Yet the irresistible proof of his ideas lay in the evidence which he himself had accumulated, and which others were able to duplicate.

Referring to Lethbridge’s ideas, author Stephen Jenkins wrote in his book The Undiscovered Country:

“I would think this whole idea mad in the extreme if I hadn’t tried it and found it to work, and seen others work it.” 12

Whatever the reality of these subtle radiations of matter may happen to be, they become even more mysterious when diviners claim to be able to detect them without actually being present at the site concerned. For just as Curtis Upton found that he was able to treat diseased crops merely by using a photograph of the field concerned, so other diviners have been able to work equally effectively from maps.

Commenting on these remote forms of divination, Don Robins writes:

“There are many instances where as much information can be gleaned from a map, even a rough sketch map drawn only for the purpose of divination, as from visiting the site. Even if one is looking for water then it is self-evident that energy from the water itself is not being picked up: there is something else which probably lies within the orbit of the subjective concentration of the diviner.  

“This could be why nearly every attempt to pin the diviner’s gift down by scientific experimentation fails, for empiricism and determinism do not recognise any observer effect exists. The greatest mystery is that it works in a scientific vacuum, seldom open to objective testing and heavily dependent on the subjectivity of the diviner.” 13

In dealing specifically with this subjective factor, as detailed by Tom Graves in his book entitled Dowsing, Robins goes on to add:

“Read Graves’ book and you will see that the only way to divine is to set yourself in the right mental framework. You have to instruct yourself consciously to look for water or energy or whatever. In fact you have to tune yourself like a resonating cavity.” 14

This conscious tuning of the mind is the essential ingredient in all forms of divination, whether they be dowsing, astrology, examining tea-leaves in a cup, or evaluating the entrails of a sheep. Any individual is capable of any form of divination if he or she is prepared to provide a sympathetic mental framework.

The subject must first start with the mental concept that the intended objective is possible, and then act in full confidence that this objective will be achieved. The desired objective will then manifest itself in physical form, patterning itself on the underlying mental thought-form. We are reminded of the findings of Lawrence LeShan in his investigation into the manifestation of paranormal phenomena:

“It became clear during this several-year search that at the moment the paranormal information was acquired (when “telepathy” or “clairvoyance” or “precognition” was happening) they were reacting to the world as if it were constructed and “worked” on different grounds than those grounds on which we normally believe it to be constructed. At those moments they used a different metaphysical structure of the world than our ordinary, everyday metaphysical structure.” 15

The key factor in this revised mental framework is conviction. For, as LeShan goes on to point out:

“Another limit is the complete belief in it. One must know it is valid to operate within it.” 16

Once we have complete conviction in our desired mental framework, then confirmatory results automatically follow. If this underlying mental structure is different from that of conventional thinking, it will yield results which are equally at odds with accepted understanding. We might use as an example of an “unscientific” paradigm, the case of astrology.

Although there are various astrological systems in use today, which differ within themselves as to their constituent features, they are all based on the premise that the motions of the sun and planets influence the nature of personalities and the events that are associated with them. In most astrological systems, this association is intrinsically linked with the precise moment of birth of the individual concerned.

Now science rejects this basic premise of astrology as factually absurd. Since planets are considered to be remote physical objects composed of inert gas or matter, they are believed by scientists to have no possible influence on human events. Furthermore, since the precise moment of birth can be affected by a variety of factors, such as the decision to deliver the child by induction or Caesarean section, the actual time of birth is clearly subject to human factors which must surely undermine any supposed astronomical association.

In scientific terms, therefore, astrology simply does not stand up to critical analysis. Yet critics of astrology have overlooked the crucial element of mind. It is the mind which determines the nature of this association, and not the planets themselves. Since, as mystics have pointed out, there is no intrinsic relationship between space and objects or between time and events, we are free to impose any pattern of association upon them that we wish.

Astrologists, therefore, have merely imposed another view of reality upon the world; one which requires human events to be bound by the motions of the planets. Astrology works for those who operate with conviction within that mental framework. Astrologists must recognise, however, that despite any amount of supporting evidence, astrology will never be considered to be a valid scientific hypothesis, as long as science continues to exclude the influence upon matter of the subjective state of mind.

As in all forms of divination, the link between circumstance and matter is purely mental. It works because we ourselves make it work. We devise the mental pattern and we supply the energy, which then manifests according to our underlying pattern of belief. We may energise any mental pattern that we wish.

I may, for example, hold the concept that weather formations can be predicted by shuffling a pack of playing cards, and that various changes in weather conditions can be linked to specific sequences of cards. As completely unscientific as my basic rationale may be, my results will bear out my underlying assumption, in direct response to the conviction with which I apply it.

Although there is in fact no limit to what can be achieved in this way in practice, the ability to create physical thought forms is dependent on the personal power of the individual concerned. Where this is strong and is reinforced by an intense desire and resolute will, miraculous things can be achieved. They will be miraculous, however, only insofar as they appear to contradict the known laws of science.

The scientific description of the universe now represents the dominant cast of mind in the world today. The scientific description of the world is based, as we have seen, on certain fundamental assumptions. While these assumptions are now held to be self-evident, it is clear upon examination that they remain mere articles of faith.

These assumptions are that the universe is ultimately a rational phenomenon, and that being rational, can be interpreted and understood by a rational process of investigation. The universe is also assumed to be a totally consistent and predictable affair. So once a particular event occurs, it is assumed by scientists that it will always happen again, as long as the same physical conditions apply.

It is this consistency which lies at the heart of the scientific explanation of the world. Having been conditioned into this way of thinking, it is natural that scientists should come to regard the universe as being the product of a consistent set of laws, which are themselves immutable.

The purpose of science has always been to identify these laws. Because consistency is the linchpin of the scientific description of the universe, it is not surprising that scientists tend to reject anything that threatens this consistency. Any observable which runs counter to any single scientific law, is ultimately a threat to the entire scientific edifice. It threatens to bring down the whole pack of cards.

For, as Margenau and LeShan succinctly point out:

“A completely consistent cosmos cannot be inconsistent in one area. One exception collapses it all.” 17

The reason why radionics, dowsing, astrology and other forms of divination are rejected by science is because they are clearly inconsistent with its fundamental laws. The reason why such things appear to operate within a scientific vacuum is because science has thus far been unable to cast its deterministic net over the phenomena concerned.

Nor is science likely to succeed until it allows for the recognition of the subjective state of mind. Yet the range of anomalous observations is so great, as we have seen throughout the pages of this book (The Cosmic Web), that they surely point to the fact that the fundamental laws proposed by science are nothing but the products of belief.

Seen in this light, science is not a rational system of investigation which comes ever closer to describing the true nature of the universe. Instead, it is merely one system of applied belief, among many, which moulds nature according to its underlying tenets of belief. Science will never provide a final understanding of the universe. The universe will always be too rich for its restricted laws.

While such an evaluation may seem heretical to many, certain perceptive scientists have already begun to entertain serious doubts about the fundamental validity of science. For, as Edward Harrison, professor of physics and astronomy at the University of Massachusetts observed on receiving the Melcher Award in 1986:

“Human beings of all societies and in all periods of history believe that their ideas on the nature of the real world are the most secure, and that their ideas on religion, ethics and justice are the most enlightened. Like us, they think that final knowledge is at last within reach. Like us they pity the people in earlier ages for not knowing the true facts. Unfailingly, human beings pity their ancestors for being ignorant and forget that their descendants will pity them for the same reason.  

“Dare I say that secure knowledge can never be found? That our boundless ignorance explains why we feel so confident of success in bounded knowledge? That each discovery creates in the long run more mystery than it solves? That we stand no closer to the ultimate truth than did our forbears? And that we are no better than the people who lived a thousand and even ten thousand years ago?” 18

Professor Harrison points toward a truth which is as old as humanity, and which we find reflected in the ancient writings of the Hindu sages:

“The greatest of all delusions is the conviction that knowledge is not a delusion.” 19

The reason why every generation remains convinced that its knowledge is the only truth, is that each generation moulds nature into a reflection of its deepest held beliefs. It is the fact that these beliefs find fulfillment in experience which lends credibility to their underlying beliefs. Yet this basic principle remains true for every generation, including our own.

Our thoughts determine our beliefs, and it is these beliefs in life which determine our experiences. We then delude ourselves into thinking that the knowledge distilled from these experiences is “truth”, which is then taken to be representative of the Creator’s Will. But as beliefs change, so do experiences, and so does the knowledge that is gained from them.

The reason why our experiences continually change in direct relationship with our thoughts, is because the universe is not an objective reality existing in space independently of us, but is a subjective projection in consciousness. It is this truth which is revealed in the direct experience of the Sage, as we see from the following words of Ramana Maharshi:

“Those who have realized the Self by direct and immediate experience clearly perceive beyond all doubt that the phenomenal world as an objective, independent reality is wholly nonexistent.” 20

We find its echo in the teachings of the Buddha:

“The Buddha said to Subhuti, ‘All that has a form is an illusive existence. When it is perceived that all form is no form, the Tathagata is recognized’.” 21

In his epic work The Crest Jewel of Wisdom, the 8th century sage Sankara wrote:

“With the emergence of the mind everything arises and with its subsidence everything ceases. In the dream state, in which there are no objects, the mind creates its dream world of enjoyers and others by its powers. Similarly, all that it perceives in the waking state is its own display.22

Because the nature of what is experienced in consciousness is directly related to the contents of each individual consciousness, it follows that individual experiences in life will be influenced by individual thoughts. What is experienced in life can never be consistent for every individual in every age. Subjective experience breeds knowledge born of that experience, and this knowledge is always limited.

Any change in the way we perceive the universe inevitably leads to a change in the apparent functioning of the universe. As we find in the Tripura Rahasya:

“So also the universe has repeatedly been taken to be real so that it now looks as if it were completely real. The remedy lies in a change in outlook. The world becomes for one whatever one is accustomed to think of it.” 23

Again, as is recorded in the Hindu classic, the Agamas:

“The universe has no eternal support, nor is it cognized from without; but as you make it so it becomes.” 24

When Tom Lethbridge unwittingly began his experiments in dowsing, he found that he began to experience results which were in line with his thinking. When Kreskin undertook experiments in telepathy, he found that his intuitive ideas came to be rewarded with success. When Jules Romains investigated the possibility of eyeless sight, he found that he achieved results according to his inner conviction.

When Friedrich Jurgenson acted on impulse, he found that he was successful in recording strange discarnate voices on his tape recorder. Despite the fact that each of these instances is in direct conflict with the universally accepted laws of science, they nevertheless occurred.

The fact that they did so is convincing proof that scientific laws do not set effective limits to what we may or may not achieve, and that the universe is more susceptible to thought than we have hitherto believed. Each one of these people instinctively acted on the principle of creative thought as enunciated by the Tripura Rahasya:

“One starts by imagining something; then contemplates it; and by continuous or repeated association resolves that it is true unless contradicted. In that way, the world appears real in the manner one is used to it.” 25

Each one of us is free to imagine anything we wish, and to bring this thought form into manifestation in our world of personal experience. There are no limits to the range of this creative power, other than the limits which we impose upon ourselves in the form of our beliefs. It is these beliefs which set the boundaries of our world and determine the character of our experience.

Yet such is the nature of our “enlightened” scientific world, that each one of us is conditioned by our education to believe that we are bound by the apparent limits of our bodies, and that we are further bound by scientific laws to which the universe rigidly adheres. But it is not this universe that binds us, it is our own conviction that we are bound. However, this bondage is illusory, for as the Tripura Rahasya points out:

“The strongest fetter is the certainty that one is bound. It is as false as the fearful hallucinations of a frightened child.” 26

Within our world of personal experience, each one of us is free to spin our cosmic web. We are free to spin whatever we wish, and to link these strands of thought together in any manner that we wish. Our universe does not unfold according to any pre-ordained set of rules. It responds to those influences which we ourselves have set in motion.

When we truly grasp the awesome power at our command and have the courage to snap the fetters of our conditioned thinking, then we stand at the threshold of a new beginning – a new era of experience. Being now the conscious creators of our lives, we come to interact with our world with new vitality and zest. Not only are we free to attract those experiences in life which we most desire, but we also become architects of a new reality, able to mould our world in dazzling ways.

In spinning our cosmic web, we may choose to operate within our culturally derived paradigm, or we may substitute a new paradigm of our own. We are always free to choose. In working within our accustomed paradigm, we can focus our thoughts upon any object of desire. These objects can be material, such as a new house or car, or whatever else represents the target of our desire.

We can also focus upon particular levels of achievement, such as that of a professional engineer, or doctor, or opera singer. We can select as our objects of desire the achievement of some goal such as the gain or loss of weight, the cure for some specific ailment, or the answer to some deep riddle of history or science. All of these objectives are valid targets of desire, and all of them can be fulfilled by the necessary investment of personal energy.

The time it takes for any of these objectives to be attained will depend upon the degree of energy which is applied, and the confidence and vigour with which each is pursued. All negative thoughts of failure will of course undermine these efforts, as will self-doubt and a diffident approach. As in all things, confidence comes with success, and small achievements of desire inevitably provide the foundation for launching the fulfillment of a lifelong dream.

The above objectives can safely be pursued within our customary paradigm of thought. Where this paradigm is deficient, however, as for example in the case of paralysis or an incurable disease, one is always free to impose a new paradigm of thought which transcends the former limitations.

It goes without saying that the imposition of a personal preferential paradigm of thought, which runs counter to that of the majority, must always demand a greater investment of energy, as it is necessary to overcome the inertia of the former conditioning of mind. Again, it is the zest and faith with which each new paradigm is applied which is the determinant of success.

Examples of such variations from common experience can apply to all aspects of life. They are particularly suited to sport. In the pursuit of sport most sportsmen and women give little thought to the limiting effects of the paradigm, or to the possibility that the paradigm within which each sport is played may itself be changed.

Whereas much can be gained by the practice of visualisation towards an intended goal within the accepted paradigm, even more amazing things can be achieved by overriding the accepted paradigm altogether. So, for example, a golfer or tennis player need not be bound by the commonly accepted laws of dynamics. We assume that a golf ball must inevitably be bound by the laws of motion and gravitation in negotiating the slope and nap of a putting green.

Yet, with a strong mind which is able to superimpose a different paradigm of thought in which these limitations do not apply, it would be possible to putt directly at the hole and ignore such features as the cut of the green and its slope. The ball would travel unerringly over these features in a straight line directly into the hole.

The first practitioner of such a miraculous form of putting would nevertheless have to counter a strong contingent of foes, who would no doubt attribute this result to the influence of magic, voodoo or witchcraft.

Similarly, tennis players could superimpose new mental paradigms in the execution of their ground strokes. So a ball struck with a heavy top-spin may suddenly skid off the ground at an unexpected angle, thoroughly confusing an opponent who was expecting the customary bounce of the ball under such circumstances. Achieving such a result is simply a matter of focusing the mind on the intended objective, and then operating in the confident faith that such a result can be attained.

The subtlety of such an approach is that the applicable mental paradigm could be changed as the game was in progress. So balls struck within the normal paradigm of thought would behave in one way, and those within another paradigm would behave quite differently. We can easily imagine how formidable any player would be who had the necessary strength of mind to vary paradigms at will.

Within our accepted paradigm of thought, we believe that a baseball bat or golf club is an inert object which exercises no influence over the ball, other than as an instrument of action. Yet if we were to substitute this thought with the idea that the bat or club was a resonator of energy which could be charged, then we could mentally infuse it with an enormous reservoir of power.

This power could then be used to achieve a formidable effect, out of all proportion to the physical energy expended. So the casual swing of a baseball bat could produce an explosive effect sending the ball rocketing out of the stadium. Again, the paradigm within which one chose to operate could be varied according to the needs and situation of the time. Above all it would introduce an element of sheer surprise which would be quite unnerving to opponents and nothing short of amazing to onlookers.

The range of possible interactions between mind and matter are so vast that entire volumes would be necessary even to begin to do justice to them. Yet we may perhaps conclude by offering an example of how the creative mind can deal with the daily challenge of living, by applying the power of visualisation and focused thought.

One day in November 1987, Bruce Gibbs rented a Piper Cherokee in which to do some aerial sightseeing. Although he was a scallop fisherman by profession, he was also a trained pilot with some five years of flying experience. On this particular day, Gibbs, then aged 46, took off from Chatham airport in Massachusetts and climbed to an altitude of a thousand feet, where he levelled off.

Just as he was getting a feel for the controls of his rented plane its single engine cut out, causing the plane to lose height. Aware that he would have to make an emergency landing, Gibbs radioed a hasty Mayday message to Chatham, and indicated that he would try to bring the plane down in a cleared area nearby.

When it became apparent that the glide path of the plane was too steep and that he could not avoid crashing into the trees below, Gibbs tried a mental technique which he had used successfully before in other dangerous situations. He focused his mind and visualised himself walking away from the wreck unscathed. Although the plane was badly damaged in the ensuing crash, Gibbs found that he was unhurt.

The door of the cockpit was jammed, however, pinning him within the wreckage. In addition, aviation fuel was leaking out causing an imminent threat of explosion. Using both his feet to kick the door open, Gibbs rapidly exited the plane, although not before coolly collecting his briefcase and glasses. Undeterred by this close call with death, Gibbs then went for a workout at the Chatham Health Club, and subsequently spent the evening dancing.

Later, in relating his story to Michelle Caruso of the Boston Herald, Gibbs attributed his safe escape to his visualisation technique. He claimed that this technique had enabled him to walk over white-hot coals, and to survive other emergencies in the past. These included sinking boats and a diving accident in which his air supply ran out while he was 95 feet (29 metres) below the surface of the water. 27

Yet however we choose to spin, and whatever events are attracted within our webs of cosmic experience, these webs remain limits to our experience. Although we are ever free to recreate our webs in novel ways, thought itself traps the thinker within its subtle strands. For the thinker is not separate from thought, but is a creature born of thinking. The persons we believe ourselves to be are products of our interaction with experience.

In the same way that we spin our cosmic webs, so we come to create our personalities. Within the narrow confines of an individual personality, bound by the shackles of thought, there can never be real freedom of expression. True freedom comes with the transcendence of thought, for thought itself, as Krishnamurti has affirmed, can never take us to the freedom of Reality beyond.

“Thought can create the most marvelous instrument – it can go to the moon, to Venus; but thought can never possibly touch ‘the other’ because thought is never free, thought is old, thought is conditioned. Thought is the whole structure of the known.” 28

Despite the limiting nature of thought, it is always possible to be free of thought, and of the entire cycle of rebirth. Thought always exists within consciousness. But this consciousness is posited upon the Supernal Awareness of the one true Reality. When the mind no longer spins its web of thought, the pristine purity of our eternal nature shines forth.

“When the mind does not create pictures due to thoughts, it is (in) the unmodified state which is its primal and pure condition. When the pictures on a wall are erased, the original wall remains. No other work is necessary to restore its original condition.” 29

If we wish to transcend the limitations of thought, and experience the sublime joy of our true heritage, we must cease our spinning. We need to unravel that web of thought that we have so assiduously learned to spin, since the moment of our birth. In so doing, however, we face the extinction of the spinner.

Our personality, which is our most intimate and treasured possession, is itself the product of spinning, and must inevitably die with the unraveling of the web. Yet it is the death of our limited personality that is the price we must pay to rediscover our illimitable Self. It is our voluntary sacrifice of life within our web of limited expression that opens the portals of true life, and an awareness of our own resplendent Being.

For as Nisargadatta Maharaj has pointed out:

“To be a living being is not the ultimate state; there is something beyond, much more wonderful, which is neither being nor non-being, neither living nor not-living. It is a state of pure awareness, beyond the limitations of space and time.” 30 

Our lives do not end with the death of our personalities. Instead, we are reborn into a state of awareness that is shrouded in eternal bliss where we are freed from all those limitations that attended all of our previous lives. For as Jesus explained to his disciples:

“And ye shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free.”  (John 8: 32)

References: 

12 Stephen Jenkins, “The Undiscovered Country”, Neville Spearman, London, 1978, p. 144.

13 Don Robins, “The Secret Language of Stone”, Rider, London, 1988, p. 160.

14 Ibid, p. 163.

15 Lawrence LeShan, “The Medium, The Mystic and The Physicist”, Ballantine, New York, 1975, pp. xiii-xiv.

16 Ibid, p. 154.

17 Henry Margenau and Lawrence LeShan, “Einstein’s Space and Van Goch’s Sky”, Macmillan, New York,1982, p. 6.

18 Quoted in Fate magazine, June, 1988, p. 7.

19 “Tripura Rahasya”, translated by Swami Saraswathi, Sri Ramanasramam, Tiruvannamalai, 1962, p. 157.

20 “The Collected Works of Ramana Maharshi”, edited by Arthur Osborne, Rider, London, 1959, p. 25.

21 D.T. Suzuki, “Manual of Zen Buddhism”, op.cit., p. 40.

22 “The Collected Works of Ramana Maharshi”, op.cit., p. 142.

23 “Tripura Rahasya”, op.cit., p. 88.

24 “The Collected Works of Ramana Maharshi”, op.cit., p. 113.

25 “Tripura Rahasya”, op.cit., p. 100.

26 Ibid, pp. 153-4.

27 Curtis Fuller, “Mind Power?”, Fate magazine, June, 1988, pp. 20-23.

28 J. Krishnamurti, “Tradition and Revolution”, Orient Longman, Bombay, 1974, p. 23.

29 “Tripura Rahasya”, op.cit., p. 137.

30 “I Am That”, Conversations with Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, translated by Maurice Frydman, Book I, Chetana, Bombay, 1973, p. 140.

Allan, Our Magical World, March 8, 2019, 3:29 pm

Our Magical World – Part Three

We are not bound by the so-called “laws” of science unless we choose to be. Nor are we bound by the idea that our bodies are subject to all the limitations that science imposes upon us. We are always free to discard them whenever we wish.

Evidence continues to accumulate that the mind is able to overcome the physical limitations of the body to a degree that is regarded as impossible, according to accepted scientific and medical opinion.

When Paul Brunton visited Egypt in his search for people with unusual talents, he happened to meet a man who offered to show him some strange feats of hypnotism.

When he expressed interest in seeing these powers, the hypnotist, who called himself Monsieur Ades, placed his female associate named Marguerite into a hypnotic trance. He then invited Brunton to blindfold the lady so that she would be unable to see through her eyes.

He obliged by fastening pieces of gummed tape across her eyebrows, eyelids and cheeks. On top of the tape, he tied a thick velvet bandage around her eyes and head, until he was satisfied that her vision was completely obscured.

Ades then invited Brunton to select at random any passage from any book of his choice and place it in front of Marguerite. He chose a scientific book published in French, marked a certain paragraph, and set it in front of her.

At the signal given by Ades, Marguerite picked up a pencil and began to write. As she did so the hypnotist stood silently by watching her. In a few minutes she completed the task. Brunton then asked her to underline certain words in the text, which she did.

When he scrutinised what the lady had written, Brunton found that his selected passage had been accurately transcribed, including the words that he had underlined, with the exception of the word statisticiens, which she had recorded as statistiques.

Following this test, Ades then asked Marguerite to write out the same passage, but this time using her left hand rather than her right. Brunton reported that she did so with ease, even though she later claimed in her awakened state that she was not ambidextrous. 38

This hypnotic feat is usually dismissed by western skeptics as just another example of contrived fraud, resulting from collaboration between a cunning magician and his trained accomplice. Yet what made Brunton’s evidence significant was that it was matched by a Pakistani by the name of Kuda Bux.

Bux was born in Kashmir in 1906. During the 1930’s he travelled to the west and gave stage performances under the pseudonym of Professor K. B. Duke. Bux claimed that he possessed a talent for eyeless sight and gave numerous demonstrations to support his claim.

In 1934 he entertained a group of distinguished scientists in London which included Edward Andrade, then professor of physics at London University. Bux permitted himself to be blindfolded to the satisfaction of all those present, and then asked for a book to read.

Before one was produced, professor Andrade suggested that they obtain one which none of those present had ever read, in order to eliminate the possibility of any telepathic liaison. Several books were sent for from a nearby bookstore and placed before the Kashmiri performer.

Bux then extended his hands over one of the volumes and began to read aloud in his characteristic melodious style. When he was halfway down the page, Andrade switched books and opened another at random. Bux hardly interrupted his flow of words before continuing to read aloud from the new volume. He continued reading page after page, regardless of how often the books were changed.

On another occasion, Bux permitted a physician to administer atropine to his eyes before conducting his demonstration. Although atropine produces a blurring of vision, this made no difference to the successful outcome. Another doctor insisted on putting a film of collodion over his eyes prior to applying the bandages, but this too had no effect on his ability to see.

Bux went on to display a series of sensational examples of his talent. On one occasion in a Manchester hospital, having been securely blindfolded by a physician, he walked down the corridor, stepped outside, mounted a bicycle and rode off into the afternoon traffic.

It was a feat that he later performed again in New York, when he rode a bicycle blindfolded through the traffic of Times Square. On this occasion his head was almost completely swathed in bandages. Again, in Liverpool in 1937, while heavily bandaged, Bux calmly walked along a narrow ledge on the edge of a building some two hundred feet above the ground. 44 

As amazing as the exploits of Kuda Bux were, they made little impression on the scientists of his time, and to this day he is still discounted as a fraud.

Critics have dismissed him as just another clever sleight-of-hand artist, who was able to see perfectly well with his physical eyes by the subtle manipulation of his bandages, in a way that would enable him to see via a “nose-peek”, a downward glance through the spaces alongside the nose.

Despite the vehemence of their views, however, these sceptics have displayed little enthusiasm for repeating his ventures into the New York traffic. Their intellectual stance remains an ironic reflection of the truth that there are none so blind as those who will not see.

In defence of this Pakistani, it is instructive to learn how Kudu Bux himself explained the nature of his powers. He claimed that his talent was self-taught, and that it was the result of many years of practice. Far from being unique, however, Bux claimed that anyone could do what he had done, if they were prepared to undertake the necessary mental discipline.

Based on the guidance he received from a guru in Hardwar in northern India, Bux learned to concentrate his mind to the point where he could focus his attention without the invasion of any distracting thoughts. This was merely a preliminary discipline, however, for he claimed that eyeless sight depended on the ability to visualise what the physical eyes could not see.

Bux began by memorising certain objects and then, after blindfolding himself, trying to recreate pictures of these objects in his mind. In due course, he found that he was able to establish a link between these physical objects and his mental visualisations. He learned to see these objects even when blindfolded. After starting with furniture, pictures, flowers and maps, he graduated to the printed page.

Finally, after eleven years of strenuous effort, he was able to read books at will. To those who claimed that he possessed X-ray vision he replied: “X-ray vision would imply that I can see through my blindfold. But I cannot see through anything. I see with something else other than my eyes. I see with the mind’s eye.” 45

As amazing as the claims of Kudu Bux were, they were dwarfed by experiments carried out by the French scientist Jules Romains.

In 1918, Romains theorised that human beings might actually be able to see without using their physical eyes. He therefore decided to conduct a series of experiments to test this possibility of eyeless sight. He began his experiments by hypnotising a man whom he had picked at random. He then proceeded in the following manner:

“I bandaged his eyes and warned him that he would be using a faculty which he possessed beyond doubt, although he had never had occasion to discover it. I explained to him briefly that I was going to place a newspaper in his hands and that he should try to “see” and “read” some, at least, of the largest letters.  

“I made it very clear that he was not to rely on sensations of touch; that he was to “see”, in the strict sense of the word, and furthermore that I was persuaded that he could do it.” 39

It is important to note that Romains planted the suggestion to the hypnotised man that he did, in fact, possess the ability to “see” without the use of his physical eyes, and that he, Romains, had absolute confidence in his ability to utilise this hitherto unused faculty.

Romains then produced a copy of a newspaper which the man had not previously seen and asked him to read the title. The man made an intense effort, as was demonstrated by his agitation and nervous gestures. After a silence of about two to three minutes, the subject began, hesitantly, to announce the title of the newspaper, which was printed in letters 30 millimetres (1.2 inches) in height.

The title conveyed by the subject was correct. Romains congratulated the man and then asked him to read out the title of an article printed in letters of five millimetres (.2 inches). He redoubled his efforts, and after a short while came up with a heading which, although not entirely correct was nevertheless a very close equivalent.

The effort to “see” these letters had so exhausted his subject that Romains was obliged to terminate his experiment at that point. In conducting this test, Romains noted that the man had not been forewarned before hypnosis about the nature of the material that would be presented to him.

He also stressed that at no time had this man held the newspaper in his hands while “reading” the contents. This experiment was conducted in broad daylight in the presence of two witnesses.

Stimulated by this initial success, Romains repeated this experiment with four other volunteers. These volunteers were not pre-selected for any special reasons. They merely happened to be the first four people who came along. Following the same procedure as before, he hypnotised each subject individually, and then asked him to “read” from a newspaper.

Although none of these volunteers had been told anything in advance about the nature of these experiments, all of them displayed a capacity to “see'” under hypnosis while blindfolded.

In the course of hundreds of subsequent tests, which were all successful and conducted in the presence of others, Romains took every precaution he could think of to eliminate the possibility of fraud. He placed the reading material under a glass cover so that the subject had no direct contact with the material itself.

The subjects were blindfolded in different ways suggested by those witnessing these experiments. To avoid the possibility of the volunteers gaining a glimpse of the material through a gap in the bandages, Romains constructed an articulated set of metal panels which he called a bouclier.

This simple arrangement prevented any direct line of sight between the eyes of the subject and the reading material, by allowing a metal panel to be placed beneath the jaw of the blindfolded person, which shielded the material which lay beneath.

Having now acquired convincing evidence of the ability of his subjects to “see” under hypnosis without the use of physical eyes, Romains wondered whether this faculty was a product of the hypnotic state alone, or whether it could be cultivated in the normal state of consciousness.

In order to investigate this possibility, he decided to use himself as a subject. He therefore began a series of experiments which involved thirty-one sittings, and which extended over a period of about one hundred and fifty hours.

During these experiments Romains securely blindfolded himself and took particular care to avoid any slivers of light penetrating along the sides of his nose, thus allowing him to see the material with his physical eyes. He also adopted a posture of extreme mental concentration, which he considered to be indispensable to any success he might achieve.

His attitude throughout these experiments was one of confident expectancy. He imbued himself with the conviction that he actually did possess the faculty he was seeking to express, and simply waited expectantly for signs of confirmatory evidence. As Romains noted at the time:

“We must act as if we had the power of entering into direct contact with the exterior things present, as if the surroundings and the objects of which they are made up came to us, declared themselves to us without intermediary.” 40

Romains’ first dozen sittings, which lasted for about five hours at a time, proved to be extremely exhausting and passed without the faintest sign of any inner vision. Despite his initial disappointment, he persisted in his efforts.

As the sittings progressed, Romains found that he began to make out vague shapes and colours. These initial glimpses were wavering and discontinuous at first and possessed no precise contours or definition. As he continued his efforts, however, he was able to identify large objects that were brightly illuminated.

By the end of his sittings, Romains had succeeded in seeing various objects that were located in the room around him. This awareness of internal vision was not just limited to those objects directly in line with his eyes, but also included those objects which were behind him. His acquired sense of vision was, in fact, spherical in nature, operating over the complete span of 360 degrees.

Realising that the extraordinary faculty which he had discovered could be of profound benefit to the blind, Romains then conducted a series of experiments with two people who had become completely blind and who no longer retained any retinal sensitivity.

These new experiments were undertaken in a normal state of consciousness, without recourse to any form of hypnosis. Romains’ first subject was a man called Michel who had lost his sight during combat. Although the initial experiments proved fruitless, Michel continued until he was finally able to identify the number 4, a figure of some eight centimetres (three inches) in height, which had been placed under glass in a developing frame.

A second blind subject, named Baudoin, soon gained similar success. Buoyed up by this breakthrough, the two blind subjects rapidly began to identify other numbers, and to recognise colours and other objects. Michel and Baudoin were jubilant that they had found a means of restoring their sight. They returned to the Centre de Nice (a local hostel for the blind) to tell the news of their amazing success. Their joy, alas, proved to be short-lived.

“Michel and Baudoin were convinced that their blindness would cease; and in spite of my distinct advice they announced to their comrades of the Centre (de Nice), and perhaps to others, these facts, the possibility of which they had not considered ten days earlier.  

“I did not see them again. My most urgent representations did not even secure me the privilege of meeting them. I encountered polite but evasive intermediaries who talked of “fatigue” and “passing indisposition”. 41

Believing that he had stumbled upon a discovery which held the utmost value for science and medicine, Romains tried for many months to gain the interest of the French Academy of Sciences, the Academy of Moral Sciences, and the Sorbonne.

Finally, at 7 o’clock one Thursday evening in October 1920, Romains was invited to give a demonstration of eyeless sight at the Sorbonne at 2 o’clock on the following day.

When he explained that it was hardly possible to prepare a subject at such short notice, he was informed: “If you are unable to show us anything tomorrow we shall of course come to no conclusion whatever against your work, and if on the other hand you show us the slightest thing, the least bit of anything, we will cry it from the housetops.” 42

By an amazing stroke of luck Romains was able to contact a person who had conducted two preliminary tests of half an ­hour each two years before. This man agreed to present himself at the Sorbonne at the prescribed time on the following afternoon.

When the dignitaries assembled at the appointed hour, Romains proceeded to blindfold and hypnotise his subject. Although he was doubtful that any positive result would be forthcoming at such short notice, and with so little preparation, the man successfully identified various objects that were placed in front of him.

When Romains later discussed the implications of this result with the professors who had witnessed it, they declared that “they no longer recalled anything clearly enough.” 43

On the following day, a report was issued to the effect that Romains had been revealed to be a fraud. He was accused of “trickery” and was said to have “broken down” at having been exposed, to the point where he had talked of tearing up the records of his work.

The scientific world was not ready then, nor is it ready now, to recognise a fact that was contrary to its accepted paradigm of thinking.

Yet, the astonishing truth is that vision is a function of the mind and is not dependent on the physical operation of the eyes. As such, sight does not require the possession of healthy eyes, and people who are blind can still learn to see.

Romains had provided the evidence, assembled in scrupulously scientific fashion, to prove the existence of the faculty of eyeless sight. What he had not done, and could not do, was to explain how such a “miraculous” process had actually come about.

But here again, it simply is not possible to “explain” a phenomenon that is expressly forbidden by a certain paradigm of thinking, within the context of that paradigm of thought.

Since Romains’ demonstration of eyeless sight clearly breached the boundaries of accepted scientific thinking, the response of the professors of the Sorbonne matched the attitude of the Holy Fathers of Rome who had confronted Galileo three centuries before.

Eyeless sight could not be real because the accepted scientific paradigm did not permit the manifestation of such a phenomenon. There was clearly no point in entertaining this anomalous fact, since all the known facts contradicted it.

Because his ideas offended the accepted theories of vision, Romains became yet another victim of the ages old crusade against the revelation of the true potential of the human mind. Just as it is not necessary to have physical eyes in order to see, so it is not necessary to have ears in order to hear.

When Napoleon Hill was an expectant father, pacing up and down outside the delivery room waiting to hear the results of his wife’s confinement, he saw two nurses emerge from the room. Instead of stopping to talk to him, however, they strode swiftly past. A few minutes later the attending physician appeared with a grave expression on his face, and motioned Hill aside.

Before you go in,” the doctor cautioned him, “I must prepare you for a shock. It’s a boy and he was born without ears. He hasn’t the slightest sign of ears, and of course he will be deaf all his life.” 46

The average father would have heard this pronouncement with overwhelming gloom and would have resigned himself to his son’s inevitable handicap in life.

But Napoleon Hill was not an average father and did not accept the fact that his son would be obliged to spend his life in a cocoon of silence. He did not, however, resort to some form of technological or surgical relief. Instead, he tried something far more intuitive and revolutionary.

For the next nine years Hill adopted a programme of what might be called “creative visualisation”, in which he formulated in his mind the image of his son without any hearing disability.

He resolutely pursued this campaign of faith in the conviction that he could help his son through the power of focused thought. Some twenty-five years later, Hill’s son had an appointment with another physician. This time the specialist approached Hill smilingly.

“Miraculous”, he exclaimed, “I have X-rayed this young man’s head from every possible angle, and I see no evidence that he possesses any form of hearing equipment. Yet my tests show that he has sixty-five percent of his normal healing capacity!” 47 

The boy, who would otherwise have been condemned to a life of limited opportunity, was instead able to attend normal grade school, high school and college, all of which he passed with excellent grades. When confronted by this astonishing enigma the ear specialist could only concede:

“Without doubt the psychological directive the father gave through the child’s subconscious mind influenced nature to improvise some sort of nerve system which connected the brain with the inner walls of the skull and enabled the boy to hear by what is known as bone induction.” 47

Jesus observed that all things were possible to any person who truly believed. By contrast, the hardened realist of today’s materialistic age has become conditioned into thinking that only those things are possible which scientific law decrees.

But as has long been demonstrated by those simple souls who have possessed the necessary faith, the “laws of physics” and the “laws of nature” do not establish limits to what is possible in this world. The spirit of life which infuses every heart is, as Maharaj has indicated, “a manifestation or expression of a principle fundamentally and totally free”. 48

There is literally no limit to what the unconditioned mind is able to achieve.

Science’s ability to preside over human experience is limited to those who have bound themselves within the purview of scientific thinking. Those who do not choose to be stayed by its commands, find that the rigid laws of science become transformed into gossamer strands of silk.

Not only are people able to see without eyes and hear without ears, but there is evidence to suggest that people are able to think and function normally without any sign of brains!

The English Mechanic, for example, published an account in 1914 of three cases which came to the attention of Dr. Etienne Destot, a radiological surgeon associated with the Tribunal of the Seine in Paris.

In the first case a boy of twelve fractured his skull on a gas-lamp as he was sliding down the balustrade of a staircase. The boy was examined by Dr. Daniel Moliere, a surgeon of the Dieu Hospital in Lyons. The doctor stated that the boy had lost a bowl of brains.

Although he remained in a coma for ten days, he subsequently regained consciousness and, to the utter amazement of the attending doctor, regained the use of all his faculties.

In another instance, a stonemason was severely injured when a large cornice stone, which he was mounting, gave way and fell on him. After lapsing into a coma for fifteen days, the mason also awakened to the full use of his former skills. Even though the left frontal bone and left frontal lobe of the brain had been torn away in the accident, his motivity, sensitivity and speech remained unimpaired.

Finally, an Arab was admitted to a hospital in Algiers, suffering from a wound to his skull, which had been caused by the blow of a hammer. For two months the man showed no sign of any disability. Then unexpectedly, he fell into a coma and died. A post-mortem examination of the Arab revealed that he did not have any trace of brains left in his skull.” 49

The disclaimer that these incidents were merely bizarre anecdotal reports drawn from unreliable sources in the distant past, can be discounted by the report which was published in Science in 1980.

This report announced some extraordinary findings regarding intelligence and the cerebral cortex which had been discovered by the British neurologist John Lorber, holder of a research chair in pediatrics at Sheffield University. In the course of conducting research into the nature of hydrocephalus, or water on the brain, Lorber did a series of brain scans on people who suffered from this malady.

One of these persons was a student at the University who had been referred to Lorber by his personal physician, when it was noticed that his head was slightly larger than normal. Lorber performed a brain scan on this student and was startled by the result.

“When we did a brain scan on him, we saw that instead of the normal 4.5-centimetre thickness of brain tissue between the ventricles and the cortical surface, there was just a thin layer of mantle measuring a millimetre or so. His cranium is filled mainly with cerebrospinal fluid.” 50 

Not only was Lorber surprised to find that the student could function in a normal way, but he was later astonished to discover that the young man had an IQ of 126 and had gained a first-class honours degree in mathematics. Yet, as Lorber had found, he had virtually no brain.

Nor was this an isolated case, for as Patrick Wall, professor of anatomy at University College, London, has remarked:

“Scores of similar accounts litter the medical literature, and they go back a long way, but the important thing about Lorber is that he’s done a long series of systematic scanning, rather than just dealing with anecdotes. He has gathered a remarkable set of data and he challenges, “How do we explain it?” 50

Evidence continues to accumulate that certain individuals are able to lead fully productive and functional lives, but who do not have any grey matter in their skulls. Albert Einstein was fond of commenting that his brain was his “laboratory”, and when he died, he donated his brain for the advancement of science.

Researchers were amazed to discover that the brain of one of the greatest scientists the world has known, weighed almost a third less than that of the average human being.

Future historians of science may consider it fortunate that the young Einstein was never examined by a brain specialist who had been trained to equate the size of the brain with potential human achievement. Einstein might well have been told that he could never expect to take his place in normal society, or to complete his elementary education.

Science has determined man to be a creature of the earth, and a product of the long, slow march of time. Born out of the primeval slime of antiquity, he is believed to have emerged from the ancient seas, until he came to stalk the land.

Driven by the constant struggle for survival, he mutated through a kaleidoscope of forms, until he laboriously reached that pinnacle of physical expression in which he exists today. Man is believed to be the captive of his genes, which set strict limits to what he may and may not do.

The testimony of the Sages points to an altogether more ethereal source. Man, they say, is a creature of ancestral freedom. The apparent limits of his physical form are but the shadows of his mind. Loose the shackles of his thoughts, they claim, and he is free to explore the utmost limits of desire.

His only obstacle is the impediment of his own belief. Man’s ultimate destiny, and the end of all his striving, lies in the rediscovery of his one true source.

Continued in Part Four

References:

38 Paul Brunton, “A Search in Secret Egypt”, Dutton, New York, 1936, pp. 99-101.

39 Jules Romains, “Eyeless Sight”, translated by C. K. Ogden, Citadel, Secaucus, 1978, pp. 46-47.

40 Ibid, p. 136.

41 Ibid, pp. 194-195.

42 Ibid, pp. 186-197.

43 Ibid, p. 198.

44 John Godwin, “This Baffling World”, Hart, New York, 1968, pp. 392-395.

45 Ibid, p. 397.

46 Napoleon Hill, “You Can Work Your Own Miracles”, Fawcett, New York, 1971, p.15.

47 Ibid, p. 17.

48 “I Am That”, Conversations with Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, translated by Maurice Frydman, Book I, Chetana, Bombay, 1973, p. 10.

49 Anonymous, English Mechanic, 99:186-187, 1914.

50 Roger Lewin, “Is Your Brain Really Necessary?”, in Science, 210:1232-1234, 1980.

Allan, Our Magical World, March 7, 2019, 11:54 am